BESKil!Y 
 
 LIBRARY 
 
 ! or 
 
 CAUPOKNIA 
 
 LIBH; 
 
LATIN PROSE 
 
 THROUGH ENGLISH IDIOM. 
 
 3&ulea antj lExercfeea 
 
 ON 
 
 LATIN PROSE COMPOSITION. 
 
 BY THE 
 
 REV. EDWIN A. ABBOTT, D.D., 
 
 HEAD MASTER OF THE CITY OF LONDON SCHOOL. 
 
 WITH ADDITIONS BY' 
 
 E. R. HUMPHREYS, A.M., LL.D., 
 
 AUTHOR OF "LYRA HBLLBNICA," "MANUALS OF ADVANCED GREEK 
 
 AND LATIN PROSE COMPOSITION," " CIVIL LAW," ETC., ETC. 
 
 BOSTON: 
 
 JOHN ALLYN, PUBLISHER. 
 1882. 
 
 JOHN S. PRELL 
 
 Civil & Mechanical Engineer. 
 
 SAN FRANCISCO, CAL. 
 
HHJCAfld! IIE8J 
 
 Copyright, 1876, 
 BY JOHN ALLYN. 
 
 Cambridge: 
 Press of John Wilson 6 Son. 
 
 Add f l 
 
 GIFT 
 

 PREFATORY NOTE 
 
 BY THE AMERICAN EDITOR. 
 
 IN using this excellent little Manual with my own 
 pupils, I have felt the want of a series of simpler in- 
 troductory exercises, illustrative of the " Rules and 
 Reasons," and more especially of those applying to 
 the prepositions ; and I have therefore prepared the 
 additional exercises now inserted. I would suggest 
 to teachers the advantage of carrying out the same 
 plan to a much fuller extent while using this text- 
 book. 
 
 Much of the difficulty experienced by teachers in 
 communicating, and by pupils in acquiring, a facility 
 in Latin and Greek Composition would be removed, 
 if the former would discard both the idea and the 
 expression so constantly applied to the Greek and 
 Roman tongues, " the dead languages." Regard 
 them, as what they are, and ever will be, so long as 
 our English tongue survives, " living," and embody- 
 ing the life-essence of all the best modern tongues, 
 teach them on the same common-sense, practical 
 plans as you teach German, French, or Spanish, and 
 
 112 
 
iv PREFA TOR Y NO TE. 
 
 the duty will become an easier one to the teacher, a 
 pleasanter and more profitable one to the taught. 
 
 From the long and successful experience I have 
 had in teaching Latin and Greek composition, it will 
 not, I trust, be deemed presumptuous in me to rec- 
 ommend as I did, several years ago, in the Intro- 
 duction to my Livy as one of the most valuable 
 aids to acquiring correctness and ease of composi- 
 tion, the frequent and close analysis and written 
 translation of passages of Caesar, Cicero, and Livy, 
 in Latin, and of Xenophon and Plato, in Greek, and 
 then the requiring the pupil on the following day to 
 turn back the translation thus made into Latin or 
 Greek, not insisting on a word-for-word agreement 
 with the original, but allowing new turnings to stand, 
 if not wrong. This last plan I have ever found most 
 encouraging to the pupil. 
 
 While the " Scheme of Latin Pronunciation " is 
 retained at the end of the volume, I feel it necessary 
 to say that, beyond the Continental pronunciation of 
 the vowels, which I have advocated and used for 
 nearly twenty years, I dissent in theory as do 
 many scholars far more eminent than I from many 
 points in that " Scheme," and in the Syllabus, on 
 which it is founded, a syllabus which, to use the 
 words of one of the professors who prepared it, " has 
 fallen still-born in England." In practice, as a tutor 
 for Harvard, I am almost of necessity led into its 
 
PREFA TOR Y NO T. v 
 
 adoption, having to read with pupils who have been 
 prepared on that system. I earnestly cherish the 
 hope, however, that the Professors of Harvard, and 
 other American Colleges, will yet reconsider this 
 matter of Latin Pronunciation, and modify the rules 
 laid down for the sounds of the consonants. 
 
 E. R. H. 
 
 293 COLUMBUS AVENUE, Boston, 
 July 18, 1876. 
 
PREFACE TO FIRST EDITION. 
 
 THE title of this book, " Latin Prose through English 
 'Idiom" is not intended to be a meaningless antithesis. 
 The Author's object is to prepare English students for 
 the study and composition of Latin Prose, by calling 
 their attention first to the peculiarities of English 
 idiom, and then to the methods of representing the 
 English in the corresponding Latin idiom. 
 
 The first part consists of ' Rules and Reasons.' 
 The pupil is supposed to have gone through a 
 course of Latin Grammar and Latin Exercises, and 
 to be on the point of writing continuous Latin Prose ; 
 and this part is intended to give a rapid summary of the 
 Rules of Latin Syntax regarded from an English point 
 of view. The differences between English and Latin 
 are not only brought prominently forward, but also, 
 as far as possible, explained. The pupil's attention 
 is called to the points in which English is superior 
 to Latin, to the use of a and the, to the abundance 
 of Tenses, of Verbal Nouns, and of Compound Pre- 
 positions, and, on the other hand, to the Latin supe- 
 riority in Moods. Rules are not despised, and are 
 frequently and prominently set forth ; but an attempt 
 
PREFACE 7V FIRST EDITION. vii 
 
 is made to prepare the pupil for them by analysing 
 the English language, and by explaining the force of 
 many English words that were, until lately, seldom 
 explained, e.g. that, than, of. 
 
 A good deal of space has been given to the 
 Prepositions. It is hoped that the Dictionary of 
 Prepositions contained in Paragraph 41 may be found 
 useful, not only in preventing a good many common 
 blunders made by beginners in Latin Prose, but also 
 in training pupils habitually to connect and explain 
 the different meanings of Prepositions both English 
 and Latin. This seems a very useful mental training. 
 
 The Rules are condensed, collected, and numbered 
 at the beginning of the book, for easy reference. 
 
 One inconvenience arising from treating the subject 
 generally from an English, but occasionally from a 
 Latin, point of view, is this, that it is difficult to 
 preserve any strictly logical order in the arrangement 
 of the Rules. This would be a very serious defect 
 in a book intended to serve the purpose of a Gram- 
 mar ; but in a book of reference it may, I hope, be 
 excused, provided that the Index at the beginning 
 is found sufficient to guide any moderately careless 
 boy to the explanation and examples of each Rule. 
 
 The Examples at the end are purposely unarranged, 
 or rather are arranged with no other object than that, 
 by the time the pupil may be supposed to have for- 
 gotten a rule exemplified some six examples back, 
 another exemplification may present itself to him 
 
viii PREFACE TO FIRST EDITION. 
 
 when he is off his guard. Connected examples are 
 very useful to illustrate, but very useless to test a 
 pupil's knowledge. A pupil that knows he is " doing 
 ut " may answer correctly enough ; but set the same 
 boy on ut next day, when he is " doing quum" and 
 his correctness will often be lamentably diminished. 
 
 In order to serve as a better test, these Examples 
 have not, as the Examples in the former part of the 
 book have, the English peculiarities pointed out by 
 small capitals. The pupil, covering the Latin with 
 his hand, is intended to read off the English into Latin 
 without any help or guidance whatever. 
 
 The Exercises are arranged on a principle that I have 
 adopted for many years, and that I may call the pitfall 
 principle. Each Exercise contains a number of pits or 
 traps. All traps that prove fatal are repeated in the 
 following Exercise, in a disguised form. If the fatality 
 continues, the traps are repeated, always masked in 
 different expressions, until even the weakest pupil in the 
 class gains experience enough to warn him of danger. 
 An instance will explain what is meant. In the first 
 exercise of the term, the teacher sets, perhaps, " The 
 excellent Balbus answered in haste, * I asked you to 
 come to Rome, and you promised to do so/ &c." The 
 bottom boy sends up, " Egregius Balbus respondit 
 celeritate, rogavi te venire ad Romam et tu promi- 
 sisti facere ita." The teacher points out the correct 
 expression in each case : (i) " Balbus, vir egregius" ; 
 (2) " summa celeritate," or " celeriter" ; (3) " ' rogavi ' 
 
PREFACE TO FIRST EDITION. bt 
 
 inquit"; (4) "ut venires"; (5) " Romam," without 
 "ad"; (6) " te id facturum esse." Then he sets 
 something like the following (only carefully dispersing 
 the different traps through different parts of the new 
 exercise) : " ' I am surprised/ said (3) the passionate 
 (i) queen, 'that, though I repeatedly entreated you 
 (4) to come with (2) speed to my assistance, you have 
 made a foolish promise to remain at (5) Carthage." 1 
 Here our five old pitfalls are re-introduced, and one 
 or two, not worth now mentioning, are introduced for 
 the first time. It is needless to say that the bottom 
 boy will fall into the same pitfall four or five, or even, 
 on the subject of Sequence of Tenses and Oratio 
 Obliqua, ten times ; but at last even the dullest avoid 
 some pitfalls, and are found to have been goaded or 
 wearied into something approximating to thought. 
 
 The Exercises are selected out of some hundreds 
 dictated in the course of an experience of several 
 years. The English will occasionally be found abrupt, 
 disconnected, and, it need not be said, uninteresting. 
 I hope, however, that the language will be found free 
 from the worst fault of such exercises the fault of 
 blending English and Latin into a Latin-English 
 mixture that is no language at all, and that serves to 
 teach nothing. The Exercises are meant rather as 
 specimens of the kind of teaching than as models. 
 Each teacher will do well to dictate, or, still better 
 (if he has time), to write, exercises of his own. But 
 though apologies may be due for the execution, I 
 
x PREFACE TO FIRST EDITION. 
 
 believe the pitfall principle to be extremely useful 
 and stimulating, and I think the practice of writing 
 continuous Latin Prose in this way might be ad- 
 vantageously taught much earlier than it is taught 
 at present. Boys are wearied to death by years o'f 
 "Exercises on Rules"; and the monotony of the 
 exercise tends to suppress thought. 
 
 Some of the Exercises consist of extracts from the 
 Percy Anecdotes, modified for the purpose of exempli- 
 fying the differences between Latin and English idiom. 
 In almost all of them will be found constantly re- 
 curring exemplifications of the more important rules 
 of Latin Prose, e.g. the Sequence of Tenses, the use o 
 ' ut ' for to, and, above all, the rules of Oratio Obliqua. 
 To this last I attach great importance, for I am per- 
 suaded that a boy cannot be taught to master Oratio 
 Obliqua without having been at the same time taught, 
 in some degree, to think. 
 
 Although I fear that many pupils even in Sixth 
 Forms might consult parts of this little book with 
 advantage, yet it is not intended for them, and hardly 
 touches on style. It does not, therefore, cover the 
 same ground as Mr. Potts' "Hints towards Latin 
 Prose Composition" from which many of my pupils 
 have gained great help. 
 
 The ' Scheme of Latin Pronunciation/ at the end 
 of the book, is based on the Syllabus recently issued 
 by the Latin Professors of Cambridge and Oxford, at 
 the repeated request of the Head Masters of Schools. 
 
PREFACE TO SECOND EDITION. 
 
 THE Alphabetical Index, the changes in the headings 
 of the pages, the easier introductory exercises, and the 
 Appendix on the connection of sentences, introduced 
 into this Edition, will, it is hoped, materially increase 
 the utility of the book. 
 
 The knowledge that the First Edition had been 
 prepared somewhat hurriedly for the press prevented 
 me from acknowledging the kind help of several 
 friends, whose names I was unwilling to connect with 
 a possible responsibility for mistakes for which I alone 
 was responsible. In issuing this corrected and revised 
 Edition I feel bound to express my especial obligations 
 to Mr. J. S. Phillpotts, one of the Assistant Masters of 
 Rugby, for his general supervision of the work from 
 the first, and in particular for the Appendix in this 
 edition, which is abridged from a sketch drawn out by 
 him ; also to the Rev. J. H. Lupton, Sur-Master 
 of St. Paul's School, and to Mr. Henry Lee- Warner, 
 one of the Assistant Masters of Rugby, for several 
 valuable suggestions and corrections. My acknow. 
 ledgments would be incomplete without reference to 
 the help given me, in the course of preparing this 
 Edition, by Mr. H. J. Roby help that increases my 
 regret that the second volume of his Latin Grammar 
 is still a hope deferred. 
 
CONTENTS. 
 
 PACK 
 
 RULES* Xiii 
 
 RULES AND REASONS I IO6 
 
 MISCELLANEOUS IDIOMS 1 07 130 
 
 GRADUATED EXERCISES 131 175 
 
 SCHEME OF LATIN GENDERS 176 
 
 SCHEME OF LATIN PRONUNCIATION 177 
 
 APPENDIX ON THE CONNECTION OF SENTENCES . 178 
 ALPHABETICAL INDEX l8o 
 
 * These Rules will be found to serve the purpose of a detailed Index to 
 pages x 106. 
 
INDEX OF RULES. 
 
 TTiese Rules are intended to be committed to memory, and are 
 therefore expressed as tersely as possible, without attempt at 
 illustration. For explanations and examples, the pupil is 
 referred, by the fgures in brackets, to the Paragraphs in the 
 ' Rules and Reasons. ' For instance Rule 92 simply states 
 the Latin use of Verbs of fearing. For the explanation, the 
 pupil is referred to Paragraph 49. 
 
 The Index will also serve as a detailed Table of Contents to the 
 ' Rules and Reasons? 
 
 1. THERE is a reason for every irregularity, (i) 
 
 2. Latin-derived words in English can seldom be re- 
 presented by their Latin originals. (2) 
 
 3. Many English words, especially abstract Nouns, 
 have no single corresponding words in Latin. (3, 3 a) 
 
 4. The English Passive should often be rendered by the 
 Latin Active. (4) 
 
 5. Do not translate the redundant it nor that in 
 ' that of.' (5) 
 
 6. ' // is the duty* ' must, &c. are often rendered by the 
 Latin Neuter Gerundive with Dative of the Person. (5) 
 
 7. I have a book = est mihl liber. (5) 
 
xiv LATIN PROSE. 
 
 8. Latin Verbs taking the Dative in the Active must be 
 used impersonally in the Passive, retaining the Dative, 
 e.g. ' tibi a me indulgetur.' (6) 
 
 9. Quisquam and niius are used in Negative and Com- 
 parative Sentences, and in Interrogative Sentences that 
 expect the answer * no.' (7) 
 
 10. Each returned to his tent = Ad strain quisqne ta- 
 bernaculum rediere. (7) 
 
 11. Distinguish alter and alius, quis and uter. (7) 
 
 12. Observe the different meanings of 'one? (8) 
 
 1 3. Avoid Pronouns and the repetition of Nouns, as far 
 as possible, by using the same Subject or Object for 
 different sentences. (9) 
 
 14. Nostrum and vestnrax are used partitively ; nostri 
 and vestri in other cases. (10) 
 
 14.* Se, not is nor ille, refers to the principal Subject 
 (10 a) 
 
 15. Use nnllius, nullo, for neminis, nemine. (lo) 
 
 16. The English Passive Indicative Present, e.g. 'is 
 caught, is ambiguous, and must be translated, according 
 to the sense, by the Latin Present or Perfect, (n) 
 
 17. The English Imperfect after while is often rendered 
 by the Latin Present, (n) 
 
 1 8. The English Pluperfect after till, before, and after is 
 often rendered by the Latin Perfect, (n) 
 
 19. The English Present after when, if, as long as, 
 unless, before, and after, is often to be rendered by the 
 Latin Future, (n) 
 
 20. Be careful in the use of the English Auxiliary 
 Verbs. Remember that they are us.ed Subjunctively as 
 well as Indicatively, and that they often have their ori- 
 ginal, as well as their Auxiliary, force. (12) 
 
INDEX OF RULES. xv 
 
 21. ' I ought to, could, have done] is, in Latin, Mebui, 
 potui, facere.' (12) 
 
 22. Do not fear = ne tinmeris ; not, ne timeas. (12) 
 
 23. Verbs of trusting, pleasing, helping, hurting, yield- 
 ing to, suiting, resisting, favouring, envying, being angry 
 with, take the Dative. (13) 
 
 24. I threaten you with death = minor tibi mortem. 
 
 25. Adjectives similar in meaning to the Verbs in Rule 
 23, and also Adjectives expressing likeness or unlikeness 
 and proximity, take the Dative. (13) 
 
 26. Verbs of fulness, want, &c. take the Ablative. (13) 
 
 27. Pudet, pcenitet, piget, miseret, tredet take the 
 Accusative of the Person feeling, and the Genitive of that 
 which causes the feeling. 
 
 28. Write 'interest Tulli' but 'interest mea, tua, no- 
 tra, &c.' (13 a) 
 
 29. Misereor, obliviscor, and reminiscor take the 
 Genitive. (130) 
 
 30. Fungor, fruor, utor, vescor, pascor, and potior 
 take the Ablative. (130) 
 
 31. Doceo, celo, rogo, oro, and interrogo take two 
 Accusatives. (14) 
 
 32. So do xnoneo, admoneo, and hortor, when the 
 
 Accusative of the thing is a neuter Pronoun. (14) 
 
 33. Transduce and transport take two Accusatives. 
 (H) 
 
 34 Verbs compounded of Prepositions, and implying 
 motion, take the Dative of the Indirect Object, if they are 
 used metaphorically, e.g. 'princeps imperatori milites 
 detraxit.' (15) 
 
xvi LATIN PROSE. 
 
 35. If literally used, they require the repetition of the 
 Preposition, e.g. 'anulum de digit o detraxit.' (15) 
 
 36. He flung himself at Caesar's feet = Csesari se ad 
 pedes projecit. (15) 
 
 57. Verbs signifying preferring and the contrary take 
 the Dative of the Indirect Object. (15) 
 
 38. After a verb of motion to, names of towns and 
 small islands are in the Accusative without a Preposition. 
 So are domum, hnnram, and rus. (16) 
 
 39. After a verb of motion from, the above-mentioned 
 words are in the Ablative without a Preposition. (16) 
 
 40. After a verb of rest in, the above-mentioned words 
 are, if Singular, in a locative case ending in -i (but 
 Roma-i is written Romse) : if Plural, in the Ablative. (16) 
 
 41. Sum, do, duco, tribuo take a double Dative, e.g. 
 ' librum mihi dono dedit.' (17) 
 
 42. The brave Balbus = Balbus, vir fortissimus. (18) 
 
 43. Two or more Adjectives are not attached to the 
 same Noun without et or que. (19) 
 
 44. This disgraceful calamity = hsec tam fceda cala- 
 mitas. (19) 
 
 45. The men in the ship = qui erant in navi. (20) 
 
 46. The sooner, the better = quo citius, eo melius. (2 1) 
 
 47. Distinguish between a meaning any, and a meaning 
 a certain. (22) 
 
 48. No poet = nemo poeta. (22) 
 
 49. Every one of superior learning ) _ ( doctissimus 
 
 A II the mosi learned men ) 1 quisque. (22) 
 
 50. Omnis means all and not every, in Prose. (22) 
 
INDEX OF RULES. xrii 
 
 (a) I, OCX) or } __ ( (a) mille milites. 
 " () 10,000 men ) ( (b) decem millia militum. 
 
 52. More learning = plus doctrinse. 
 
 53. Participles are freely used as Adjectives in English, 
 but not in Latin, e.g. ' the despairing soldiers/ ' milites, 
 Join desperantes,' but not 4 desperantes militea.' (23) 
 
 54. With and in, denoting manner, must not be trans- 
 lated by the simple Ablative of a Noun unqualified by an 
 Adjective, e.g. ' / n anger,' 'with fury' = iracunde, or 
 N.B. summa iracundia. (24) 
 
 55. Nunc refers to the Present, simply ; jam to the 
 Present regarded with reference to the Pasc or Future. 
 
 (25) 
 
 56. More, when used with Verbs and meaning to a 
 greater extent, is plus \ when used with Adjectives, and 
 when meaning rather, it is magis. (26) 
 
 57. Extension of time or space is expressed by the 
 Accusative. (27) 
 
 58. The Ablative denotes the time at which or within 
 which anything is completed. (28) 
 
 59. Definite price is expressed by the Ablative. (29) 
 
 60. Tanti, quanti, pluris, minoris (but on the Other 
 hand, magiio, parvo, plurimo, &c.) are used after Verbs 
 of selling and buying. (29) 
 
 61. Tanti, quanti, pluris, minoris, with magni, parvi, 
 piurimi and minimi, and also nihili, are used after verbs 
 of estimation, and after est, signifying /'/ is worth. (29) 
 
 62. Adjectives, as well as Verbs, denoting fulness and 
 emptiness, are followed by the Genitive or Ablative, 
 (30,30 
 
 63. Some Participles that are used as Adjectives take 
 an Ablative of the quasi- Instrument, e.g. 'contentus 
 parvo.' (32) 
 
 b 
 
xviii LATIN PROSE. 
 
 64. Digxms and indignus take the Ablative. (32) 
 
 65. Natus, satus, and ortus take the Ablative. (32) 
 
 66. An English Preposition between two Nouns, if it 
 denotes that the second is the Object of the first, is often 
 expressed by the Latin Genitive, as 'militise vacatio,' 
 * exemption from service.' (33) 
 
 67. Present Participles used as quasi-Nouns, and some 
 Adjectives in -ax, take the Genitive, e.g. ' patiens laboris/ 
 ' capax imperil.' (34) 
 
 68. An English Preposition denoting that a Noun is 
 the Object of an Adjective is often rendered by the Geni- 
 tive, as 'perfidise imperitus.' (35) 
 
 69. Verbs of condemning, as well as of accusing and 
 acquitting, take the Genitive of the charge. (36) 
 
 70. Of preceding a Noun denoting a quality is rendered 
 by combining an Adjective and Noun in the Genitive or 
 Ablative. (37) 
 
 71. It is the mark of, characteristic of, like, &c. are 
 often expressed by the Genitive. (38) 
 
 72. English Prepositions denoting rest must often be 
 rendered by Latin Prepositions denoting motion, e.g. * on 
 our journey/ * ex itinere.' (39) 
 
 73. Do not translate redundant of, e.g. 'the City of 
 London/ (40) 
 
 74. Of is often rendered in Latin by combining an Ad- 
 jective or Participle with a Noun, e.g. ' summus mons,' 
 ' the top of the mountain.' (40) 
 
 The English Prepositions in Alphabetical order are 
 arranged, with their Latin equivalents, on pages 31 57, 
 
INDEX OF RULES. xix 
 
 75. By, denoting agency, requires a or ab before the 
 Ablative. Page 57. 
 
 76. In when expressing direction literally or metaphori- 
 cally, is followed by the Accusative. Page 44. 
 
 77. Cum is an enclitic after me, te, nobis, vobis, quo, 
 quibus. Page 56. 
 
 78. The measure of excess or defect is expressed by the 
 Ablative, e.g. ' quinque pedibus major.' (42) 
 
 Idioms involving Conjunctions and the Relative Pro- 
 noun, are arranged in Paragraphs 43 to 72. 
 
 79. Thomas, John, and Henry Thomas, Johannes, 
 Henricus ; or Thomas et Johannes et Henricus. (44) 
 
 So. Autexn, enim, que, quidem, ve and vero, and 
 generally igitur, cannot stand first in a sentence. (440; 
 
 8 1. Sed corrects or denies : autem (8e) introduces some- 
 thing not inconsistent with what has gone before : at 
 introduces a clause abruptly. (44 a) 
 
 82. ' And not/ ' and no one/ ' and never,' ' if . . . not/ 
 are neque, nee quisquam, neque unquam, nisi. (45) 
 
 83. I say it is not true = Nego haec vera esse. (45) 
 
 84. Do not say 'ne quidem Balbus/ but 'ne Balbus 
 quidem.' (45) 
 
 85. 'And he/ * now this/ &c. must often be rendered by 
 qui, quod, &c. e.g. ' now when he heard this} ' quse quum 
 audivisset.' (46) 
 
 86. ' He also said' = 'idem dixit.' (46) 
 
 87. He burned andldt the bridge = Pontem incensum 
 deseruit. (47) 
 
x* LATIN PROSE. 
 
 88. Thut introducing an Objective or Subjective clause 
 is generally to be rendered by the Infinitive. (48) 
 
 89. Avoid the ambiguity arising from the Double Accu- 
 sative before and after an Infinitive, e.g. * Aio te ^Eacida- 
 Romanes vincere posse.' (48) 
 
 90. It seems that \ . . , 
 There is no doubt that ] he is honest. 
 
 {Videtur honestus esse. 
 Haud dubium est quin honestus sit. (49) 
 
 91. There is no doubt that he will be caught = Haud 
 dubium cst quin futurum sit ut capiatur. .(49) 
 
 92. I fear that he will come = Vereor (timeo &c.) ne 
 veniat. I fear that he will not come = Vereor ut veniat. 
 (49) 
 
 93. I heard her sing = audivi illam canentem. (50) 
 
 94. Whether, introducing a Subjective or Objective 
 clause, is zram or ' utruxn .... an ': introducing a con- 
 dition, it is sive. (51) 
 
 95. Where the Relative introduces a thought, and not a 
 mere fact, it is followed by the Latin Subjunctive. (52) 
 
 96. The Subjunctive generally follows 'suntqui/ 'erant 
 qui/ i.e. * there are, were, some (such} that? (52) 
 
 97. Qni takes the Subjunctive when introducing a state- 
 ment made by some one distinct from the writer. (52) 
 
 98. What in Dependent Interrogatives must be rendered 
 by quid and followed by the Subjunctive. (53) 
 
 99. When the qualifying an Antecedent implies great 
 or many, quantus or quot should be used instead of the 
 Relative, e.g. ' I perceived the kindness with which, &c. 
 'in'ellexi quanta benevolentia me exciperet.' (53) 
 
INDEX OF RULES. xxi 
 
 ioo. ' The most beautif"! that; ' all that; ' the men that; 
 must not be translated literally in Latin. (54) 
 
 tf. The Relative in Latin often precedes its Ante- 
 cedent 
 
 101. Therewasnoone^ {JJ ^ t p'unish} 
 (quinfleret. 
 ( quern non puniret. (55) 
 
 1 02. There was not one but hated him = Nemo eral 
 quin ilium odisset. (55) 
 
 103. The English Antecedent, when in apposition to a 
 preceding sentence, is attracted into the Relative clause 
 in Latin, e.g. 'he lightened the taxes, an act that endeared 
 him to the people/ ' quo beneficio gratus in vulgus factus 
 est.' (56) 
 
 104. Not a day passes that he does not come = Dies 
 fere nullus quin homo ventitet. (57) 
 
 105. Beware of the English omitted Relative with Par- 
 ticiples, e.g. ' those remaining here/ *qui hie manent. 
 
 (58; 
 
 1 06. Who would believe such a man as, pr, a man like, 
 Catiline ? = Quis Catilinae, homini impurissimo, credat ? 
 
 (60) 
 
 107. When two words are connected in the way of com- 
 parison by quam, and when the Verb is the same for each 
 member of the sentence of Comparison, the two words 
 stand in the same case, e.g. ' Tuiiius melior est quam 
 Balbus.' (61) 
 
 108. Quam cannot be replaced by the Ablative of the 
 second member of the comparison unless the first member 
 of the comparison is in the Nominative or Accusative, e.g. 
 ' donum dedit specie majus quam re/ not * majus re.' (62) 
 
 109. Take care not to use the Ablative instead of quam, 
 where the Adjective does not qualify either member of 
 the Comparison, e.g. ' he has a taller horse than I ' is not 
 
rxii LA TIN PROSE. 
 
 ' Ille equum altiorem habet me/ but ' quam ego (habeo).' 
 (63) 
 
 no. 'Sequence of Tenses' In subordinate sentences, 
 the Tenses depend on the Tenses of the principal sentence, 
 the rule being ' Like follows like} e.g. ' Do you know 
 where he was? ' ' Scisne ubi fuerit ? ' (64) 
 
 in. I do not know what I should have done = Nescio 
 quid facturus fuerim. (64) 
 
 112. Quum with the Imperfect and Pluperfect generally 
 takes the Subjunctive. (66) 
 
 113. Postquam takes the Perfect unless an interval is 
 expressed or emphatically implied. (66) 
 
 114. Ante quam and priusquam, dum, donee and quoad 
 are followed by the Subjunctive when design is implied, 
 or when an action is referred to that has not actually 
 commenced. (66) 
 
 
 
 115. Not because it is honourable, but because it is use- 
 ful = Non quod honestum sit, sed quia utile est. (68) 
 
 1 1 6. 'si' with the Past Tenses of the Subjunctive 
 denotes an impossible, * si ' with the Present Tenses 
 a possible, condition. (69) 
 
 117. You must never have different tenses of the Sub- 
 junctive in the Protasis and Apodosis. (69) 
 
 1 1 8. Quanquam generally takes the Indicative, quamvis 
 the Subjunctive. (69) 
 
 119. Quamvis is often used with an Adjective, without 
 a Verb. (69) 
 
 1 20. You will repent, when old = Senem te pcenitebit 
 (70) 
 
 121. He is frivolous, if not immoral = Levis est, no 
 dicam iniprobus. (70) 
 
INDEX OF RULES. xxiii 
 
 122. Instead of ut non, nt nemo, ut nunquam, write 
 He, ne quis, ne quando, where purpose is denoted. (72) 
 
 123. Utinam with the Present Subjunctive introduces 
 wishes that can be realized : with the Past Subjunctive, 
 wishes that cannot. (72) 
 
 1 To; different uses of. (73) 
 
 124. ' To? denoting purpose, must never be expressed 
 by the Latin Infinitive. (73) 
 
 125. I promise, hope, to come = promitto, spero, me 
 venturum esse. (73) 
 
 126. I hope that it is so = spero rem ita se habere. (73) 
 
 127. I happened to = accidit ut (ego) &c. (^3) 
 
 128. To, after Verbs of asking, commanding, advising, 
 and striving must be rendered by ut with the Sub- 
 junctive. Exceptions, jubeo, conor. (73) 
 
 129. The English Present Participle, inasmuch as it 
 often contains a concealed Conjunction, can seldom be 
 rendered by the Latin Present Participle. (74) 
 
 130. After ad and in use the Gerundive and not the 
 Gerund, if the Verb takes an Accusative Object. (75) 
 
 131. The Gerund or Gerundive is used after ad, de, in, 
 inter, and ob, seldom after other Prepositions. (75) 
 
 TJie English Prepositions used with Verbals are ar- 
 ranged in A Iphabetical order in pages 9396. ( 75 ) 
 
 132. The Subject of the principal Verb often comes 
 earlier in a Latin sentence than in English, so as to dis- 
 pense with is and ille. (76) 
 
 133. Use Parentheses to avoid Pronouns. (77) 
 
xxiv LA TIN PROSE. 
 
 134. In Oratio Recta leave the introductory sentence 
 unfinished, and place inquit (not dixit or respondit) after 
 the first emphatic word of the speech. (78) 
 
 135. In passing from Oratio Recta to Oratio Obliqua, 
 (i) principal Verbs fall into the Infinitive Mood and their 
 Subjecta into the Accusative ; (2) the Tenses of the In- 
 dicative are preserved in the Infinitive ; (3) where the 
 Future Infinitive does not exist, the form fore ut is used ; 
 
 (4) the Subjunctive in the Apodosis* of a Conditional 
 sentence is rendered by the Future Participle with esse 
 or fuisse. (78 a) 
 
 136. In passing from Oratio Recta to Oratio Obliqua 
 
 (5) Indicatives following si, qui and Conjunctions derived 
 from qui, are changed into Imperfect or Pluperfect Sub- 
 junctives ; (6) Imperatives become Imperfect Subjunctives ; 
 (7) Questions in the Second Person are rendered by the 
 Imperfect Subjunctive ; (8) Questions in the First or Third 
 Person, by the Accusative and Infinitive ; (9) me will be- 
 come se, hie will become illic, &c. (78 b e) 
 
 1 37. To diminish the ambiguity arising from the use of 
 he in English Oratio Obliqua, use ipse in Latin to shew 
 the reference of se. (78/) 
 
 138. In Oratio Obliqua the introductory sentence is 
 often completed. 
 
 139. Metaphors cannot be literally translated from 
 English into Latin. (79) 
 
 140. Hyperbole cannot always be literally translated, 
 e.g. I prefer a thousand deaths = malo sexcenties mori. 
 (80) 
 
 * For the meaning of this word, see page 83. 
 
LATIN PROSE 
 THROUGH ENGLISH IDIOM. 
 
 RULES AND REASONS. 
 
 1. Irregularities. When we find an irregularity in 
 Latin or in any other language 'at Corinth,' l Corinthi' 
 we ought to feel sure that there is some reason for it. 
 Sometimes we can find a reason. For example, why is 
 'at Carthage* i Carthagini,' * apparently, dative; and 'at 
 Corinth ' ' Corinthi/ genitive ? The explanation is said 
 to be that the -/ in Corinthi, Carthagini, Romai (-), 
 domi is an old locative case. 
 
 Sometimes we cannot find a reason. For example, why 
 do the Latins say ' Nexnini faveo/ but dislike to say ' Ne- 
 minis misereor/ preferring 'nuiiius misereor'? No ex- 
 planation, that I know of, has been given of this. But, 
 whether we can find cut a reason or not, we must always 
 Dear in mind that : 
 
 Rule There is a reason for every irregu- 
 larity. 
 
 2. Latin-derived words. In almost all cases English 
 words derived from Latin do not now mean the 
 
 * The form in -C is also found. It has been suggested that the -i is used 
 fa familiar names, e.g. Carthagini, but -e in others, e.g. Prseneste. 
 
 B 
 
2 ABSTRACT NOUNS. [Par. 3. 
 
 same as the Latin cognates, e.g. oppress must not be ren- 
 dered by opprimo, which means / crush or surprise. 
 
 Rule Do not* translate English words of 
 Latin derivation by Latin cognates. 
 
 Examples : secure, honest, office, occupy, obtain, observe, 
 censure, person, station, family, inspiration, succeed, 
 conspire, cease, probable, expect. 
 
 3. Complex thoughts. It is natural that the language 
 of a modern civilized nation should contain many more 
 words expressing complex thoughts, than are found in 
 the language of an ancient nation. Periphrases must be 
 used to express such modern words in the ancient 
 language, e.g. res novse for a revolution, res adversse for 
 adversity. Some metaphors, e.g. striking in ' a striking 
 thought/ cannot be literally translated into Latin. See 
 Paragraph 79. 
 
 3a. Abstract Nouns may be rendered, (i) by peri- 
 phrases, e.g. theory, prsecepta artis, quod in prseceptis 
 ?ositum est, (2) by Verbs, e.g. ' In pursuit of some 
 cherished object, they will undergo any hardship, and 
 submit to any degradation] ' quidvis perpetiuntur, cuivis 
 deserviunt, dum quod veiint consequantur.' See Par. 40. 
 
 Rule Many English words represent 
 complex thoughts for which there are no 
 single words in Latin. . 
 
 4-. The emphatic subject. In English, if we wish to 
 emphasize the Subject, e.g. John in 'John built this house/ 
 we have to use redundant //, ' // was John that, 1 &c., or 
 the Passive ' The house was built by] &c. In Latin the 
 Subject can be emphasized by the order of the words, 
 and therefore need not be emphasized by construction. 
 Hence : 
 
 Rule The English Passive should often 
 be rendered by the Latin Active. Thus 
 
 * That is, do not without verification or care. 
 
Par. 6.] THE ENGLISH PASSIVE. 3 
 
 The soldiers WERE SEIZED Milites cepit pavor 
 with a panic 
 
 5. The redundant * it. 7 To avoid an imemphatic ter- 
 mination, e.g. 4 That the man committed suicide is said? 
 (and perhaps to indicate the construction early in the 
 sentence) the English insert a redundant it. The Latins 
 never use this redundancy. 
 
 IT is said that the man com- Ferunt hominem \ mortem 
 milled suicide Homo fertur j 
 
 sibi conscivisse 
 
 *That* is often used for a previous Substantive to 
 avoid repeating it before a Preposition, generally l ofj e.g. 
 ' I would rather abide by my judgment than by that of 
 all the rest.' it is omitted in Latin. * Meo judicio stare 
 malo quam ( ) omnium reliquorum.' Sometimes the 
 Substantive is repeated, * quam judicio. 7 But never use 
 is or iiie to represent the English l that ' in ' that of.' 
 
 Rule Do not translate the redundant ' it,' 
 nor ' that ' in that of.' 
 
 Sentences stating a duty or necessity, e.g. l it is the 
 duty of Balbus to avoid this,' are often turned in Latin as 
 follows : ' The avoiding of this is for Balbus/ ' Balbo hoc 
 vitandum est.* From Intransitive verbs the Neuter of 
 the Gerundive is used impersonally, e.g. 'all must die/ 
 omnibus est moriendum/ i.e. * there is to be dying for all. 1 
 
 Rule ' It is the duty,' ' must,' &c., are 
 often rendered by the Neuter of the Latin 
 Gerundive with the Dative of the person 
 referred to. So ' I have ' = ' est mihi.' 
 
 6. The English Passive. If an Active Verb in English 
 takes a Preposition between itself and its Objects, e.g. ' I 
 trust to you/ we rarely venture to say in the Passive you 
 are trusted to/ If the Preposition is to be kept, we must 
 
 B 2 
 
4 PRONOUNS. [Par. 7, 
 
 say 'trust is given to you.' So, in Latin, where Verbs 
 in the Active take the Dative of the Object, you must 
 not place that Object as the Subject of the Passive Verb, 
 but must retain the Dative and use the Verb impersonally ', 
 e.g. * Tibi creditur/ ' there is trust given to you.' 
 
 N.B. Such verbs are very few, but some of them are 
 very common : persuadeo, noceo, credo, placeo, ignosco, 
 faveo. 
 
 Rule Latin Verbs taking the Dative must 
 be used impersonally in the Passive, retaining 
 the Dative. 
 
 7. Pronouns. The English anyone is ambiguous. 
 Distinguish between (i) quisquam* or ullus, (2) quilibet 
 or quivis (which means anyone you like}, and (3) aliquis 
 (someone, any particular person}. 
 
 ANYONE can boast that he is Cuilibet promptum est glo- 
 more learned than ANY riari se doctiorem esse 
 
 of his own pupils quam qnemquam suo- 
 
 rum discipulorum 
 
 Rule Quisquam ' and ' ullus ' are used 
 in negative and comparative sentences, and 
 
 in interrogative sentences expecting ' no.' 
 
 i 
 
 This is sometimes expressed thus : where all are excluded use ullus or 
 quisquam, where all are included use quivis or quilibet. 
 
 The beginner must also distinguish between (i) alter the 
 other (of two], and alms another; (2) uter ? which (of two] ? 
 and quia or qui ? which ? And (3) between uterque 
 each of two, and quisque each. 
 
 * It ought to be unnecessary to warn the pupil against confounding quis- 
 quam with quisque each, and quisquis -whoever. But it may be use- 
 ful to remind him of the position of quisque immediately after suus, the 
 Verb being in the Plural, in such sentences as 'they returned to their 
 several tents/ 'Ad suuzn quisque tabernacuJum rediere.' 
 
Par. 9.] PRONOUNS. 5 
 
 8. One in the sense of people, we, a man, as in ' One sees 
 every day,' &c., must be translated by nos, oumes, &c. 
 or by the Impersonal Passive, e.g. ' One ought not to 
 fear/ 'non est timendum.' After //, use the Second 
 Person (not inserting t) or quis, e.g. ' If one does one's 
 best/ * Si agia or quis agit, pro viribus.' 
 
 ' One . . . another* is l alias . . . alius ' ; * the one . . . the 
 other' is ' alter . . . alter ' 
 
 One, unless used as a numeral meaning one and not more 
 than one, is never to be translated by nnus. The neglect 
 of this rule is as faulty as the French-English use of one : 
 ' I have one book 'for * I have a book/ 
 
 Rule Observe the different meanings of 
 'one. 1 
 
 9. One, when referring to a preceding Substantive, 
 must be left untranslated in Latin, or must be translated 
 by repeating the Substantive, as in 'a small house is better 
 than a large one, 1 ' quam magna (dornus).' Here the Ad- 
 jective with its inflection renders the repetition of the Sub- 
 stantive unnecessary. 
 
 Avoid, wherever you can, the repetition of the Substan- 
 tive represented by one. ' I haven't a horse of my own, 
 but my brother lends me one,' i Equum equidem non 
 habeo ; frater autem mihi commodat.' 
 
 9a. Pronouns are not so often used in Latin as in Eng- 
 lish. The Latin Participle facilitates the omission of Pro- 
 nouns, e.g. i I saw my brother yesterday, and gave him a 
 book,' ' Fratri, viso heri, librum dedi.' The Latins also 
 omit Pronominal Adjectives often where the context leaves 
 little room for ambiguity, e.g. my is omitted in the last 
 example, and so, * Tell your brother,' ' Die fratri.' The 
 Latin use of inflections diminishes the ambiguity arising 
 from such omissions. 
 
 Rule Avoid Pronouns, and the repetition 
 of Nouns, as far as possible, by using the same 
 Subject or Object for the different parts of 
 the same sentence. See Paragraph 76. 
 
6 PRONOUNS. [Par. 10. 
 
 1O. Pronoun* ; anomalies in. 
 
 The Latins have two words to denote us and you in the 
 Genitive, one nostri, signifying us and you collectively, 
 the other nostrum, us and you distributively. Nostri 
 appears to be th* Genitive of the Adjective noster used 
 substantively. Nostri means * of our nature/ ' of our 
 interests/ * of our condition.' Nostrum is the true plural, 
 and means simply ' of us/ ' of our number.' Thus, * none 
 cf us' is l nemo nostrum 7 (partitive), but ' our mind is 
 the best part of us, i.e. of our nature] is ' nostri melior 
 psrs animus est. 7 Roughly speaking, we may say : 
 
 Rule * Nostrum/ ' vestrum ' are used par- 
 titively ; otherwise * nostri/ * vestri.' 
 
 or vestrum, even used Possessively. ' Patria est 
 
 commums omnium nostrum* parens.' The reason is that omnium 
 brings into prominence the multitudinous or distributive side of nos. 
 
 No satisfactory reason has been given, as yet, of: 
 
 Rule ' Nullius* and 'nullo' are used in- 
 stead of ' neminis ' and ' nemine.' 
 
 lOa. Him. In Early English, him often refers to the 
 Subject, e.g. f he gat him home.' This is sometimes am- 
 biguous, so we now add self (' same\ unless another 
 Subject intervenes between ' him ' and the Subject to which 
 1 him'' refers^ e.g. 'he helped himself] but 'he s-aid that 
 Balbus helped him? The Latins generally (but see 78 f.) 
 use se to refer to the principal Subject, whether another 
 Subject intervenes or not ; ' Dixit Balbum sibi subvenisse.' 
 
 Rule Se (not eum nor ilium) refers to the 
 Principal Subject. 
 
 11. English Tenses are superior to Latin in their variety. 
 There is nothing in Latin to distinguish between / 
 catch and I am catching ; between I caught, I have caught, 
 
 * Nostrum cannot be Genitive dependent on omnium. 
 
Par. ii.] TENSES. J 
 
 and / have been catching. Sometimes '/ am catching 
 may be rendered * In eo sum ut capiam' or 'Jam capio.' 
 * / have caught ten fish ' may be sometimes rendered 
 'decem pisces captos habeo;' ' / have been for two days 
 catching fish] ' biduum Jam pisces capio/ On the other 
 hand, the English Passive is ambiguous : 
 
 The catcher is CAUGHT Captus est captor 
 
 You are LOVED, / am Tu quidem amaris, mihi 
 HATED autem invidetur 
 
 Rule The ambiguous Eng. Pres. Pass, 
 form, e.g. f are built,' must be rendered, accor- 
 ding to the sense, by the Latin Pres. or Perf. 
 
 Note the following differences of idiom : 
 
 WHILE this WAS GOING ON, Dum haec genmtur, hostes 
 the enemy fled terga dederunt 
 
 Rule The English Incomplete Past (Im- 
 perfect) after while is graphically rendered in 
 Latin by the Present after * dum.' 
 
 I did not let him go TILL he Hominem non ante di- 
 
 HAD PROMISED to re- misi quam promisit SC 
 
 frain from it for the ab his in posterum tem- 
 
 future peraturum esse 
 
 AFTER the fate of the war Postquam victoria consti- 
 HAD BEEN DECIDED, he tuta est, Romee erat 
 
 used of ten to live at Rome frequens 
 
 Rule The English Complete Past (Plu- 
 perfect) when following the Conjunctions 
 'Till,' 'Before/ and After/ is often ren- 
 dered by the Latin Perfect (Aorist). 
 
 When a long interval is expressed or implied, postquam is sometimes 
 followed by the Pluperfect. If quum is used, see Paragraph 66. 
 
8 AUXILIARY VERBS. [i>ar. 12. 
 
 In saying if, or when 'he comes} instead of * shall or 
 shall have come,' we speak idiomatically but incorrectly. 
 
 The Latin is more correct than the English idiom. //, 
 till recent times, was followed by the Subjunctive inflection 
 in English, but this has died out. 
 
 He will do it if he IS ABLE Faciet, si poterit 
 / will set out when day Quum iiiucescet, (better 
 BREAKS illuxerit) proficiscar 
 
 In dependent sentences there are other important dif- 
 ferences in the use of Tenses : see Paragraph 64. 
 
 Rule The English Present Tense after 
 < When/ If,' As long as/ ' Unless/ is often 
 to be rendered by the Latin Future. 
 
 12. The Auxiliary Verbs in English require care in 
 rendering them into Latin. 
 
 For example, would is the past of wilier wish : and ' he 
 would do it, in spite of me/ means ' he wished* (Indica- 
 tive). But ' he would do it, if you asked him/ means ' he 
 would wish* (Subjunctive). So 'he could* may mean 
 'he was able/ or ' he would be able.' Note the fol- 
 lowing : 
 
 He MAY (possibly] come Fieri potest ut veniat 
 
 You MAY come (if you like) Licet tibi venire 
 
 He MIGHT help me if he Posset mihi sub venire, 
 WOULD modo si vellet 
 
 He MIGHT have helped me, Potuit, sed noluit, mihi 
 but he WOULD not subvenire 
 
 He MIGHT return at any Fieri potest nt quamvis 
 moment subito redeat 
 
 / WOULD pardon you if you Si modo tibi ipse snbveni- 
 WOULD help yourself res, ego tibi ignoscereru 
 
 (which you will not do)* 
 
 *'For rules about the Tenses of the Subjunctive, see Paragraph 69. 
 
Par. 12. j 
 
 AUXILIARY VERBS. 
 
 After breakfast he WOULD 
 (USED TO) take a walk 
 
 (/) WOULD that you knew! 
 
 You SHOULD not do this 
 
 SHOULD you do this you 
 commit a fault 
 
 Pransus ambulabat 
 
 (which I am sure you 
 will not do] * 
 
 I SHOULD (be inclined to) 
 think, say, &*c. 
 
 He MUST hear me (nothing 
 shall prevent it) 
 
 He MUST have seen me 
 
 I MUST have perished, if you 
 had not helped me 
 
 You MUST come by way of 
 Rome (for there is no 
 other way) 
 
 I MUST obey my father 
 
 I MUST confess I was mis- 
 taken 
 
 You MUST know Pm at 
 Rome 
 
 You MUST not fancy you 
 are envied 
 
 LET him re- ((i) I beg you 
 turn ((2) if he likes 
 
 Vcllexn 
 
 Utinam 
 
 > scires ! 
 
 Non debes hoc facere 
 
 Tu, si hoc faceres, culpam 
 admitteres 
 
 Dixerim, crediderim, &C. 
 
 Nihil obstabit quominus 
 (orefficiamut)me audiat 
 
 Non potuit me non videre 
 
 Perieram,f nisi tu mihi sub- 
 venisses 
 
 Necesse est per Romam 
 venias 
 
 Oportet me patri parere 
 Fatendnm est me erravissc 
 
 Scito me Romae esse 
 Noli pntare tibi invideri 
 
 Permitte homini redire 
 Redeat, si velit 
 
 Rule The Auxiliary Verbs in English 
 being used in the Subjunctive as well as in 
 the Indicative without change of inflection, 
 
 * For rules about the Tenses of the-JSubjunciive, see Paragraph 69. 
 t Perieram = / had (assuredly) died: periissem is more regulaj 
 and common. 
 
10 PROHIBITIONS. [Par. 13. 
 
 and having, sometimes, their original, as 
 
 well as their auxiliary force, are full of am- 
 
 biguities. 
 
 7 OUGHT (OWED) to ( HAVE Debui ) , facere 
 
 7 COULD (WAS ABLE TO) ( DONE this Potui j ' 
 
 Rule After < I ought,' I could/ we use 
 the Complete Present Infinitive to denote 
 that the action is not fulfilled. The Latins 
 use the Present Infinitive. 
 
 The English do is now used in prohibitions* in order to 
 surround the Negative as it were and annex it to the Verb, 
 e.g. l Do not kill him/ The negative is here connected 
 with the Verb more closely than in the older English 
 * kill him not.' In expressing a prohibition, the Latins 
 seem to have thought more of politeness than of directness. 
 They did not like to say ' do not kill/ nor even, as a rule 
 ' you will not kill,' but ' take care that y ou may be found 
 hereafter not to have killed.' ' Ne interfeceris.' 
 
 Rule In Latin prose a Prohibition is ex- 
 pressed by ' ne ' with the Second Future;Vor 
 by ' noli ' with the Infinitive, or ' cave ne ' 
 with the Present Subjunctive. 
 
 Ne with the Present Suojunctive is found in poetry, to signify prohibition. 
 
 13. Tht English Object was once represented by a 
 Dative, as well as an Accusative, Inflection. In 'give 
 him the book/ him is the Old English Dative. It would 
 be a mistake to say that to is omitted before him. This 
 Inflection is now lost in Nouns ; but after some Verbs its 
 place is still occasionally supplied by the Preposition to, 
 e.g. ' I trust (to) the man.' 
 
 Some Verbs and Adjectives, though not followed by Pre- 
 positions in English, yet to a Latin ear indicated relation 
 to, rather than immediate action on, the Object, e.g. : 
 
 * Perhaps H\SQ\.Q preface the verb by an indication of prohibition or inter- 
 rogation. 'Do not c~>me ' expresses the prohibition earlier than ' come not,' 
 and is less ambiguous than ' not come.' 
 
 4 In Deponents, use Perf. Subj. ' ne aspernatus sis.' 
 
Par. i3a.J THE OBJECT OF A VERB. u 
 
 / ENVY (LOOK ASKANCE Invideo tibi 
 
 ON) you 
 
 He is LIKE (UNTO) his father Puer patri similis est 
 
 Rule Verbs of trusting, pleasing, helping, 
 hurting, yielding to, suiting, resisting, favour- 
 ing, envying, being angry with, take the 
 Dative. 
 
 Rule Adjectives similar in meaning to 
 the above, and also Adjectives expressing 
 likeness or unlikeness, and proximity, also 
 take the Dative. 
 
 Instances are given in Grammars and in the examples at the end of the 
 book. Some words signifying nearly the same thing take different cases 
 owing to a slight difference of original meaning. Thus medeor meant 1 
 atn a remedy to, and therefore takes a Dative ; sa.HO means / make healthy, 
 and therefore takes an Accusative. So jaoceo takes a Dative, lsedo an 
 Accusative ; ixnpero / give orders to, a Dative, and jubeo / order, an 
 Accusative followed by an Infinitive. 
 
 Rule Verbs signifying ' I abound in,' ' I 
 am in need of,' ' I cease, or retire, from,' 
 mostly take the Ablative; 
 
 Examples : egreo, careo, abundo, vaco, desisto, cedo. 
 Indigeo mostly takes the Genitive. See Paragraphs 30,31. 
 
 13a. Old English Impersonal and Reflexive Verbs. 
 
 Several English Verbs denoting feelings that, in old 
 times, seemed to come inexplicably upon a man from 
 without, e.g. pity, repent, were once used impersonally, 
 e.g. ' it pitied them/ ' it repented him/ In the same 
 way : 
 
 Rule Several Latin Verbs denoting feel- 
 ings of the mind are used impersonally and 
 govern the Genitive of the Object of the 
 feeling, e.g. ' / repent (it repents me) of my anger,' 
 ' Pcenitet me iracundise mese.' These verbs 
 are pudet, pcenitet, piget, miseret, taedet. 
 
12 THE OBJECT OF A VERB. [Par. 14. 
 
 Note the following : 
 
 I t is my interest that Balbus, Mea interest Balbum, Tul- 
 
 it is the interest of Tul- Hi interest te judicio 
 
 lius that you, should win vincere 
 the case 
 
 Rule Meai* <tua,' * sua,' ' nostra,' 'ves. 
 tra,' are used in the Feminine Ablative,* 
 sometimes after ' interest,' and almost al- 
 ways after refert,' to denote the person to 
 whom a matter is of importance. ' Interest ' 
 takes the Genitive of names. 
 
 Some Verbs denoting feelings were once reflexive in 
 English,, e.g. ' he bethought him of.' So in Latin miser e or, 
 I pity (me of) ; obliviscor, I forget (me of) ; reminiscor, 
 I bethink, O.E. remember (myself of), take a Genitive of 
 the object. 
 
 He pities us Miseretur nostri 
 
 Recorder, I bear in mind t always, and rnemini sometimes (when 
 meaning / keep in memory and not / think of), takes the Accusative. 
 
 Several other Transitive English Verbs, / enjoy (enjoy 
 myself with), discharge (busy myself with), eat (feed 
 myself with), I master (make myself powerful with}., are 
 represented in Latin by Deponent Verbs governing the 
 Ablative. 
 
 Rule ' Fungor,' fruor,' utor,' < vescor,' 
 'pascor,' 4 potior,' f take the Ablative. 
 
 14. The indirect Object in English is preceded, after 
 all but a very few Verbs, by a Preposition. Give, ask, tell, 
 teach, shew, &c. are exceptions, e.g. 'give (to) (see page 
 
 * 'The origin of this singular construction is unknown. Perhaps the 
 Pronominal Adjective has a kind of Adverbial signification, in mv direction 
 'jn relation to me).' MADVIG. It has been suggested that the original con- 
 struction was ' re(m)fert Tullii, mea(m),' ' inter (rum) Tullii, mea(m, est,' 
 aoridg-d to the present form. 
 
 \ I'Otior, like pot-CBS, sometimes takes the Genitive. 
 
Par. 15.] THE INDIRECT OBJECT. , 3 
 
 10) me the book/ In Latin (where the cases do much of 
 the work of the English Prepositions) the indirect Object 
 is denoted by its case, 
 
 He was keeping his father Patrem facinus celabat 
 in ignorance of tJie deed 
 
 Rule ' Doceo,' ' celo,' ' rogo,' interrogo,' 
 and * oro,' are followed by the Accusative 
 of the person, as the Direct Object, and also 
 by the Accusative of the thing taught, con- 
 cealed, &c. as the Indirect Object. 
 
 N.B. Neuter Pronouns and Adjectives approximate to 
 Adverbs, and are therefore used more freely than Mascu- 
 line Pronouns and Adjectives. Note : 
 
 / advise you to do this Hoc te moneo 
 
 Rule ' Moneo, 1 ' admoneo,' and ' hortor,' 
 take an Accusative of the Person and an 
 Accusative of the thing, if the latter is a 
 Neuter Pronoun. 
 
 In Elizabethan English, banish was used with an Indirect Object governed 
 by an implied Preposition, ' I banish you (from) the realm.' Much moic 
 naturally could the Latins use the Indirect Object in the Accusative after the 
 expressed Preposition in transduco, 'milites Rhenum transduco.' 
 
 15. Verbs implying: motion. The case of the Indirect 
 Object in Latin will be further considered under the 
 head of Prepositions. But a few general rules may be 
 laid down about Latin Verbs containing Prepositions 
 and conveying a notion of motion to, or motion from. 
 Such Verbs, e.g. detraho, can be used metaphorically or 
 literally. If we say 'princeps detrahit milites' we do not 
 mean that the emperor literally himself draws away the 
 soldiers ; but in ' detrahit anulum ' the Verb is literally 
 used. Literal motion must be more emphatically expressed* 
 
14 OBJECT AFTER VERBS OF MOTION. [Par. 16. 
 
 Prints detract \ iH ' es i" 
 
 ( anulum de 
 
 Rule Verbs containing Prepositions, and 
 conveying a notion of motion to or from, 
 take the Dative of the Indirect Object when 
 not literally used. 
 
 N.B. If literally used, they require the Preposition to 
 be repeated for emphasis, as above, detraxit de.* 
 
 Examples : Affer 
 circumjicere, detral 
 imponere, imprimere, incurrere, inesse, inferre, injicere, 
 objicere, offerre, opponere, prseficere, subjicere, subjun- 
 gere, supponere, subtrahere. 
 
 Rule Verbs signifying ' preferring ' and the 
 contrary take the Dative of the Indirect 
 Object, or repeat the Preposition before the 
 Indirect Object. 
 
 Examples : Anteferre, anteponere, prseferre, prae- 
 ponere, posthabere, postponere. 
 
 16. The Object after Verbs of Motion. The Object after 
 a Verb of Motion to in English sometimes dispenses 
 with a Preposition. ' He went home} ' I'm going (Early 
 English on, then d or a-} fishing: Where the Prepo- 
 sition is not quite dispensed with, the tendency is some- 
 times seen, as in ' He rides a-field: All Nouns that are 
 often repeated after the same Preposition in English have 
 a tendency to become Adverbs. Thus we say ' a-bed/ but 
 not <a-chair'; 'a-foot/ but not (now) <a-knee'; <a-sleep,' 
 but not ' a-slumber.' Now the Romans thought more of 
 towns, and less of countries, than we do. Farmers used 
 at one time to live in the towns and go out to their work. 
 So as they were continually going into and out of their 
 
 * The Dative In ' Czesari ad pedes se projecit ' is perhaps partly Pos- 
 sessive, partly Dative of the Indirect Object. 
 
Par. iy.] TOWNS AND ISLANDS. 15 
 
 homes, their fields, and their towns, but not so often into 
 ana out of countries, they omitted Prepositions before 
 towns but retained them betore countries. Small islands 
 are naturally regarded as mere towns. 
 
 Rule After a verb of * motion to,' the 
 names of towns and small islands are used 
 in the Accusative without Prepositions, as 
 also are ' domum,' * humum,' and * rus.' 
 
 Are you going A-FIELD to- Visne rus hodie ire ? 
 day ? 
 
 Rule After a verb of ' motion from/ the 
 names of towns and small islands are used 
 in the Ablative without Prepositions. So are 
 4 domo,' ' rure,' * humo.' 
 
 We shall set out FROM Carthagine proficiscemur 
 Carthage 
 
 Rule After a verb of ' rest in,' the names 
 of towns and small islands, if singular, are 
 in a locative case ending in -ae (which was 
 once -ai) or -i ; if plural, in the Ablative : 
 Romae, Corinthi, Carthagini (sometimes written 
 Carthagine) Athenis. 
 
 The same rule holds for domi, ruri, humi. 
 
 The fact that domi and Corinthi are not real Genitives, explains some 
 seeming anomalies. 
 
 Yon may write ' doxxii mese,' which is one notion, and ' domi Cice- 
 ronis ' j but not domi with an ordinary Adjective ; ' in an excellent home ' 
 is ' in domo optima.' 
 
 Urbs and oppidum, when in apposition to names in the locative case 
 of the Genitive form, are placed in the Ablative, and generally (not always) 
 preceded by in. ' He lived in the once populous city of Antiock.' ' An- 
 tiochise, (in) celebri quondam urbe vitam agebat.' 
 
 17. ' Is ' used relatively. The word ' is,' in English, 
 sometimes means * is relatively.' The Latins distinguish 
 
i6 THE: [Par. 18. 
 
 between ' is ' in * the child is (in the place of) a conso- 
 lation ' and * the child is (actually and absolutely) a boy.' 
 In the former case they use a Dative (Representative 
 Dative or Dative of Design) after est. ' Puer est mihi 
 solacio,' ' Do hoc tibi muneri.'* 
 
 The same construction is found after one or two Latin 
 words of giving. &&& esteeming. 
 
 Rule Sum, do, duco (I esteem), tribuo, 
 take a double Dative. 
 
 This Dative, having the force of an Adjective, must not be coupled to any 
 Adjective but one of Quantity. ' Est mihi xnagno (not carp) solacio.' 
 Magno gives a Superlative force to the Quasi-Adjective solacio. 
 
 18. The Attribute. The unfortunate absence of our 
 articles the and a compels the Latins to resort to all sorts 
 of substitutes in the use of Adjectives. Thus they cannot 
 translate 'the foolish f Tullia ' by 'Tullia stulta,' for that 
 might, and indeed would, mean ' Tullia is foolish,' or 
 'foolish Tullia' (where foolish would be a kind of name 
 like our * Simple Susan/ or like the Latin ' Africanus 
 Minor/ ' Pompeius Magnus.') Consequently they have to 
 find some equivalent for the defining Article. They 
 define, by mentioning first the individual, and secondly 
 the class with the attribute, ' Tullia, mulier stultissima.' 
 
 Rule The Adjective (after 'the') quali- 
 fying the name of an individual in English, 
 often qualifies the name of the class in Latin. 
 
 THE TIMID dove Columba, animal timidissi- 
 
 mum 
 THE J BRAVE officer Centurio, vir fortissimo 
 
 19. The English use of two Adjectives. In English 
 we often use two or more Adjectives, unconnected by 
 Conjunctions, as epithets to a Noun, e.g. ' a good, bravf. 
 
 * Compare ' I have a king here to my flatterer.' Richard II. 
 
 t ' Foolish' here sometimes = 'owing to her folly.' See p. 165, IV. 
 
 t IllC,' 'between the Adjective and the Noun, sometimes = the. 
 
Par. 20.] THE: 17 
 
 man.' In Latin, owing partly to the absence of Articles, 
 and partly perhaps to the allowable omission of est, ' vir 
 bonus fortis' is inadmissible.* It might mean * a good 
 man is brave/ The Latins therefore insert a Conjunc- 
 tion, * vir bonus fortisque.' In the same way the Latins 
 do not insert ordinary Adjectives between hie, and the 
 Noun qualified by hie. If any Adjective is inserted, it 
 is generally tot or tantus, or some Adjective modified 
 by tam. Perhaps the reason is that these Adjectives, 
 being of a demonstrative nature, coalesce more easily 
 with hie. 
 
 Do not desert me in THIS Ne me in hac tanta (or tam 
 SAD calamity tristi) calamitate dese- 
 
 rueris 
 
 Rule Two or more Adjectives, whether 
 pronominal or otherwise, are not attached to 
 the same Noun without ' et ' or ' que.' 
 
 N.B. lile often comes between an Adjective and its 
 Noun, * magnus ille vir/ * vir ille sapientissimus/ 
 
 2O. ' The ' defining a phrase. When a Noun is pre- 
 ceded by ' the ' or ' a ' and followed by a Prepositional 
 phrase, the English must not be rendered literally in 
 Latin. ' Homines in navi clamabant ' could not con- 
 vey the meaning ' the men in the ship shouted/ but 
 might mean ' men, or the men, shouted in the ship. 1 We 
 must supply the Relative. But * homines qui erant in 
 navi' might mean 'men that were in.' It will therefore 
 be better to put some Relative word first, and to say 4 as 
 many men as were in the ship shouted/ i.e. l Quot, or qui 
 erant in navi/ or * Quidquid hominum erat in navi.' 
 
 Very often the ambiguity can be removed by the inser- 
 tion of a Participle or Adjective. Thus, 'praelium ad 
 Cannas multa millia hominum absumpsit/ might mean 
 ' the battle destroyed many thousands of human beings in 
 
 * Where an Adjective and a Noun form one notion, e& navis oner aria, 
 another Adjective, e.g. maxima, may be added, 
 
 C 
 
i8 THE: [Par. 21. 
 
 the neighbourhood of Cannae/ but in * praslium ad Cannas 
 commissum ' the ' ad Cannas ' iS shown to be connected 
 with commissum, by coming between the Participle and 
 the Noun qualified by the Participle.* 
 
 Another way of removing the ambiguity is to change 
 the Prepositional phrase into an Adjective, prselium Can- 
 nense. 
 
 Rule -Prepositional phrases,where a Rela- 
 tive is implied, require either the expression 
 of the Relative in Latin, or the insertion of 
 an Adjective or Participle, or else the in- 
 clusion of the Prepositional phrase between 
 a Substantive and Adjective ; e.g. Qui erant 
 in navi,' ' Praelium Cannense,' ' meum erga te 
 studium.' 
 
 There is an exception to this rule in the case of of. Where of is used for 
 the Possessive Inflection 's, it is rendered by the Latin Genitive. See also 
 Paragraph 33 for other exceptions. 
 
 21. Other uses of ' the ' that require notice (73) are : 
 
 I am not THE man to do thus Non is sum qui hoc fa'ciam 
 He was THEfa'st to rise Ille primus surrexit 
 
 THE f sooner, THE better Quo citius, eo melius 
 
 The, when meaning the great, requires care, e.g. ' I 
 perceived the kindness with which I was welcomed by 
 Tullius/ If you translate this ' Intellexi benevolentiam, 
 quacum me Tullius excepit/ the meaning is, ' I perceived 
 kindness, with which/ &c. But the object of perceived is, 
 not really kindness, but the whole of the phrase defined by 
 ' the? This can only be expressed in Latin by using a 
 dependent interrogative form that shall shew that the 
 
 * Such expressions as prselinm ad Cannas, epistola ad B al- 
 bum i data), thougli they sometimes occur, are to be avoided. 
 
 t In Early English thi was used as the Ablative of the Demonstrative and 
 of the Relative, quo . . . CO. See Shakespearian Grammar^ Par. 94. 
 
Par. 24.] 'A.' 19 
 
 object of intellexi is, not benevolentiaxn, but 'quanta me 
 benevolentia Tullius exciperet.' Sec Paragraph 53. 
 
 22. 'A,' 'no,' 'every.' A is generally unexpressed: 
 but, if it means ' a certain* as in 'a man once said to 
 me,' it is sometimes translated by quidam. 
 
 Carefully distinguish between, on the one hand, a re- 
 ferring to a class ' a high tree, arbor (-es) alta (-oe), 
 is more exposed to lightning than a low one ' and, on 
 the other hand, a when referring to an individual of that 
 class : ' a tall tree (alta qusedam arbor) stood in my 
 garden.' Often a approximates to a kind of, e.g. ' a 
 curious torpor/ ' mira qusedam inertia.' 
 
 No when applied to persons, e.g. ' no poet,' must be 
 rendered by nemo (ne homo) (not by nullus), e.g. ' nemo 
 poeta/z.i. ' no man, provided that he is a poet.' 
 
 Every must not be rendered by omnis (which generall) 
 means all} but by omnes, or, with Superlatives, b) 
 quisque. The Superlative, being regarded as a Noun 
 and emphatic, comes first, ' doctissimus quisque.' 
 
 23. English Present Participles are freely used as 
 Adjectives. We speak of ' a degrading, humiliating, per- 
 plexing, pleasing, amusing, annoying state of things. 
 The preceding a or the enables us thus easily to conven 
 Participles into Adjectives. The Latins, not having the 
 Articles, have not the same converting facility. 
 
 Rule Present Participles must not be 
 used as Adjectives in Latin unless the use 
 is established by authority, as ' sapiens.' 
 
 Adjectives must be used instead, e.g. turpis for de- 
 grading : or the sentence may be turned so as to use a 
 Verb. 
 
 24-. Adverbs and Adverbial phrases in English are 
 
 very often compounded with Prepositions, e.g. a-foot, 
 
 C 2 
 
20 ADVERBIAL PHRASES. [Par. 25. 
 
 a-main, at home, in haste, with anger, by right, of course. 
 In such phrases, with is the most common Preposition, 
 and it is therefore useful to remember the following : 
 
 Rule ' With* must not be translated by 
 the simple Ablative unless it denotes in- 
 strumentality. 
 
 E.g. ' He struck me with a stick/ 'Baculo me percussit : 
 but * He answered with impetuosity, 'Vehementer re- 
 spondit ; ' or ' Cum vehementia respondit.' 
 
 N.B. If an Adjective comes between with and its 
 Substantive, e.g. ' with great impetuosity,' the Ablative 
 may be used : ' summa vehementia.' 
 
 There are all degrees of any quality, e.g. celeritas. The Abl. in 
 'celeritate adiit ' is felt not to define the manner: for the question arises 
 4 with 'what speed?' But join summa to it, and we get an Adverbial 
 expression defining the manner. The English 'with speed,' means * with 
 (great) speed.' 
 
 Rule ' In,' when used metaphorically in 
 English, must not be rendered by ' in ' in 
 Latin. 
 
 E.g. in time meaning at last, is tandem, or, meaning 
 punctuality, is tempori ; in haste is celeriter, or summa 
 celeritate (but not celeritate). In my opinion is me 
 judice. 
 
 In, meaning in the case of, is sometimes found in Latin used metaphor! - 
 o^l 1 v : in ThemistOClC, in the rase of Themistocles. 
 
 The following Ablatives are regarded as Adverbs and do not require Ad- 
 jcciives. In due course, recte atque or dine; methodically, via et 
 ratione } in word, verbo J in appearance, specie : in reality, re, or 
 T2 psaj rightly, jure : not unnaturally, neque injuria j with force, 
 vi } with craft j dolo. There are other exceptions that should not be used 
 by beginners. 
 
 25. Adverbs. The following Adverbs require care. Now 
 sometimes mtfans at the present moment : in that case it 
 is in Latin nunc. Sometimes it means by this time, or 
 already : in that case it is jam. 
 
Par. 25.] ADVERBS. 21 
 
 / have been waning for Jam triduum expecto 
 NOW three days 
 
 Can you see me NOW ? Num me none videre potes? 
 
 Rule Nunc' applies to the Present sim- 
 ply; 'jam' to the Present considered with 
 reference to the Past or Future, i.e. after past 
 waiting, by this time, or, before it was expected, al- 
 ready. 
 
 Only sometimes expresses something less than was ex- 
 pected : * he only spoke ; he did nothing.' In these cases 
 use tantum. Where only means by himself, by itself, use 
 solus (m).* Not only ' is almost always * non solum,' or 
 
 * non modo.' In ' if only] ' provided only, 1 the Latins use 
 modo. Sometimes only is to be expressed by nihil aliud 
 quam. ' In his old age, instead of riding he only walked/ 
 
 * Senex, omissa equitatione, nihii aliud quam deambu- 
 labat' 
 
 More, when used with verbs and meaning to a greater 
 extent, is plus ; when used with Adjectives, and also when 
 meaning rather, it is mag is. 
 
 I love him MORE than his Amo ilium plus quam fra- 
 brother trem ejus 
 
 He is MORE dutiful to his Ille magis est quamtu erga 
 father than you are patrem pius f 
 
 I hope MORE (RATHER) than Magis spero quam timeo 
 fear 
 
 With numbers, use supra as Preposition or amplius 
 See Paragraph 41, * Above? 
 Note the curious construction : 
 
 He was MORE foolhardy Audacior erat quam fortior 
 
 than bold 
 
 * In this case, alone is preferable to only. 
 
 \ Adjectives ending in -eus, -ius, and others that do not take the 
 Comparative in -ior, take magis instead of the termination. 
 
22 ^ PREPOSITIONS. [Par. 26. 
 
 Once is (i) forte, once upon a time; (2) semel, once for 
 all; (3) quondam or olim, formerly. 
 
 26. The Prepositions in English do the work, riot only 
 of the Latin Prepositions, but also of many of the Latin 
 cases, and (as will be seen hereafter) of many of the Latin 
 Conjunctions. Consequently, in translating them into 
 Lathi; they require especial care. Distinguish always be- 
 tween the original local meaning of a Preposition and its 
 subsequent metaphorical meaning. Thus of or off origi- 
 nally meant motion from : in Early English we find ' the 
 leaves fall of (off} the tree.' Later, the purely local mean- 
 ing of motion from was used to express an action that 
 proceeded from the agent, 'we were received #/"* (by] the 
 most pious Edward/ Lastly, coming to mean connection 
 of any kind, 0/"was used of anything, not proceeding from, 
 but belonging to, anyone, e.g. ' the misfortunes of this 
 worthy man.' 
 
 It is evident that the same notion, e.g. agency or price, 
 may be represented by a different Preposition according 
 as the notion is regarded. Thus, an action may be re- 
 garded as coming outof\h.z agent ; in that case we may use 
 of, as in Elizabethan English. But it may also be regarded 
 as near, i.e. by (by originally meant near), the agent. So 
 price may be represented by at, denoting neighbourhood 
 and hence equivalence, or for denoting (i) standing before, 
 or in the place of, and hence (2) equivalence ; or in certain 
 context you may say ' I bought it with my last shilling/ 
 treating it as an ordinary action performed with, i.e. near, 
 the instrument. 
 
 The differences in Prepositions are so slight that they 
 vary with the slightest variety of context ; and some Pre- 
 positions that were in fashion during one period pass out 
 of fashion in another. Thus we cannot now say as 
 Shakespeare did, ' I live with bread/ 'he died with tickling/ 
 but with after * disagree' is not yet entirely supplanted 
 ^ from. 
 
 This being the case, before going through all the idioms 
 
 * Mdcbethi iii. 6. 27. 
 
Par. 28.] EXTENSION. 23 
 
 connected with the several Prepositions, we should go at 
 once to the notions represented by the Prepositions, and 
 consider how those notions are to be represented. In a 
 language like the Latin, abounding in cases, the Preposi- 
 tions have not been so much used as in English, and have 
 consequently not so often assumed metaphorical meanings. 
 They are mostly used locally ; the metaphorical English 
 Prepositions are mostly represented by the Latin cases. 
 
 27. Extension. For means sometimes as an equivalent 
 for (one thing standing in the front of, i.e. in the stead of, 
 another): e.g. ' Pro tantis tuis meritis, quid tibi dabo?' 
 sometimes on account of, ob or propter ; sometimes, from 
 its meaning of equivalence, it is used almost redundantly 
 to mean as much as before time and space, e.g. ' he walked 
 for five miles/ ' he waited for ten minutes/ The Latins do 
 not use (nor do the English always) a redundant Prepo- 
 sition here, but put the noun in the Accusative as a kind 
 of Object after the Verb, e.g. 'Tridui iter processimus/ 
 * Decem jam dies hie moramur.' The for is omitted with 
 the Adjectives long, broad, deep, high, ' Hasta sex pedes 
 longa/ ' Fossa decem pedes alta.' 
 
 Rule Extension of time ana space is ex- 
 pressed by the Accusative. 
 
 For, before time, when followed by a negative e.g. ' For the last ten 
 years he never came ' is not expressed by the Accusative. The notion of 
 
 28. Point of time. At, in, ^x(all denoting neighbour- 
 hood) are used in English to denote the time when a 
 thing is done. In Latin the Ablative (which expresses a 
 circumstance *) is naturally used to denote this. 
 
 * " The Ablative denotes in general that a thing belongs to the predicate 
 as serving to complete and define it more accurately (so that it stands with 
 the thing predict d in the relation of an appurtenance or circumstance}.' 
 MADVIG'S Latin Grammar. 
 
24 POINT OF TIME, PRICE. [Par. 29. 
 
 ' Tertio anno urbs capta est/ ' Saturni Stella triginta 
 fere annis cursum simm conficit.' 
 
 Rule The Ablative denotes the time at 
 which or within which anything is com- 
 pleted. 
 
 At, of place, must be expressed by ad or in, not by the Ablative by 
 itself; ' ad hunc locum,' ' hoc in loco ; ' not ' hoc loco.' 
 
 Kieme restate, die, nocte, luce, are also used for the season 
 within which anything is done ' in winter,' ' by day,' &c. 
 
 29. Price is expressed in English indefinitely by at, 
 definitely by for or (rarely) by with. The English at 
 (perhaps representing contiguity) is expressed by the Latin 
 Genitive, perhaps the Genitive of quality.* The Latins 
 do not use pro to denote price. For and with (in- 
 strumental) are represented by the Latin Ablative (denot- 
 ing a circumstance, see Paragraph 28, Note). It would 
 seem that price when indefinite (a3 it is when you ask 
 how much a man will offer) is regarded by the Latins as 
 a quality, and expressed by the Genitive ; when definite, it 
 is regarded as an instrument and expressed by the 
 Ablative. ' At what price did you buy the rice?' 'Oh, 
 for a small sum.' ' Quanti oryza empta est ?' ' Parvo.' 
 
 Rule The price is expressed by the Ab- 
 lative. 
 
 Rule Tanti, quanti, pluris, minoris (but 
 magno, parvo, plurimo, &c.) are used after verbs 
 of selling and buying. 
 
 Rule Magni, pluris, plurimi, parvi, mi- 
 noris, minimi, tanii, quanti, and nihili are used 
 after verbs of estimation, and after est signifying it is 
 worth. 
 
 This seems to be a kind of Genitive of quality. The same construction, 
 after non sestimo, facio, &c. is used with assis, flocci, &c. 'Non 
 tc flocci facio,' ' t don't value you at a straw.' 
 
 * Madvig- says, "This Genitive is nearly allied to the Descriptive Genitive." 
 
Par. 32.] FULNESS AND WANT. 25 
 
 30. Fulness, in English, is generally expressed by Verbs 
 and Adjectives followed by of or with. Of denotes that 
 the fulness arises out of something ; with, that the fulness 
 is connected with something. Of is represented by the 
 Latin Genitive, which in the best authors follows plenus. 
 With (or in, e.g. ' abounds in') is represented by the Latin 
 Ablative, which naturally follows Verbs, e.g. compleo and 
 impleo, to express the instrument by which the state of 
 fulness denoted by the Verb is brought about. 
 
 Rule Adjectives, as well as Verbs, ex- 
 pressing fulness are followed by the Geni- 
 tive or Ablative. 
 
 See Paragraph 13. 
 
 31. Emptiness is generally expressed in English by of 
 or from, ' void off ' free from. 9 Of denotes motion of (off) 
 and then connection, ' as regards ' ; from denotes more 
 distinctly motion from. Hence, in Latin, the Genitive is 
 used where connection, motion in search of, need of, is 
 denoted ; and the Ablative (which represents an external 
 circumstance *) is used where motion or absence from is 
 denoted. Thus * I have need of money ' is ' Egeo pe- 
 cunise/ but ' I am destitute of, i.e. without money/ is 
 * Careo pecunia.' 
 
 Rule Adjectives and Verbs denoting 
 emptiness are followed by the Genitive or 
 Ablative. 
 
 d) Inops, pauper, eerenus, indig\LS, and parcns take the 
 
 neo, libero, splvo, levo, exonero, arceo, prohibeo, take the 
 Ablative of the thing. 
 
 32. English Prepositions following Adjectives may 
 
 often be rendered by the Latin Ablative. The reason for 
 
 See Paragraph 28, Note. 
 
26 PREPOSITION BETWEEN TWO NOUNS. [Par. 33. 
 
 this is, that many Adjectives, having the force of Participles 
 and describing a state, naturally take the Ablative to denote 
 the instrument producing the state. Thus l relying on 
 your help' is 'ftretus (supported by) tuo auxilio' ; ' heavy 
 with gold/ ' onustus (laden with) auro/ So with prsedi- 
 tns and contentus. In the following rule the Adjectives 
 have not the force of Participles ; the Ablative rather 
 expresses a circumstance, ' dignus xnercede/ ' worthy in 
 point of pay/ 
 
 Rule ' Dignus ' and ' indignus ' take the 
 Ablative. 
 
 Of in 'born of obscure parents' has its radical 
 meaning off or from. It is therefore naturally repre- 
 sented by the Ablative in Latin. 
 
 Rule 'Natus,' 'satus,' ' ortus,' ' genitus,' 
 ' editus,' take the Ablative. 
 
 33. A Preposition between two Nouns in English 
 often denotes that the second is the object of an 
 action implied by the first, e.g. (i) ' hunger for gold/ (2) 
 * experience in warfare/ (3) ' incitement to danger/ (4) 
 'rules about life/ (5) 'exemption from warfare/ In a 
 great number of these cases, the English Preposition 
 might be replaced by as regards. Now this as regards is 
 one of the radical meanings not only of the English of, 
 but also of the Latin Genitive. Consequently this Ob- 
 jective relation, as regards, is expressed in Latin by the 
 Genitive, e.g. (i) ' Auri fames/ (2) ' Rei xnilitaris- peritia/ 
 (3) ' Periculi incitamentum/ (4) ' Vitce praecepta/ (5) ' Mi- 
 litise vacatio/ 
 
 This is called the Objective Genitive. 
 
 Rule A Preposition (often 'of or 'for') 
 between two Nouns, if it denotes that the 
 
Par. 35.] *OF 9 ' 'IN? 27 
 
 second is the Object of the first, is often ex- 
 pressed by the Latin Genitive. 
 
 The Genitive is hence sometimes ambiguous : eg. ' Injurix JEduorum* 
 may mean ' injuries done by, or done to, the ./Edui.' 
 
 34. ' Of' after a Participial Adjective, formed from a 
 Transitive Verb, is found, though not often, in English, e.g. 
 ' I spare my purse/ ' he is sparing of his purse/ The fact 
 is, sparing is here a kind of noun, and the construction is 
 the same as* in ' he is a niggard of his money/ This of, 
 meaning as regards, is rendered in Latin by the Genitive, 
 and such Participial Adjectives often occur in Latin where 
 there are no corresponding Participial Adjectives in 
 English. 
 
 Rule (i) Latin Active Present Participles 
 from Transitive Verbs, when used as Ad- 
 jectives, and (2) Adjectives in -ax, from 
 Transitive Verbs, take the Genitive, e.g. ' La- 
 borum patiens.' 
 
 So amans, cap ax, edax, tenax, pmdens, insolens, 
 potens,f impotens. 
 
 35. 'Of' and 'in' after several other Adjectives in 
 
 English are used in the sense of 'as regards.' These 
 Adjectives suggest an object : e.g. 'he is greedy ' suggests 
 the question ' he is greedy as regards what ? ' Such Adjec- 
 tives mostly express desire, experience or inexperience, 
 knowledge or ignorance, participation, guilt, innocence, 
 
 * Unless it is a result of the genuine Old English (still preserved in 
 the slang of London and perhaps of other places), ' he is a-sparing (in or 
 on sparing) of his purse.' Compare 'the shepherd blowing of his nails/ 
 3 Henry VI. ii. 5. 3. Shakespearian Grammar, Paragraph 178. 
 
 t Many Genitives after Adjectives may be explained by saying that the 
 Adjective implies a Verb and Noun, which Noun naturally governs the Geni- 
 tive. Thus potens means having power of. Compare 
 
 'The sovereign power you have 3/"us.' Hamlet, ii. 2. 27. 
 So, in Greek. Xi/wnc aVpo can means oi> exe* nolpav Aunnc. 
 
28 ' OF: [Par. 36. 
 
 e.g. 'inexperienced in treachery,' 'greedy of praise.' 
 These Prepositions are rendered by the Latin Genitive, 
 which naturally expresses the connection implied in as 
 regards. 
 
 Rule An English Preposition between an 
 Adjective and a Noun, when denoting that 
 the Noun is the object of the Adjective, is 
 often rendered by the Latin Genitive, e.g. 
 4 Avidus laudis,' ' Perfidiae imperitus.' 
 
 So, avarus, cupidus, conscius, inscius, nescius, rudis, 
 gnarus, ignarus, peritus, mexnor, immemor, particeps, 
 expers (also Abl.), reus, insons. 
 
 36. 'Of' after the Verbs accuse, acquit, but not after 
 condemn, is used in English in the sense of as regards, 
 about. In Latin the Genitive, which answers to this use 
 of of, is more common. But as these verbs are also used 
 with the Instrumental Ablative crimine followed by the 
 Genitive of the charge, it is possible that the Genitive 
 depends on crimine understood* 
 
 Rule ' Accuso,' ' incuso,' ' insimulo,' * ar- 
 guo,' ' convince,' ' damno,' ' condemno,' ' ab- 
 solvo,' take the Genitive of the charge. 
 
 37. ' Of' preceding a Noun denoting quality. Of 
 
 meaning out of is naturally placed before the material 
 (out} of which anything is made, and hence before 
 the qualities that go to make up anything. This use of 
 of is rendered, when referring to literal construction, by 
 an Adjective, e.g. marmoreus, or by de or e, e.g. ' factum 
 de or e xnarmore j ' but, when metaphorical, by the Latin 
 Genitive of Quality, e.g. ' he is a man of honour/ ' sum- 
 mae est integritatis/ 'it is a matter of difficulty,' 'res 
 est muiti laboris.' The Ablative (denoting circum- 
 
Par. 39.] PREPOSITIONS. 29 
 
 stance) can also be thus used : 'vir est summa integri- 
 tate.' 
 
 N.B. Do not omit the Adjective, e.g. write 'summa 
 (-a) integritatis (-e),' not ' integritatis (-e) ' alone. 
 
 The reason for the insertion of the Adjective seems to be this: 'puei 
 naso, cr oris est' contains no definition, as all boys have noses and 
 faces ; but ' naso adunco/ 'oris pulcri,' imply definition. The Adjective, 
 though omitted in English, is really implied, * he is a man of (great) ability' 
 
 Rule Of preceding a Noun of quality is 
 rendered in Latin by a Genitive or Ab- 
 lative. 
 
 38. Of (put of, that which comes from, and hence belongs 
 to, anyone) is often preceded by ' the mark ' to express a 
 characteristic, e.g. * it is the mark of a philosopher to be 
 cautious/ Sometimes we omit 'the mark;' we cannot 
 however venture to say ' it is of a philosopher,' but we 
 sometimes, especially after a negative, say ' it is not like a 
 philosopher to chatter.' The Latins can use the Genitive 
 as a Predicate in all such cases, and can say ' PhilosopM 
 cavere est, or non est garrire.' 
 
 Rule // is the mark of, It is like, are often ex- 
 pressed by the Latin Genitive. 
 
 39. Prepositions implying rest or motion. When an 
 action or state is described, the English generally express 
 by Prepositions the place where the action takes place. 
 On the other hand, the Latins (and Greeks) usually 
 express the place whence the action originates, or 
 whither it is directed. 
 
 This is ON my side Hoc a me facit 
 
 ON the south-west and Ab occasu aestivo, et ab 
 north-east ortu hiberno 
 
 The fruit was hanging ON Pendebat ex arboribus fruc- 
 the trees tus 
 
30 REDUNDANT ' OF. 1 [Par. 40. 
 
 He came from (to) his home Corinth o (-um),domo (-tun.) 
 AT Corinth sua * (-m) venit 
 
 ON our way ive broke down Ex it mere pontem exscidi- 
 the bridge mus 
 
 But, ON our way the enemy Hostis nos in itinere op- 
 attacked us pressit (rare) 
 
 Rule English Prepositions denoting rest 
 must often be rendered by Latin Preposi- 
 tions denoting motion. 
 
 AO. The redundant l of.' Of (partitive) is naturally 
 used in such phrases as ' ten (put} of twenty ; ' but it 
 has come to be loosely used, by false analogy, after all, in 
 ' all of us ' and after a number that does not represent a 
 part but a whole, e.g. ' three hundred of us came.' The 
 Latins do not adopt this erroneous construction, but say 
 ' nos oxnnes, nos trecenti venimus.' A similar redundant 
 of is often used between ' town ' or c city/ and the par- 
 ticular name of the town or city, e.g. 'the city #/" London.' 
 This is not found in Latin : * urbs Londinium.' 
 
 Rule Do not translate into Latin the 
 redundan-t 'of.' 
 
 Of is often used after abstract Nouns, and sometimes ambiguously, e.g. 
 " the reminiscences of(1 by or about) Balbus." The Latins dislike ambiguity 
 and (3 a) abstract Nouns. Hence : 
 
 The top OF the mountain Sumnms xnons 
 
 The rest OF the ships Reliquse naves 
 
 f the foundation OF 
 
 After 
 Before 
 
 the city 
 the capture OF the < nrbem * 
 
 oldit 
 
 soldiers 
 
 Post I milites captos 
 Ante I Tullinxn natum 
 
 the birth OF 7V//- 
 
 ,. \ solem or turn 
 
 su?i-rise 
 
 * The anomalous dpmum, -i, &c. may be qualified by a Genitive or 
 by a Possessive Adjective, but by no other Adjective. See Par. 16. 
 
Par. 41.] PREPOSITIONS. 31 
 
 Rule The Latins often avoid the ambi- 
 guous Genitive and the use of abstract 
 Nouns, by using an Adjective or Participle 
 instead of a Noun in the Genitive, followed 
 by another Noun. 
 
 41. Dictionary of Prepositions. The following Pre- 
 position-idioms will serve to illustrate the difference 
 between the English and Latin Prepositions. Preposi- 
 tions used as Conjunctions, e.g. ' before he could arrive, 1 
 and followed by Verbals, e.g. * before leaving/ are reserved 
 for Paragraphs 66, 75. 
 
 The student will not fail to notice the large number of 
 compound Prepositions having no corresponding Preposi- 
 tions in Latin, and therefore requiring to be rendered in 
 some other form. 
 
 About (external neighbourhood \ a-be-out). 
 
 ABOUT noon, 8 A.M. &>c. Circiter ) meridiem, se- 
 
 circa ] cundam horam 
 
 ABOUT (TOWARDS, COMING Ad, better sub, noctem 
 
 UP TO, GETTING ON 
 FOR) nightfall 
 
 ABOUT (DURING, BEFORE DC nocte surrexit 
 
 THE END OF, TAKING 
 A PART OUT OF) night 
 
 Above (radical meaning,. position over, a-be-ove, where 
 ove is connected with over and up] ; (i) above, with 
 notion of motion, super ; (2) with notion of rest, supra ; 
 (3) above, figuratively, supra. 
 
 This is ABOVE my strength Hoc supra vires est 
 
 ABOVE 500 men were slain Super (or supra) quingentos 
 
 (or Quingenti amplius) 
 occisi sunt. 
 
 He is ABOVE deceit Honestior est quam qui 
 
 mentiatur 
 
1 ACCORDING TO. 1 
 
 [Par. 41. 
 
 According: to. 
 
 ACCORDING TO Herodotus, 
 the facts are somewhat 
 different 
 
 They will be rewarded 
 ACCORDING TO their 
 deeds 
 
 Herodoto teste 
 
 se habet 
 
 res aliter 
 
 Suam quisque pro factis 
 mercedem accipient 
 
 After (aft-er). 
 
 When one event comes immediately after another, it 
 may be regarded as coming out of it. Indeed after is 
 derived from of, 'a comparative formed from of (Morris), 
 and may therefore naturally be rendered by out of, which is 
 an emphatic way of expressing of. Hence, beside the 
 more usual post : 
 
 Immediately AFTER his con- 
 sulship he left Rome 
 
 One thing AFTER (ON THE 
 HEELS OF) another 
 
 He waited day AFTER day 
 AFTER your letter they read 
 
 AFTER (FOLLOWING ON, 
 BUT NOT IMMEDIATELY) 
 this battle 
 
 The day AFTER the battle 
 
 AFTER (NEXT TO) God, you 
 are my hope 
 
 AFTER (COMING CLOSE TO) 
 the manner of a battle 
 
 AFTER the manner of 
 slaves 
 
 Against (i) when preceded by a verb of motion is often 
 rendered by Latin, in, e.g. * Incitare in ;' (2) when mean- 
 
 Ex consulatu Roma ex- 
 cessit 
 
 Aliud ex alio me turbat 
 
 Diem ex die expectabat 
 
 Sub (following from below\ 
 tuas literas, statim reci- 
 tabant meas 
 
 Secundum (rare) hanc pug- 
 narru 
 
 Postridie pugrnam 
 
 Secundum Deos, in te spem 
 pono 
 
 Ad similitudinem pugna? 
 milites sese exercebant 
 
 Ad modum servorum 
 
Par. 4I-. I 'AS TO: 33 
 
 ing ' in opposition to/ by contra, ' Conjurant contra rem- 
 publicam ;' (3) when meaning active hostility, by adversus, 
 4 Adversus te contendimus.' 
 
 Agreeably to (i.e. in agreement witJi). 
 
 Are you acting AGREEABLY Num ad (up to) praescrip- 
 TO your orders in loiter- turn agis, hie tempus 
 
 ing here f terens ? 
 
 //V ought to live AGREE- Naturae convenienter vi- 
 ABLY TO nature vendum est 
 
 We will speak AS AGREE- Dicemus quam maxime ad 
 ABLY as possible to the veritatem accommodate 
 
 truth 
 
 Among (mired with), (i) Of nations and large socie- 
 ties, apud ; (2) meaning in the number of, in j (3) meaning 
 conspicuous amid, inter ; (4) meaning selected from among, 
 e; (5) after a verb of motion, literal or metaphorical, 
 sometimes in. 
 
 AMONG the Germans Apud Germanos 
 
 Pain is reckoned AMONG Dolor in maximis malis 
 . the most serious evils ducitur 
 
 A battle memorable AMONG Pugna memorata inter 
 the few defeats of the paucas Romanorum 
 
 Roman people clades 
 
 He was the only one AMONG Unus e septem togam 
 seven that lived to man- virilem sumpsit 
 
 hood 
 
 I will divide the booty Praedam in socios distri- 
 AMONG my companions buam 
 
 Around, see Round. 
 
 As for, as regards, as to, when at the beginning of the 
 sentence, may be rendered by Quantum (or qnod) attinet 
 
 ad ; when in the middle, by de (concerning}. 
 
 D 
 
34 'AT. 3 [Par. 41. 
 
 At (neighbourhood). 
 
 AT the mercy of Balbus In manner potestate Balbi 
 
 The city is AT the mercy of fire Urbs incendiis est obnoxia* 
 
 AT (i.e. CLOSE TO or FOL- Sub or ad haec 
 LOWING ON) this 
 
 I aim-AT, Zaugh-Kl, look- Te peto, rideo, specto 
 
 AT, you 
 
 N.B. Not ' xniror te,' unless you mean ' I admire 
 you/ Better ' admirationem mihi moves, 7 if you mean 
 ' I am surprised AT you/ 
 
 AT THE BE-] Incipiente ) 
 
 GINNING OF > the battle Finem capi- > jam pugna 
 AT THE END OF ) ente ) 
 
 He is AT THE POINT OF In eo est ut moriatur 
 death 
 
 Before (in \hzfore part) : (i) generally ante, after verbs 
 both of rest and motion ; (2) prae after verbs of motion, 
 immediately in front of, often used in the phrase prse se ; 
 (3) pro, rest in front of; (4) ob, motion to met, to the 
 face of; (5) apud, more rarely c.d, in the presence of (a 
 body of people) ; (6) coram, in the presence of (an indi- 
 vidual), face to face with. 
 
 When before is applied metaphorically to (7) time, ante 
 is used ; when to (8) preference, ante, or (rarely) prse. 
 
 He sent the cavalry BEFORE Equitatum ante se misit 
 
 him (but, prsexnisit) 
 
 He held a dagger BEFORE Pugionem prse se tulit 
 
 him 
 
 They were on guard BE- Pro portis in statione erant 
 
 FORE the gate 
 
 Death presents itself BE- Mors ob oculos versatur 
 
 FORE our eyes * 
 
 * Tacitus, but not Cicero. 
 
Par. 4i.] ' BEYOND: 35 
 
 He was brought to trial Apud judices reusfactus est 
 BEFORE the jury 
 
 He said this BEFORE the Co ram rege hate dixit 
 king 
 
 Ten years BEFORE the con- Decimo anno ante Balbum 
 sulship of Balbus Consulem 
 
 Balbus was BEFORE all in Balbus ante alios in re 
 military distinction militari floruit 
 
 ' infra, literally and metaphorically. 
 
 Beneath 
 This is BENEATH me Hoc est infra me 
 
 Below is often to be rendered by indignus est, or 
 turpior est, e.g. : 
 
 He is BENEATH your notice Turpior est quam ut debeas 
 
 illi irasci (or quam cui) 
 
 Beside. 
 
 This is BESIDE the mark Hoc est nihil ad rem, or 
 
 proposito alienum 
 
 He is BESIDE himself Non est apud se 
 
 Besides, when meaning in addition to, prseter ; but 
 ' Besides this there was &c.' is often rendered ' Hxio 
 accedebat ut esset &c.' 
 
 Beyond: (i) of space and time, ultra; with motion, 
 sometimes prseter ; (2) outside, extra; (3) metaphorically, 
 exceeding, supra. 
 
 The lake had swollen BE- Lacus prseter modum cre- 
 
 YOND its limits verat 
 
 This is BEYOND belief Hoc supra fidem est 
 
 BEYOND question Sine ulla dubitatione 
 
 D 2 
 
36 *BUT: [Par. 41. 
 
 But (connected with out; leaving out\ prseter. After 
 a negative, or a question implying a negative, this Prepo- 
 sition is sometimes replaced by the Conjunction nisi. 
 
 What else was history Quid turn erat historia nisi 
 then, BUT mere annal- (if it was not) annalium 
 
 writing ? confectio ? 
 
 /te ALL BUT (EVERYTHING Urbem tantum non (just 
 EXCEPT) took the city so much as not) cepit 
 
 By (neighbourhood, hence agency, cause, instrumentality}. 
 
 I have a garden BY the Ad (place) Tiberim "hortum 
 Tiber habeo 
 
 I was sitting BY Balbus Apud (person) Balbum 
 
 sedebam 
 
 We travelled BY SEA, but In navi vecti sumus ; iter 
 the journey is mostly autem plerique pedibus 
 
 performed BY land conficiunt 
 
 Whenever he was BY HIM- Quoties solus erat 
 SELF 
 
 He did it BY HIMSELF Ipse, nullis adjuvantibus, 
 
 hoc fecit 
 
 / shall return BY (my re- Ad Idus Apriles redibo 
 turn is fixed FOR, so as 
 to come up TO) the thir- 
 teenth of April 
 
 By signifying agency is rendered by a or ab to denote 
 that the action comes from the agent ; signifying instru- 
 mentality, by the Ablative, which denotes a circumstance, 
 and therefore, among others, the instrument} signifying 
 a medium, a remote instrument, by per. 
 
 / was informed BY letter, Per literas, exploratores, 
 BY spies, &c. certior factus sum 
 
 BY stealth, craft, degrees Furtim, dolo, paulatin 
 
Par. 41.] 
 
 'DURING.* 
 
 37 
 
 If not BY fair means , then 
 BY foul 
 
 Ireland is less BY (INSTRU- 
 MENTALITY) a half than 
 'Britain 
 
 Day BY (FOLLOWING ON) 
 day ; one BY one 
 
 BY (in the presence of) 
 Heaven / 
 
 BY (according to) what you 
 say, there is no hope 
 
 BY WAY OF showing his 
 gratitude, he gave me 
 this present 
 
 Si possis recte ; sin minus, 
 quocunque xnodo 
 
 Hibcrnia dimidio minor est 
 quam Britannia 
 
 In dies ; sinprtrli 
 
 ( Proh deum atque homi- 
 < num fidem ! 
 ( Hercle ! 
 
 Hcec si vera dicis, spes 
 nulla restat 
 
 Hoc mihi dohum dedit, 
 quippe grati in me 
 animi documentum 
 
 Rule ' By ' signifying agency must be 
 followed by ' a ' or ' ab ' with the Ablative. 
 
 Concerning, de, presents no difficulty. 
 
 Considering. 
 
 He was well read, CON- 
 SIDERING his youth, or 
 AS BOYS GO 
 
 CONSIDERING (IN PROPOR- 
 TION TO) our numbers, 
 our country is small 
 
 Multse erant, nt (dicam) in 
 puero literae, or nt est 
 captus pueronim 
 
 Fines, pro multitudine 
 nostra, angustos habe- 
 mus 
 
 Dnring : (i) all through, in the course of, per; (2) in 
 the midst of, inter ; (3) in, in (rare) ; (4) often rendered 
 by dum, or by an Absolute Ablative. 
 
DURING. 
 
 [Par. 41. 
 
 DURING three years, he Per triennum, inter coenam 
 used to read DURING his legebat 
 
 dinner 
 
 Secundum or per quietem 
 (but also in quiete) visus 
 ei draco 
 
 Tuilio rege 
 Dormiens ambulabat 
 
 DURING the night he saw a 
 dragon 
 
 DURING the reign of Tul- 
 lius 
 
 He used to walk DURING 
 his sleep 
 
 Except (prseter with ace.). 
 
 Where except is followed by that, or by a Preposition, it 
 really governs a phrase and is a Conjunction, not a Pre- 
 position. It is then to be rendered by (i) prseterquam, 
 or (after a negative expressed or implied in a question 
 expecting a negative answer), by (2) nisi. 
 
 7 am charmed by my estate, 
 
 EXCEPT THAT it is not 
 
 fertile enough 
 
 I sent no letter EXCEPT TO 
 you 
 
 WITH THE EXCEPTION OF 
 
 one or at most two 
 
 Praedia valde me delectant, 
 nisi quod parum fertilia 
 sunt 
 
 Nullas literas prseterquam 
 or nisi ad te misi 
 
 Excepto uno aut ad sum- 
 mum altero 
 
 Excluding:, exclusive of. 
 
 EXCLUSIVE OF (BESIDES) 
 his personal property, 
 he has large estates 
 
 EXCLUSIVE OF (not to speak 
 of) faults, he has com- 
 mitted shameful crimes 
 
 Prseter pecumas, 
 magna habet 
 
 praedia 
 
 Flagitia, nedum or ne di- 
 cam, culpas admisit 
 
 Por, radical meaning in front of: hence (i) in place 
 (stead) of; (2) in behalf of i (3) for the sake of; (4) regard 
 
Par. 4 l.J 
 
 'FOR.' 
 
 39 
 
 being had to; (5) because of; (6) for the purpose of; (7) 
 with a view to ; (8) as good as ; (9) as much (long) as ; 
 (\o)for the price of; (\\) for what consents; (12) about. 
 
 They use shells FOR (IN- 
 STEAD OF) money 
 
 He exchanges honour FOR 
 money 
 
 IVe must fight FOR (IN BE- 
 HALF OF) our country 
 
 I fear FOR you, not FOR 
 myself 
 
 FOR heaven's SAKE, help 
 me / 
 
 The battle was sanguinary 
 FOR (REGARD BEING 
 HAD TO) the nuirber of 
 the combatants 
 
 I Cannot speak FOR (BE- 
 CAUSE OF) joy 
 
 He took a bribe FOR deciding 
 a suit 
 
 Pro nummo conchis utun- 
 tur 
 
 Argentum fama mutat, i.e. 
 ' buys with fame 9 
 
 Pro patria dimicandum est 
 Tibi non mihi timeo (rare) 
 
 Per te deos oro ut mihi 
 subvenias 
 
 Praelium atrocius erat quam 
 {aquum erat expectare) 
 pro numero pugnantium 
 
 Prse gaudio nequeo eloqui. 
 (After a negative.) 
 
 Ob rem judicandam pecu- 
 niam accepit 
 
 Also in this last sense, propter and de. 
 
 He had been selected FOR 
 (FOR THE PURPOSE OF) 
 the contest, which had 
 been fixed FOR (WITH 
 
 A VIEW TO, LOOKING 
 FORWARD TO) the fol- 
 lowing day 
 
 I will set out fOR Athens 
 
 I will wait FOR THE PRE- 
 SENT, or, if you wish, 
 FOR A LONGER TIME 
 
 in certamen electus erat, 
 quod in posterum diem 
 constitutum erat. (After 
 a Verb of motion, real 
 or metaphorical.) 
 
 Atbenas proficiscar 
 
 In pra,sens vel, si posces, 
 diutius expectabo 
 
'FOX.' 
 
 [Par. 41. 
 
 This will serve FOR (AS 
 GOOD AS) an example 
 to us 
 
 He waited at first FOR (AS 
 MUCH AS) ten days, then 
 FOR (LONG DURATION) 
 two whole years 
 
 FOR how much did you 
 buy this ? FOR a small 
 sum 
 
 FOR (FOR WHAT CON- 
 CERNS) my part, I shall 
 go away 
 
 We are badly off FOR pro- 
 visions 
 
 As FOR (FOR WHAT CON- 
 CERNS) the prisoners, I 
 know nothing about 
 them 
 
 FOR beauty she excels them 
 all 
 
 FOR (FOR WHAT CON- 
 CERNS) success he is 
 too slothful 
 
 He is too hasty FOR (FOR 
 WHAT CONCERNS) me 
 
 He was too late FOR the 
 
 DINNER 
 
 There is no cause FOR de- 
 spair 
 
 He. may die FOR (FOR 
 WHAT CONCERNS) me 
 
 Hoc nobis exemplo erit. 
 (See Par. 17.) 
 
 Homo primum decem dies, 
 postea per biennium 
 expectabat. (See Par. 
 27.) 
 
 Quant i hoc emisti ? Parvo, 
 (See Par. 29.) 
 
 Equidem abibo 
 
 A re frumentaria laboramus 
 
 Quod attinet ad captivos, 
 or, De captivis, nibil 
 habeo compertum 
 
 Mulier,pulcritudine (Instr.) 
 quidem, or quantum ad 
 pulcritudinem facile est 
 princeps 
 
 Xgnavior est quam qui or 
 quam ut possit rem 
 bene gerere 
 
 Vehementior est quam qui 
 or quam ut possit mihi 
 placere 
 
 Serius advenit quam ut 
 posset e convivis esse 
 
 Non est cur desperes 
 Per me licet pereat 
 
Par. 41.] *FOR! 
 
 FOR (FOR WHAT CON- Quod 
 CERNS) all I know 
 
 FOR (AS FAR AS REGARDS, Quodcunque (or Quamvis 
 IN SPITE OF) all you say, multa) dixcris, non mihi 
 
 you will not persuade persuadebis . 
 
 me ' 
 
 I am FOR Tullius Equidem TuUio studeo 
 
 You are no match FOR him Scito te esse ilii imparem 
 
 So much FOR (ABOUT) this De hac re hactenus 
 subject 
 
 For .... to. For was once used before to as a sign 
 of the infinitive, used in the sense of purpose, e.g. ' What 
 went ye out for to see ?' Hence sometimes, where for is 
 apparently a Preposition governing a Noun, it is really 
 connected with to, and perhaps should be considered as 
 governing the whole of the" following clause, e.g. ' The 
 wind sits fair*yfrr news to go, \& for the going of news, to 
 Ireland/ ' ad perferenduxn nuntium.' 
 
 This use of for is especially common after too, ' He is 
 too deceitful for me to believe him/ Here for is not to 
 be taken with me y but with me-to-believe, i.e. ' for the 
 purpose of making me believe, he is too deceitful.' This 
 the Latins render thus : ' he is more deceitful than anyone 
 that I should believe : ' * Hie est fallacior quam cui equi- 
 dem credam.' (See Par. 73.) 
 
 Sometimes there is no notion of purpose, as in ' it is 
 rare for,' ( it is common forj in which cases the Latins 
 would generally turn the sentence by the Adverbs 
 ' raro,' ' ssepe/ sometimes by fit ut. 
 
 It is rare FOR him to com- Raro culpam admittit, or 
 mit a fault Raro fit ut culpam ad- 
 
 mittat 
 
 After 'it is better/ for is rendered by the Infinitive. 
 
 Richard 1 7 ii. a. 123. 
 
'FOR.' 
 
 [Par. 41. 
 
 // is better FOR one man to 
 suffer than FOR a whole 
 nation to perish 
 
 Melius est civem unum 
 aliquid incommodi ac- 
 cipere quam civitatem 
 totam perire 
 
 For often connects two nouns in the sense of about, as 
 in 4 a signal for battle/ ' grief for his daughter/ * no room 
 for friendship/ In this sense it is often expressed by the 
 Latin Objective Genitive. (See Par. 33.) 
 
 For in the sense of about often follows English Verbs 
 signifying desire, e.g. to ask, long, seek, pine, search, for. 
 These would be rendered by single verbs in Latin, rogo, 
 cupio, qusero, &C. 
 
 From (fro-m, where m is a superlative suffix ; cognate 
 with Eng. fore} : (i) away from, a; (2) down from, de ; 
 (3) out of, e ; (4) after Verb of motion, often rendered by 
 Latin Dative, the motion from being expressed by the 
 Verb of motion. 
 
 FROM his childhood, youth, 
 &*c. 
 
 FROM the time when I re- 
 turned 
 
 FROM a slave, you became 
 afreedman 
 
 FROM his name the city 
 was called Rome 
 
 I am different FROM you 
 
 I am different FROM what 
 I once was 
 
 He came FROM Carthage 
 
 He wrested my kingdom 
 FROM me 
 
 Inde a parvo, ab adolescen- 
 tia, &c. 
 
 Ex quo tempore redii 
 E servo libertus factus es 
 
 Ex or de ejus nomine urbs 
 Roma est nominata 
 
 Alius sum ac tu, i.e. I am 
 different AND you (are 
 different) 
 
 Alius sum atque olim fui 
 
 Carthagine venit (Par. 1 6) 
 Regnum mihi eripuit 
 
Par. 4 I.] '/M' 43 
 
 From (like for) often follows a Noi'n or Adjective sig- 
 i$Sy\K% freedom from* In this sense from is often rendered 
 l>y the Latin Objective Genitive, e.g. ' rest from cares/ 
 'requics curarum.' (See Par. 33.) 
 
 
 In, generally rendered by Latin in. in is omitted be- 
 loco, modo, restate, hieme, which are used adverbi- 
 .;ily. \\"hcn used metaphorically to describe the manner 
 in \v h 'K-!I a thing is done, as ' /// haste/ it must be translated 
 in Latin by an Adverb or by cum ; but if the Noun is quali- 
 fied b> an Adjective, the Ablative is allowed without any 
 1 'reposition. (See Par. 24.) 
 
 ( IN haste Cum celeritate \ 
 
 He answered < or celeriter > ",. 
 
 ( \Kgreathaste Summa celeritate ) SpO1 
 
 So urbe, civitate, tota ; but in urbe, in civitate. 
 
 Late IN the night; in the Multa de nocte ; de tertia 
 third watch vigilia {Before the ex- 
 
 piration of) 
 
 Once IN ten days Decimo quoque die 
 
 IN England i in Herodotus Apud Anglos ; apud Hero- 
 
 dotum 
 
 In Anjriia would not be used except literally, i.e. for 
 geographical description. 
 
 /;/ is very rarely used in good English for into, though 
 it was so used by Shakespeare,* and it is still good English 
 to say, ' he fell in love.' The Latins often use in in this 
 sense, with a notion of direction. The Accusative which 
 means motion towards, naturally follows in thus used. 
 
 This plain is ten miles IN Campus decem millia 
 breadth passuom in latitudinem 
 
 patet (i.e. extends in the 
 
 dira tion of ) 
 
 * Shakespearian Grammar, Paragraph 159. 
 
44 ^ 
 
 He sfioke IN this way (to 
 this effect") 
 
 He was put IN prison 
 
 V [Par. 41. 
 
 In or ad hunc modum ora- 
 tionem habuit 
 
 In vincula conjectus est 
 
 Rule * In,' when expressing direction,* is 
 followed by the Accusative. 
 
 He did it IN (influenced by) 
 anger 
 
 IN my judgment 
 
 Where IN the world f 
 
 IN ACCORDANCE WITH (i.e. 
 
 IN A MANNER NA- 
 TURALLY SPRINGING 
 
 OUT OF) the letter, cus- 
 tom, opinion, &*c. 
 
 IN ACCORDANCE WITH 
 (i.e. IN A MANNER FOL- 
 LOWING, AGREEING 
 
 WITH) nature, the law, 
 
 Per iram, or iratus hoc 
 
 fecit 
 
 Me judice 
 Ubinam gentium ? 
 
 Ex literis, consuetudine, 
 sententia, &c. (More 
 rarely de, down from) 
 
 Secundum naturam, legem, 
 &c. 
 
 IN ADDITION TO money 
 IN ADDITION TO THIS, he 
 
 had, &>c. 
 
 IN THE CASE OF Themis- 
 tocles, skill was almost 
 cunning 
 
 IN CASE OF his death, what 
 will you do ? 
 
 IN COMPARISON WITH 
 
 Balbus you are (excess) 
 happy 
 
 Prseter pecuniam 
 
 Hue accedebat ut haberct, 
 c. 
 
 in Themistocle peritia fere 
 versutia fiebat 
 
 Si mortuus erit, quid fades? 
 
 Prae (beyond) Balbo beatus 
 es 
 
 * It is sometimes said that in after a Verb of motion governs the Accusa- 
 tive : but of course this is not strictly true ; ' he was walking in a room ' is 
 In cubiculo ambulabat.' 
 
Par. 41.] 
 
 IN: 
 
 45 
 
 IN COMPARISON WITH Miser es ad (if you try to 
 Balbus you are (de- come up /0)Balbum. (Or, 
 
 feet) miserable conferre, comparare) 
 
 In compliance with, ex, secundum j or turn by obsequi, 
 morem gerere. 
 In consequence of, ex, propter, or turn by a Verb or 
 
 Participle. 
 
 IN CONSEQUENCE OF this 
 
 \it the consul re- 
 treated to Mutina 
 
 I was going IN THE DIREC- 
 TION OF Arpinum 
 
 J am IN FAVOUR OF you 
 
 This is IN FAVOUR OF 
 Balbus 
 
 He wishes to abdicate IN 
 FAVOUR OF his son 
 
 IN THE MIDST OF the 
 enemy 
 
 He spoke IN OPPOSITION 
 TO the proposal 
 
 This is IN OPPOSITION TO 
 that 
 
 IN POINT OF numbers 
 
 Qua clade coactus consul 
 Mutinam se recepit 
 
 I bam Arpinum versus 
 
 A te sto 
 
 Hoc a, or cum Balbo facit 
 
 Vult ita se regno abdicare 
 ut succedat films 
 
 Mediis in hostibus 
 Contra sententiam dicebat 
 Hasc ab illis discrepant 
 
 Numero, or qnod attinet 
 
 ad numerum 
 
 In presence of . (See Before.) 
 
 IN QUEST (or SEARCH) OF Veritatem 
 truth we ought to grudge 
 no labour 
 
 IN RESPECT OF natural 
 ability and education he 
 was no way deficient 
 
 IN SPITE mall the citizens 
 could do 
 
 conquirentes 
 dedecet labor! parcere 
 
 Nihil illi neque a natura 
 neque a doctrina defuit 
 
 Civibus omnia nequicquam 
 tentantibus 
 
46 'INSTEAD OP." yPar. 41. 
 
 IN SPITE OF my interces- Me frustra deprecante 
 
 sion 
 
 inside of, intra. (See Within) 
 
 Instead of: (i) as a substitute for, pro $ (2) as good as ', 
 loco (with Gen.) ; (3) in vicexn or vice is used in later 
 Latin for as a substitute for. 
 
 Are you ready to die IN*- Num pro amico vis mori ? 
 STEAD OF your friend? 
 
 He was as it were INSTEAD Loco fratris erat mihi 
 OF a brother to me 
 
 Bitumen was used IN- Bitumen vice arenas inter- 
 STEAD OF mortar stratum 
 
 INSTEAD PF love he gives Odit, qnum amare debeat, 
 us hatred (Par. 75.) 
 
 Including:, inclusive Of. 
 
 There are in all two hun- Omnino ducenti sumns, si 
 dred of us, INCLUDING mulieres liberosque an- 
 women and children numeraveris 
 
 Like is irregularly used as a Preposition (in the same 
 way as near) : ' I write like her.' See Conjunctions, As. 
 
 Near : (l) prope with Ace. ; (2) close to, propter ; 
 (3) at, apud ; (4) near, off, of land and naval battles, ad 5 
 (5) hard by, juxta. Note the expression ' prope absum ab 
 aliquo loco ' for * I am near a place/ 
 
 Of (akin to off,airQ, ab) ; (i) motion from; (2) out of; 
 (3) in consequence of; (4) connection of any kind; (5) de- 
 longing to ; (6) about. 
 
 Ireland is on the south- Hibernia ab occasu sestivo 
 west OF Scotland ad Scotiam spectat 
 
Par. 4 x.] OF: 
 
 He is within a mile OF the 
 
 city 
 
 This comes OF laziness 
 
 He comes OF good parent- 
 age 
 
 A cup OF gold 
 A man OF Athens 
 The vigour Of youth 
 
 A man of ability 
 
 But, 
 A man OF great ability 
 
 Three hundred Of \ 
 
 the citizens \suruive 
 AllOYus } 
 
 The city OF Rome 
 The battle OF Cannce 
 
 47 
 
 The top OF the tree, moun- 
 tain, &c. 
 
 Dortt stir a finger 3 ^ 
 breadth, no not a hair's 
 breadth from this spot . 
 
 After the consulship OF 
 Tullius 
 
 He died (IN CONSEQUENCE) 
 OF hunger 
 
 Compare for the use of the Ablative : 
 
 Ab urbe minus mille passus 
 abest 
 
 Hunc habet fructum ig- 
 navia 
 
 Parentibus non humilibus 
 ortus est 
 
 Poculum ex auro factuxn, 
 or simply aureum 
 
 Civis Atheniensis (not 
 Athenarum) 
 
 Vigor juvenum or juve- 
 nilis 
 
 Vir inereniosus (not in- 
 genii) 
 
 Vir summi ingenii or sum- 
 mo ingenio 
 
 Trecenti ex civibus super- 
 
 sunt 
 Nos omnes supersumus 
 
 Urbs Roma 
 
 Praslium ad Caxmas pug- 
 
 natum, or Caunensc 
 
 Summa arbor, summus 
 mons, &C. 
 
 Ne hinc transversum digi- 
 tum, ne latum quide 
 
 unguem abscesseris 
 Post consulem Tullium 
 
 Inedia* periit 
 
 1 Which is as bad as die with tickling. 
 
 Muck Ado about Nothing, iii. T. 80. 
 
48 'OF? [Par. 41. 
 
 News OF (ABOUT) his death Fama de illius morte hue 
 has arrived adlata est 
 
 What will become OF my Quid de fratre fiet ? 
 
 brother f 
 
 What do you think OF Quid de his putas ? 
 
 this? 
 
 Swift OF foot (A-FOOT), Velox peditms, alacer anl- 
 
 ready OF wit mo 
 
 Of is used partitively in English after eat, taste; but 
 an Accusative follows edere, gustare. 
 
 Of, in the sense of about, de, is common after inform, 
 know, think, glad, despair, doubt. 
 
 Off, motion from, de 5 then of situation nautically, some 
 way from: this the Latins render by contra, ad, propter, 
 or by the ob in objacet, the Verb being followed by the 
 Dative. 
 
 The battle took place OFF Pugnatum est ad Actium 
 Actium 
 
 On (connected with in) : (i) rest or motion on, in, or 
 near something : (2) metaphorically, on or in a certain 
 time : (3) position above, super or* Participle ; (4) meta- 
 phorically, resting on as a basis, in consequence of, after : 
 (5) metaphorically, about, de j (6) metaphorically, as an 
 Adverbial Prefix. 
 
 N.B. On after a verb of motion is often rendered by 
 in with Ace., and, after a compound Latin Verb, by a 
 Dative. (See Par. 15.) 
 
 Did you not put him ON the Nonne eum in equuleum 
 rack f imposuisti ? 
 
 * E.g. 'OK his shield/ 'clypeo exceptum, or snpposito. 
 
Par. 4I-] ' 
 
 ON earth (as opposed to 
 heaven) 
 
 ON the Appian road 
 
 He has a wreath ON his 
 head 
 
 London is ON the Thames 
 
 ON the north, rear, frc. 
 ON our journey 
 
 We held a conference ON 
 horseback 
 
 I heard her play ON (WITH 
 
 THE INSTRUMENTALITY 
 
 OF) the lyre, harp, &c. 
 I feed ON bread 
 On foot ; GK our knees 
 ON the ^th of October 
 
 ON the next, tenth, &c. day 
 
 ON (IN THE FRONT PART 
 
 OF) the platform 
 
 They carried him home ON 
 his own shield 
 
 ON condition that you pro- 
 mise 
 
 ON THE COMPLETION, ) 
 TERMINATION OF his > 
 
 consulship \ 
 
 ON (ABOUT) this point 1 
 have nothing to sqy 
 
 A. 49 
 
 Apud mortales ; in hac vita. 
 (Terra would mean by 
 Jand.) 
 
 In Appia via 
 Coronam in capite habet 
 
 Londinium ad Tamesin si- 
 turn est 
 
 A Septentrione, tergo, &c. 
 Ex itinere. (Par. 39.) 
 Ex equis collocuti sumus 
 
 Audivi illam lyra, cithara, 
 &c. canentem 
 
 Pane vescor 
 Pedibus j prenibus 
 
 Ante diem septimum Ka- 
 lendas Novembres 
 
 Postero, decimo, &C. die 
 Pro suggestu 
 
 Clypeo suo (N.B. not ejua, 
 as his own is emphatic) 
 eum exceptum refere- 
 bant 
 
 Ita or Ea legc or ea condi- 
 tione (rarely sub ea) ut 
 promittas (also Ita or 
 Ea lege si promiseris) 
 
 Ex consulatu^ 
 Consulatu peracto 
 
 De hac re nihil habeo quod 
 dicam 
 
[Par. 41. 
 
 ON a sudden i ON purpose 
 
 He is ON the watch for a 
 fault 
 
 Evils come one ON another 
 
 Whenhewas ON THE POINT 
 
 OF death 
 
 I am ON Casals SIDE 
 / am ON neither SIDE 
 This is ON our SIDE 
 
 ONTHESIDEOF the Helvetii 
 the country is shut in by 
 mountains 
 
 ON THIS SIDE, ON THAT 
 SIDE, OF the Alps 
 
 He excuses himself OK THE 
 PLEA OF health 
 
 Subito; consulto, de in- 
 dustria 
 
 Expectat dum pecces 
 
 Calamitates alia ex alia in- 
 sequuntur. (See After.) 
 
 Quum in eo erat ut more- 
 retur 
 
 Sentio cum, pro Caesare 
 Neutrius partis sum 
 Hoc a nobis facit 
 
 Ab Helvetiis monies re- 
 gionem includunt 
 
 Cis, ultra Alpes 
 
 Morbi causa sese excusat 
 (Instrumentality) 
 
 On account of, propter ; ob j after negative, prae, per ; 
 ergo with a Genitive after its case, archaic. Also : 
 
 // ts ON ACCOUNT OF my 
 friends that I grieve 
 
 Equidem arnicorum vicem 
 doleo 
 
 Opposite, (i) literally and metaphorically, contra: 
 (2) literally, ex adverso, exadversus, followed by Genitive 
 or Dative ; (3) right over against, e regione followed by 
 Genitive or Dative ; (4) nautically used, off, rendered by 
 ob in objacet or oppositum. 
 
 Out of, (i) after a Verb of motion, literally, ex ; (2) out- 
 side, beyond, extra ; (3) metaphorically as a result of, on 
 account of, propter, per, or the Ablative with Participle. 
 
 OUT OF shot 
 
 He obeys the laws OUT OF 
 fear 
 
 Extra teli jactum 
 Legibus propter me turn, or 
 metu coactus paret 
 
Par. 41.] 
 
 ' PREVIOUS TO: 
 
 He did it OUT OF fun 
 He is OUT OF his mi ml 
 
 It is OUT OF our power to 
 acquit one who is guilty 
 
 Outside of, extra. 
 
 Per jocum id fecit 
 Minus cst sui compos 
 
 Non cst ea potestas nostra 
 
 ut sontcm absolvamus 
 
 Over (i), motion or rest over, super; all over, per; 
 (2) across, trans ; (3) rest over, supra ; (4) metaphorically, 
 more than, super (but better ampiius) ; (5) metaphori- 
 cally, extending over, during, per, or Accusative of dura- 
 tion ; (6) where over denotes superiority in authority, it is 
 generally represented by some compound Verb, e.g. prse- 
 sum containing prce and governing the Dative. Over ana 
 above is super or praeter. 
 
 We shall pass OVER the 
 Rhine 
 
 ' The plague lasted- OVER a 
 period of ten years 
 
 He ivas set OVER the army 
 OVER AGAINST 
 
 Trans Rhenum transjicie- 
 mus (the Preposition 
 may be omitted) 
 
 Pestis decem (or per decem) 
 
 annos durabat 
 Exercitui prsefectUS CSt 
 
 E regione (from the direc- 
 tion) followed by Gen. 
 or Dat. 
 
 Owing to. Per, propter, ob. 
 
 // was OWING TO you that 
 / did not succeed 
 
 Pending. 
 
 PENDING the decision of 
 the judge, the plaintiff 
 disappeared 
 
 Per te stetit quominus res 
 mihi prospere succede- 
 ret 
 
 Ante quam judicari posset, 
 
 petitor subito abierat 
 (or re ncmdum judicata) 
 
 Previous to, ante, Prep., or antequam, priusquaxn, Conj. 
 See Before, and also Paragraph 66. 
 
 2 
 
52 'REGARDING: 
 
 Regarding (see With regard to\ 
 Respecting (see With respect to\ 
 
 [Par. 41. 
 
 Relatively to. 
 
 Our loss, though great ab- 
 solutely, is yet very slight 
 
 RELATIVELY TO that of 
 the enemy 
 
 Cladem re ipsa magnam, 
 sed cum hostium clade 
 comparatam, levissi- 
 mam accepimus 
 
 Round, Around, (l) circum 3 (2) round about, less 
 exactly, circa. Sometimes expressed by a compound, e.g. 
 circumdare. 
 
 He btdlt a wall ROUND the 
 city 
 
 We must send ambassadors 
 ROUND TO the neigh- 
 bouring nations 
 
 Urbi murum circumdedit 
 
 Legati circa vicinas gentes 
 mittendi 
 
 Since (i) with a notion of consequence, from, 
 
 con- 
 
 * never since J 
 post. 
 
 , , 
 
 (2) dating back from a starting point, with notion of 
 tinuousness, a, inde a ; (3) with negative as in * never si 
 
 Ever SINCE the beginning 
 of the building of the 
 bridge 
 
 SINCE his childhood 
 
 Never SINCE the creation of 
 the world 
 
 Ex eo tempore quo pons 
 institui cceptus est (Do 
 not omit eo tempore in 
 prose.) 
 
 Inde a puero 
 
 Nunquam post homines 
 natos 
 
 Throngb (akin to trans, Germ, durch) (i) radical 
 meaning, motion across and out of, through the midst of, 
 per; (2) applied to time, throughout, during, per; (3) 
 metaphorically, indirect agency, per (see Owing to), but 
 also turned by opera, beneflcio. 
 
Par. 41.] 'TO.' 
 
 It was THROUGH me that 
 you recovered Tar en tu in 
 
 THROUGH his wealth he 
 rose to be king 
 
 53 
 
 Tarentum re- 
 
 Mea opera 
 
 cepisti 
 
 Divitiarum beneficio 
 exortus est 
 
 rex 
 
 Till (O.E. til = to], ad; usque ad. Often to be 
 turned by a Conjunction in Latin. (See 66.) 
 
 To,* (i) meaning motion to or into, ad, in; (2) exten- 
 sion of space to, usque ad, terms ; (3) extension of time to, 
 ad, in ; (4) extension of number to, ad ; (5) motion to, 
 hence object, purpose, r t esult, in, ad ; (6) motion to, and 
 hence comparison with, ad; (7) relation to, conduct to, 
 erga, in ; (8) loosely used for as regards. 
 
 He will go first TO Athens, 
 then TO Italy 
 
 His kingdom extends TO 
 Taurus 
 
 They fought TO a late hour 
 in the day 
 
 We lost TO the number of 
 fifty men; the enemy 
 were killed TO a man 
 
 To what end do you say 
 this t 
 
 This is TO the purpose 
 He spoke TO this effect 
 
 Though he's a good fellow, 
 he's nothing TO Balbus 
 
 He was dutiful TO his 
 parents, and strictly loyal 
 TO his king 
 
 Primum Athenas ibit, turn 
 in Italiam. (Par. 16.) 
 
 Tauro terms regnat 
 
 In multum diei pugnatum 
 est 
 
 Nostrorum ad quinqua- 
 ginta, hostes ad unum 
 occisi 
 
 Quern ad finem (or quor- 
 sum) haec dicis ? 
 
 Haec in rem sunt 
 
 In hanc sententiam dixit 
 (or In hunc modum) 
 
 Homo est, ut bonus, ita ni- 
 hil ad Balbum 
 
 Pius erat in parentes, per- 
 petua erga regem fide 
 
 * For to before Verbs see Paragraph 73. 
 
54 ' TOUCHING: [Par. 41. 
 
 ( Peccas, me judice 
 
 To my mind, you are wrong < Peccare mihi quidem vi- 
 
 ( deris 
 
 To the best of his power Pro virili parte 
 
 / would TO God I could Ita me Dii ament, ut velim 
 help him ei subvenire 
 
 Touching: (l) OS to, quod attinet ad, quod ad j (2) 
 concerning, de. 
 
 Toward : (i) motion in the direction of, adversus ; (2) in 
 the direction of (sometimes without motion), ad, in j (3) 
 of time, sub with Accusative ; (4) in relation to persons, 
 erga, in, with Accusative. 
 
 They charged TOWARD the Impetum adversus collem 
 hill which looks TO- fecerunt, qui in or ad 
 
 WARD the north Septentriones spectat 
 
 TOWARD night Sub noctem 
 
 He feels TOWARD him the Amore in eum fraterno est 
 love of a brother 
 
 Under : literally and metaphorically sub ; followed by 
 Ablative, but after Verbs of motion, by Accusative. 
 
 Some metaphors, such as * under a pretence/ ' under 
 this head/ are rendered in Latin literally, and not meta- 
 phorically, e.g. 'per speciem/ 'in hoc genere/ ' by means 
 of a pretence/ 'in this class/ 
 
 This is placed by Balbus Hoc a Balbo quidem in 
 
 UNDER the first head, primo genere ponitur, 
 
 but seems to me to come mihi autcm in alteruxn 
 
 UNDER the other videtur venire 
 
 UNDER pretence of friend- Per simulationem amicitiae, 
 
 ship, and UNDER a show et per speciem pacis 
 
 of bringing about a reconciliandae 
 peace 
 
Par. 41.] ' WITH? 55 
 
 UNDER arms in armis 
 
 UNDER appearance of Specie (adv.) beneficii 
 favour 
 
 \3NW& your guidance Te duce 
 
 UNDER this condition that, Ea lege ut, &c. 
 
 frc. 
 UNDER these circumstances Quae cum ita sint 
 
 Until (see Till). 
 Unto (see To). 
 
 With, radical meaning ' from, against ' (MORRIS) : 
 hence, from meaning ' opposite/ it comes to have the 
 meanings of (i) neighbourhood, relations friendly. or hostile, 
 cum j (2) in the hands of, penes ; (3) circumstance^ cum 
 or Abl. with Adjective ; (4) instrument, Abl. ; (5) circum- 
 stance regarded as a cause., ' considering] pro j (6) in 
 adverbial phrases to signify manner, Latin Adverb. 
 
 V/ITH whojn does the de- 
 cision rest ? 
 
 He came WITH speed 
 
 WITH heaven's aid 
 
 WITH your usiial wisdom, 
 you will be on your guard 
 
 WITH pleasure, reluctance 
 
 They fight WITH (AMONG) 
 one another instead of 
 WITH (AGAINST, OP- 
 POSITE TO) the enemy 
 
 Having the wind WITH 
 him 
 
 WITH all my heart 
 
 Penes quern est arbitrium ? 
 
 Cum celeritate venit. (Or 
 summa celeritate.) 
 
 Diis juvantibus 
 
 Tu, pro tua prudentia 
 cavebis 
 
 Iiibenter, invitus 
 
 Inter sese pugnant quum 
 debeant pugnare cum 
 hoste 
 
 Ventum secundum nactus 
 
 Ex animo (i.e. from the 
 bottom of my heart) 
 
56 ' WITH: [Par. 41. 
 
 // is all over WITH us Ac turn est de nobis 
 
 What shall we do WITH ( Quid de hoc faciemus ? 
 // f \ Quomodo hoc utemur ? 
 
 The Verbs / am angry with, irascor (tibi) ; I go on 
 with, i.e. continue, persequor ; I find fault with, repre- 
 hendo ; / agree with, assentior (tibi), illustrate the fact 
 that with is often a part of a Compound Transitive Verb, 
 and is not to be rendered by a Latin Preposition. 
 
 I am the same* WITH you Idem sum ac tu, i.e. I am 
 
 the same and you are 
 (the same) 
 
 I fear it equally WITH you Hoc, asque ac tu, vereor 
 
 He was at Rome at the Romae, eodem tempore quo 
 same time WITH me ego, vitam agebat 
 
 It would be interesting to discover why other Prepo 
 sitions and other Pronouns are not combined in the fol- 
 lowing way : 
 
 Rule ' Cum ' is used as an enclitic in 
 < mecum,' tecum,' quocum,' ' nobiscum,' 
 ' vobiscum,' and quibuscum.'f 
 
 WITH REFERENCE TO \ 
 
 WITH REGARD TO De ; quod attinet ad j 
 
 WITH RESPECT TO J 
 
 sometimes to be expressed by emphasis, with the ad- 
 dition of qnidem. 
 
 WITH REFERENCE TO Tullium (quidem) nihil 
 
 Tulliiis, I have no habeo cur excuses; pro 
 
 ground for asking your ceteris velim pauca 
 
 consideration; for the dicam 
 rest I should like to say 
 a word 
 
 * This is hardly English, but it corresponds to ' different front. 
 t 'Terms' in 'hactenus/ ' quatenus. 
 
Par. 42.] PREPOSITIONS OMITTED. 57 
 
 With a view to (ad ; in ; causa with Gen. ; or turn 
 
 by CO consilio lit). 
 
 They all act WITH A VIEW Omnes sibi quisque con- 
 TO their own interests sulunt 
 
 Within: (i) of time, space, intra; (2) on this siae of, 
 cis, citra. 
 
 He was WITHIN A LITTLE Minimum abfuit quin 
 of death periret 
 
 Without : (i) want or absence, sine ; (2) outside, extra; 
 (3) turn by Participle, Conjunction, or Adverb. 
 
 He was condemned WITH- Inauditus damnatus est 
 OUT a hearing 
 
 ' Strong WITHOUT r*g*' I ^ alet ' e<l ~ e tam f en f " rit 
 ( Ita valet ut non furat 
 
 He acted WITHOUT discre- Imprndenter fecit 
 tion 
 
 4-2. Ellipse of English Prepositions. The Preposition 
 by is expressed in English to denote the measure of excess 
 or defect, e.g. ' shorter, taller by five feet. 3 But when the 
 amount of excess or defect is mentioned before the Com- 
 parative, the Preposition is omitted, ' (by) five feet taller/ 
 where ' five feet ' is used, like ' this side/ adverbially. The 
 Latins make no difference whether the Comparative pre- 
 cede or follow. 
 
 (Bv) so much the better Eo melius 
 
 (BY) how far he surpasses ! Quanto superat ! 
 
 MUCH WORSE Muito pejus 
 
 He's (BY) a little too late Pauiio est tardior 
 
 Rule The measure of excess or defect is 
 expressed by the Ablative, e.g. ' quinque pedi- 
 bus major. 1 
 
CONJUNCTIONS. 
 
 [Par. 43. 
 
 Some prepositional phrase, e.g. to the extent of, amount 
 of, seems to be required before high, deep, broad, c. 
 The Latins express this absent Preposition mostly by 
 the Accusative case, ' Agger erat decem pedes altus ; ' or 
 else, less frequently, by the Accusative after habebat, e.g. 
 * decem pedes habebat altus.' 
 
 4-3. Conjunctions, Coordinate and Subordinate. Co- 
 ordinate Conjunctions are those that conjoin sentences 
 that are parallel and not subordinate the one to the other. 
 Thus in ' 1 came and, but, so, therefore, he returned/ 
 we have two coordinate sentences connected by and, &c. 
 But in ' I came because he returned/ / came is the state- 
 ment or principal sentence, and he returned is only 
 introduced as a reason, i.e. subordinately. This may be 
 illustrated by a diagram. 
 
 I came, 
 
 and 
 he returned. 
 
 FIG. t. 
 
Par. 44a.] 'AND,' * BUT.* 59 
 
 In the first diagram the two sentences are parallel ; in 
 the second diagram, the sentence he returned is (i) an 
 aiding cause, or (2) a neutral circumstance, or (3) an im- 
 peding obstacle, and, in each of the three cases, Subor- 
 dinate. 
 
 4-4. Conjunctions Co-ordinate. And is added in 
 English, illogically but usefully, to prepare the hearer 
 for the last of a number of things enumerated, 'John, 
 Thomas, and (lastly] Harry/ The Latins, not disliking 
 the abruptness, or preferring logical symmetry to smooth- 
 ness, say, 'Johannes, Thomas, Henricus,' or * Johannes 
 et Thomas et Henricus.' 
 
 Rale In enumerations, ' et ' must be used 
 throughout or not at all. 
 
 4-Aa. Enclitic Conjunctions. Too (meaning also), e.g. 
 * You too, Brutus ! ' must follow some emphatic word and 
 cannot stand first in a sentence. The Latins have many 
 such Enclitic Conjunctions. 
 
 Rule -' Autem,' ' enim,' ' quidem,' ' que,' 
 *ve,' 'vero,'* and generally igitur ' and 
 'tamen,' cannot stand first in a sentence, 
 but must foiiow some emphatic word. 
 
 N.B. Distinguish between sed and autem. Sed (se-d 
 by itself, something distinct from what precedes) qualifies, 
 corrects, or denies : autem whereas, while (Greek &), in- 
 troduces a second statement not inconsistent with the first. 
 Distinguish also between verum but, and vero truly. 
 
 He is a little dull; WHILE Ille quidem tardior ; tu 
 you are clever, BUT un- autem ingeniosus, sed 
 
 stable in all your actions in omni vita inconstans 
 
 * Vero stands first in replies, e.g. ' Will you come ? Yes, and gladly,' 
 'Vero, ac libenter quidem. 
 
60 'AND NOT; ' AND HE^ [Par. 45. 
 
 But introducing an objection abruptly is to be rendered 
 
 at enim. 
 
 BUT you were compelled At enim vi coactus fecisti 
 t<? do it, YOU SAY 
 
 4-5. Negative Conjunctions. In English we do not 
 shrink from saying ' and not,' ' and no one ; ' but and 
 means +, while not often means , and the Latins felt the 
 impropriety of saying ' et non ' ' +> / where the positive 
 and negative are equally emphatic. They preferred to 
 bring the negative to the front, and had at command 
 the unemphatic form of and, que. They therefore pre- 
 ferred to say neque, and also nee quisquam. So neve, 
 nisi. For a similar reason die Latins dislike non 
 vaide, and prefer non ita. They also prefer negro to 
 'dico .... non.' 
 
 Rule * And not,' ' and no one/ ' if not/ are 
 to be rendered by ' neque/ ' nee quisquam/ 
 * nisi.' So also ' neque unquam,' ' usquam/ 
 &c. 
 
 We say ' not even Balbus : ' but, in Latin, quidem, being 
 an enclitic (44a.) must come after the word that it quali- 
 fies. Note therefore the following : 
 
 Rule Do not say ' ne quidem Balbus/ but 
 ne Balbus quidem/ 
 
 A6. ' And he,' ' now he.' The Latins, greatly disliking 
 ille and is to represent a previous Subject, prefer qui, to 
 denote the Subject with the notion of connection. 
 
 Rule' And he/ 'now he/ &c. must often 
 be rendered by qui/ 
 
 I called on the man AND HE Conveni hominem, qui me 
 told me, &>c. certiorem fecit, &c. 
 
Par. 47.] * AND, tl BUT: 61 
 
 Now since THIS is so Quse quum ita sint 
 
 Now when he heard 'THIS . . Quibus auditis . . . 
 
 He also is often idem. 
 
 Epicurus denied this : HE Epicurus hoc negabat. 
 
 ALSO maintained that Idem dictitabat sum- 
 
 pain is tJie greatest pos- mum malum esse dolo- 
 
 sidle evil ' rem 
 
 47. ' And ' and ' but ' omitted. The Latins dislike a 
 long string of coordinate clauses, and avoid them by using 
 sometimes Participles, sometimes Conjunctions. In Eng- 
 lish the power of converting almost any Participle into an 
 Adjective, e.g. l the burned cake/ prevents us from using 
 the Participle in the same way in which the Latins use it. 
 We could not say 'he left the burned bridge* for 'he 
 burned and left the bridge. 7 The Latins greatly prefer the 
 Participial construction. 
 
 Rule 4 He burned and left the bridge ' = 
 1 Pontem incensum deseruit.' 
 
 But is also sometimes omitted in the same way : 
 
 / asked him what he Interroganti mihi quid 
 wanted, BUT he made vellet nihil respondit 
 
 no reply 
 
 'But] 'while} should be omitted where two state- 
 ments, or questions implying statements, are combined for 
 the purpose of bringing out the absurdity of the combina- 
 tion. The Latins are fond of occasional abruptness. 
 
 How ! are. we to suppose Quid igitur ! Hoc pueri 
 
 that this is possible for possunt, viri non pos- 
 
 boys y BUT impossible for sunt? 
 men? 
 
 But used for that not, see Paragraph 55. 
 
62 SUBORDINATE CONJUNCTIONS. [Par. 48. 
 
 % 
 
 48. Subordinate Conjunctions. We will first consider 
 those that introduce a Subjective or Objective clause. 
 
 That. Take the sentence l he is honest.' If this is to 
 be made the Object of a Transitive Verb, e.g. 'I know/ 
 we can say ' I know him to be honest] where the Object 
 of know is not him, but him to be honest. So the Latins 
 say ' certo scio ilium probum esse.' But, whether it be 
 that we dislike the juxtaposition of the Transitive Verb, 
 e.g. know, with a Pronoun, e.g. him, that is not really the 
 Object of that Verb, or whatever be the reason, we cannot 
 use this construction in many cases. For example, we 
 cannot now say ' 1 hear or read him to be honest] nor can 
 we say * it is certain him to be honest? The Latins, more 
 consistently, use this construction wherever a clause is 
 introduced either as Subject or Object. ' Audio (Obj.) 
 ilium probum esse/ ' Certum est (Subj.) ilium probum 
 esse/ 
 
 In such cases we generally connect the Subject or 
 Object with the principal Verb by that (how that) : ' I 
 hear (Object) (how) that he is honest/ Compare in Greek 
 Xf'yco <m, in Low Latin 'dico quod/ in French 'je dis que.' 
 So, ' that he is honest (Subject) is certain.' 
 
 Rule Do not translate < that ' by ' ut ' 
 where it introduces an Objective or Sub- 
 jective Clause, but by the Infinitive, e.g. 'I am 
 persuaded (I know) that it is true/ ' Persuasum est 
 mini haec vera esse.' 
 
 In order to prepare the way for the Object sentence, the Latins often 
 
 junctive. ' Ita a patribus didicimus ut virtute magis quarn dolo conten- 
 damus.* 
 
 N.B. When the Infinitive has a Subject and also an 
 Object, both in the Accusative, great care is necessary to 
 avoid ambiguity. Thus, what is the meaning of 
 * Aio te, ^Eacida, Romanos vincere posse' ? 
 The meaning would be clear if the oracle had said * Aio, 
 
Par. 49.] 'THAT: 63 
 
 Pyrrhe, te a Romanis vinci posse,' using the Passive, 
 instead of tJie Active. 
 
 Rule Avoid the Ambiguity arising from 
 the Accusative before and after the Infini- 
 tive. 
 
 49. Exceptions With ' it seems that? ' it is said that? 
 the Latins use the Nominative and Infinitive. 
 
 // seems that Balbus has Videtur B alb us abiisse. 
 departed (Balbus seems, &c.) 
 
 It is said that Balbus lived Fertur (dicitur) Balbus 
 to be an old man usque ad senectutem 
 
 vixisse 
 
 Quin is qui ne, by which not. The Latins regarding 
 doubt as preventive, say, instead of ' there is no doubt 
 that this is true/ ' There is no doubt by which this should 
 not be true/ * Haud dubium est quin hasc vera sint/ where 
 quin is qui-ne, by which not. Hence : 
 
 Rule 4 That ' after < there is no doubt/ is 
 rendered by ' quin ' in Latin. 
 
 A similar kind of construction is common in Elizabethan English : * I 
 doubt not but to ride as fast as he,' i.e. ' I have no doubt (fear) about being 
 prevented from riding.' Shakespearian Grammar, Paragraph 122. 
 
 N.B. Note the Periphrasis necessary to express a 
 Future passive after quin. 
 
 There's no doubt that Haud dubium est quin 
 Europe will soon be futurum sit ut Europa 
 
 divided into more parts mox in plures partes 
 
 distribuatur 
 
 That is used in English after / fear, as after / hope, 
 think, &*c. to precede the Object of fear ; ' I fear (What?) 
 that he will come? The Latins render I fear by vereor, 
 / watch anxiously, which contains a notion of purpose. 
 
64 T^AT.' [Par. 50. 
 
 Consequently vcreor is followed by ne and the Sub- 
 junctive. 
 
 I am afraid THAT he will Vereorne* veniat, i.e. lam 
 come anxiously taking mea- 
 
 sures that he may not 
 come 
 
 I was a/razdTHAT he would Veritus sum nt * veniret, i.e. 
 not come I was taking measures 
 
 that he might come 
 
 Rule 4 That ' after I fear ' is rendered by 
 ne/ and that not ' by ut ' ; in both cases 
 followed by the Subjunctive. 
 
 SO. That is often omitted, e.g. ' I see (that) you under- 
 stand.' * I told him (that) it was so/ The beginner must 
 be very careful to detect such omissions and to represent 
 the Objective Clause by the Accusative and Infinitive. 
 
 N.B. Distinguish most carefully the above cases of 
 omitted that from the following, ' I heard you sing. 7 No 
 doubt this sentence might occasionally be used for ' I 
 heard (that) you sing/ e.g. ' I heard, from my brother, you 
 sing better than ever ' : but, as a rule, it would mean ' I 
 heard you singing? The ambiguity arises from the fact 
 that yoii has no inflection (to distinguish Nom. ' that you 
 sing 7 from Ace. ' 1 heard you singing'), and from the loss 
 of the Old Eng. Inf. Inflection -en. As the Ace. and Inf. 
 are used to represent that, the Latin rule is : 
 
 Rule Translate ' I heard her sing' by ' audivi 
 illam canentem. 1 
 
 Note the greater richness of English in : 
 I hear THAT SHE SINGS = Audio illam canere 
 
 (SING =\ 
 
 (IN THE ACT OF) >Audivii! 
 SINGING ~~) 
 
 illam canentem 
 
 * See Sequence of Tenses, 64. 
 
Par. 52. j WHETHER; THE RELATIVE. 05 
 
 51. * Whether/ and 'if,' when introducing an Objective 
 or Subjective clause, ' He asked whether, or if, this was 
 true,' are rendered by (i) utram, followed by an or ne, 
 (2) num, in both cases followed by the Subjunctive. 
 
 N.B. Distinguish between whether thus introducing a 
 dependent clause, and whether used to express a con- 
 dition, sive. 
 
 He asked WHETHER this Rogavit utram haec vera 
 was true or not essent * annon 
 
 WHETHER this is true or Haec, sive vera sunt seu 
 false, I am not troubled falsa, nullo modo me 
 
 by it movent 
 
 52. The Relative Pronoun is often equivalent to a De- 
 monstrative Pronoun combined with some Conjunction 
 either Coordinate or Subordinate. Sometimes, as will be 
 seen below, it introduces a coordinate, sometimes a sub- 
 ordinate clause. The English Relative, whether expressed 
 by who or that, is rendered by qui. In English the 
 distinction between who and that is as follows : Who 
 introduces a new fact about, while that introduces some- 
 thing essential to the complete meaning of, the antecedent. 
 ' They succeeded in capturing the soldiers (not all, but 
 only those] that were wounded, and also the children, who 
 (for they] were left behind as an encumbrance.' 
 
 Now, wherever who introduces simply a new fact, with- 
 out any notion of cause, purpose, obstacle, &<:., and 
 wherever that introduces simply something essential to 
 the completion of the Antecedent, without any notion of 
 such a kind that, the Latins, like ourselves, use the 
 Relative with the Indicative. But in the exceptional 
 cases above mentioned, where not a fact merely but a 
 thought is introduced, the Latins, whose language is 
 richer than ours in Moods, use the Subjunctive Mood to 
 express the thought, as distinguished from the /#<:/. the 
 fact being expressed by thelndicative. 
 
 * See Sequence of Tenses, 64. 
 
66 
 
 THE RELATIVE PRONOUN. [Par. 52. 
 
 Rule Wherever the Relative introduces a 
 thought, and not merely a fact, it is followed 
 by the Latin Subjunctive. 
 
 Some THAT had heard it 
 from his own lips 
 brought me word of tt 
 
 Qui ex ipso andivissent 
 certiorem me fecerunt 
 
 Here the Subjunctive denotes not a simple fact, but 
 a thought ', that the evidence of the class of witnesses 
 here described is peculiarly convincing. 
 
 Rule Since classification implies ' a 
 thought,' the Subjunctive follows ' sunt, 
 erant, qui,' ' there are some (such) that.' 
 
 There -are some THAT say 
 this is not true 
 
 Cams Ligarius doth bear 
 Ccesar hard, WHO * (BE- 
 CAUSE HE) rated him 
 for speaking well of 
 Pompey 
 
 Balbns is one THAT (SUCH 
 THAT) has always con- 
 sulted the interests of his 
 country rather than his 
 
 Sunt qui neprent haec vera 
 esse (so sceptical that) 
 
 Caius Ligarius succenset 
 Caesari qui se cuipaverit 
 
 quod Pompeium lauda- 
 verit (so critical that) 
 
 Balbus is est qui semper rei- 
 publicae potius quam sibi 
 consuluerit (so patriotic 
 that\ 
 
 As for you, WHO (SINCE 
 YOU) have not slept for 
 three nights, you are in- 
 deeH to be pitied 
 
 Tu quidem miserrimus, 
 qui tertiam jam noctem 
 non dormieris (so much 
 troubled that) 
 
 * Not a common use in modern English. See Shakespearian Grammar 
 Paragraph 263. 
 
Par. 53-1 DEPENDENT INTERROGATIVE. 67 
 
 
 
 There is not a soldier, Miles est nemo, qui modo 
 WHO {provided that sit homo, qui* non ha?c 
 
 he] is also a man, perhorrescat (so hard- 
 
 THAT would not recoil hearted that) 
 
 with horror from such 
 a plan 
 
 Qui takes the Subjunctive, even when introducing a 
 mere defining sentence, if that sentence is a part of a 
 statement or opinion of some one distinct from the writer. 
 This is a distinction that cannot be tersely expressed in 
 English : 
 
 Socrates used to execrate Socrates exsecrari eum 
 
 the man THAT was the solebat, qui primus uti- 
 
 first to separate (as litatem a jure sejunxis- 
 
 Socrates said] expe- set 
 diency from right 
 
 Qui also takes the Subjunctive, where the previous construction is such 
 as to convey the notion that the Relative Clause does not introduce a fact 
 i.e. in Subordinate Propositions dependent on clauses con- 
 taining Infinitives or Subjunctives. The following are examples : 
 
 // is natural for power to Potentis est facere quod 
 be arbitrary (do w HAT // vent 
 
 likes] 
 
 It is easy for you to advise Facile me admones ut me 
 me to keep myself in salvum, quoad pcssim, 
 
 health SO FAR AS / can servem 
 
 53. The Dependent Interrogative. What requires 
 care. Where it means that which, it is to be rendered by 
 quod or id quod, e.g. ' What you say is true/ ' Quod dicis, 
 verum est.' But interrogatively, what f is rendered by 
 quid ? ' quid dicis ? ' And the Latins, with their habitual 
 distinction betweenyfo:/ and not fact, not only change quod 
 into quid, but also change the Indicative into a Subjunc- 
 tive, in a dependent Interrogative : 
 
 * When nemo is at some distance from the Relative, quin is sometimes 
 replaced by qui non. See Paragraph 55. 
 
 F 2 
 
68 DEPENDENT INTERROGATIVE. [Par. 54. 
 
 Rule In dependent interrogatives, e.g. 'I 
 ask what you say,' ' quid ' must be used, and the 
 Verb must be in the Subjunctive, e.g. 'Rogo 
 quid dicas.' 
 
 The Latins in many cases prefer the Dependent Inter- 
 rogative form to the ordinary Relative. 
 
 I perceived the great kind- Intellexi quanta benevo 
 ness with WHICH / was lentia hospes me exci- 
 
 received by my host peret 
 
 Do you forget the many Num obliviscimini quotvic- 
 mctories THAT you have torias reportaveritis ? 
 
 gained f 
 
 N.B. Do not make the mistake rf writing vic- 
 toriarum, as though the Noun were governed by oblivis- 
 cor. The Object of obliviscor is, not victorias, but the 
 
 whole of the following sentence. 
 
 Very often the, qualifying the Antecedent, implies great, 
 e.g. ' I perceived the kindness with which/ In all such 
 cases quantus should be used. See Paragraph 21. 
 
 Rule When * the/ qualifying an Ante- 
 cedent, implies * great ' or * many,' ' quantus ' 
 or quot * should be used instead of the 
 Relative, and should be followed by the 
 Subjunctive. 
 
 54-. ' That ' after Superlatives. The English often use 
 a Superlative preceded by the before the Relative : thus 
 * He sent me the most beautiful flowers (of the flowers) 
 that he had.' But in Latin, * Misit ad me pulcerrimos 
 fl'ores quos habuit ' might mean ' He sent me some very 
 beautiful flowers that he had.' To avoid this, the Latins 
 place the Superlative in the Relative clause, * Whatever 
 (flowers) he had most beautiful, those flowers he sent, 1 
 'Quos flores habuit pulcerrimos, eos ad me misit/ or 
 
Par 55.] THAT. . . NOT. 1 69 
 
 Misit ad me flores, quos habuit pulcerrimos.' All is 
 transposed in the same way : 
 
 All THAT were captured Qui capti sunt, ii omnes 
 were put to death interfecti 
 
 The men THAT were in the * ) - n nayi cnmt 
 
 skl P Qui ) 
 
 Not homines qui, which might mean some men, who. 
 
 There are other ways of rendering all . . . that : 
 
 They will give up ALL the Quidquid ) divitiarum su- 
 wealth THAT they have Si quid ) perest, id omne 
 remaining tradent 
 
 Note cases where the Relative is implied in English, e.%. 
 ' The vigour of youth,' by itself, may be rendered vigor 
 
 juvenilisj but 
 
 I have lostPJJL THE vigour Quern quondam juvenis vi- 
 of youth gorem habui, eum om- 
 
 nem perdidi 
 
 Rule Transpose the Relative in ' the best 
 that,' ' all that/ ' the men that.' 
 
 N.B. The Relative where used with the Indicative to 
 define, often precedes its Antecedent, This may be a trace 
 of its interrogative origin. (Shakesp. Gram. Par. 251.) 
 
 55. ' That . . . not/ ' but.' When that has for its Ante- 
 cedent no one or nothing, and is followed by not, that not 
 are often combined in Latin and rendered by quin (qui-ne). 
 
 There was NO ONE THAT Nemo erat quin fleret 
 did ^NOT weep 
 
 When that is the Object of a Verb, ' quern .... non 
 is preferable to ' quin .... enm.' 
 
 There was no one THAT Nemo erat quern Tullius 
 Tullius did NOT love non amaret 
 
TO THAT: [Par. 56. 
 
 N.B.- -But meaning except is often used for 'that . . . 
 not,' ' There was no one but wept/ i.e. strictly, ' there was 
 no one except those that wept/ But seems loosely used as 
 a negative Relative, just as as is used as a positive Rela- 
 tive in ' Such flowers as * I have, I will give.' In Latin, 
 but is rendered by quin or qui . . . non. 
 
 There is no one BUT hates Nemo est quin me oderit 
 me 
 
 56. 'That 1 after repeated Antecedent. When the 
 English Antecedent is repeated, or stands, loosely, in ap- 
 position to a previous sentence, it is attracted, in Latin, 
 into the Relative clause : 
 
 He answered me with the Summa comitate mihi re- 
 
 greatest courtesy A spondit : cujus comita- 
 
 COURTESY THAT / shall tis equidem nunquam 
 
 never forget obliviscar 
 
 He lightened the taxes, A Vectiganum onera levabat : 
 
 KIND NESS THAT secured quo beneficio cives con- 
 
 him the. favour of his ciliabat 
 countrymen 
 
 N.B. You may turn sentences of this kind in some 
 other way : but you must never render them literally. 
 
 57. ' That ' for ' when.' That, after an Antecedent of 
 Time, is used for ' on that/ i.e. ' on which/ and is there- 
 fore equivalent to when. 
 
 On the day THAT (ON Quo die hoc gustaveris 
 WHICH, WHEN) thou 
 eatest thereof 
 
 When a Negative precedes that thus used, the Relative 
 and Negative are often combined and rendered by quin 
 (qui, old Abl.; ne) : 
 
 i 
 
 * Shakespeare writes sometimes ' such which.' See page 72, note, 
 
Par. 59.] RELATIVE CONJUNCTIONS. 71 
 
 Not a day passes THAT he Dies fere nullus quln hue 
 docs not come here ventitet 
 
 58. Omission of the Relative. The Relative is often 
 omitted in English, when it would come as an Object, just 
 between the Antecedent and a following Subject, e.g. *A 
 man (that) I saw yesterday said, &c.' The pupils must 
 remember that the Relative is never omitted in Latin 
 either in such a sentence as the above, or with Participle, 
 as in the following : 
 
 The soldiers (THAT WERE) Quidquid militum in castello 
 
 SHUT UP in the castle clausum erat, cum iis 
 
 conspired with those conjurabat militibus qui 
 
 (THAT WERE) REMAIN- extra oppidum mane- 
 
 ING outside the town bant 
 
 Miiites clausi might mean ' the soldiers, or some soldiers, 
 being shut up : ' ' iis manentibus ; would mean ' them, 
 while remaining] or ' those mentioned, who were re- 
 maining? 
 
 59. Relatival Conjunctions. As (in the way, degree 
 in which}, quam : sometimes demonstrative, in that degree, 
 tarn.* 
 
 Balbus is AS (IN THAT DE- Balbus est tarn sapiens 
 GREE) wise AS (IN quam ego 
 
 WHICH DEGREE) I am 
 
 Sentences like these might be turned by * equally/ e.g. 
 1 Balbus and I are equally grieved/ or, less logically, 
 ' Balbus is equally grieved and I (am equally grieved)/ 
 ' Balbus seque dolet atque ego.' 
 
 * In ' as good as' the first as = so. In Elizabethan English so . . . as was 
 often used where we use as ... as. 
 
 * So well thy words become thee as thy wounds.' 
 
 Macbeth, i. 2. 43. 
 
 This similarity between Demonstratives and Relatives is illustrated by the 
 double use of that. 
 
72 MS,' 'LIKES [Par. 60. 
 
 You ought to have respected Ilium seque (colere debuisti) 
 him AS (you ought to ac patrem colere debu- 
 
 have respected} a father isti 
 
 This is the same thing AS Hoc est idem ac (idem sit) 
 asking a question of a si surdum interroges (i.e. 
 
 deaf man and it would be the same] 
 
 As (in the way in which} is also rendered by ut with the 
 Indicative, or by eodem xnodo quo. 
 
 As you sow, so you must ut seres, ita metes 
 reap 
 
 As you please ut libet 
 
 / shall answer AS you did Ego respondebo eodem 
 
 mo do quo tu respondisti 
 
 As in English is sometimes used as a Subject or Object, 
 like the Relative Pronoun, e.g. in the two next examples : 
 
 He said the same AS before Eadem quse antea, dixit 
 
 Such help AS * / can give Quod auxilium potero dare, 
 you I will dabo 
 
 (B El NG,0r THOUGH I AMt) Quamvis (to whatever de- 
 Old AS / am I will gree) senex, resistam 
 resist 
 
 6O. * As/ ' like,' superlative notion of. As and like are 
 often used, without any notion of comparison, to give a 
 Superlative meaning, just as little boys say, ' I have such 
 a beautiful toy/ The Latins, more logically, express 
 this Superlative notion by a Superlative Adjective, or, if 
 the meaning is clear without it, they sometimes omit the 
 Superlative : 
 
 Who could disbelieve a man Ouis Catoni, viro sanctis- 
 LIKE Cato ? " simo, fidem non tribuat ? 
 
 * ' Such I will have whom I am sure he knows not.' 
 
 All's Well that Ends Well, iii. 6. 14. 
 
 t ' As near the dawning, provost, as it is.' 
 
 Measure for Measure, iv. 2. 97. 
 
Par. 62.] THAN* 73 
 
 // would be monstrous that Quis Gracchos, de seditione 
 suck men AS the Grac- querentcs, tulerit ? 
 
 chi should complain of 
 unconstitutional con- 
 duct / 
 
 A man LIKE you will al- Tu, cujus es mis eric or disc, 
 ways spare tke conquered semper victis parces 
 
 We must not desert such a Ricardus, vir fortissimus, 
 brave fellow AS Richard nullo modo est deseren- 
 
 dus 
 
 Rule ' Such . . . as,' a man like,' must 
 often be rendered by the Latin Superlative. 
 
 61. 'Than' expressed by * quam.' * Tullius is wiser 
 than I,' is to be explained as follows : Than is a form 
 of the, the old Relative, meaning in what way, so that 
 the above sentence means ' In what way (whereas) I am 
 wise, Tullius is wiser.' So, ' In what way (whereas) you 
 helped me, you helped no one more.' The Latin equiva- 
 lent for in what way is quam. Hence : 
 
 You helped no one more Nemini plus quam mini 
 THAN me subvenisti 
 
 His gift was greater in Donum dedit specie quam 
 appearance THAN in re majus 
 
 reality 
 
 Rule When two words are connected in 
 the way of comparison by ' quam,' and when 
 the Verb is the same in each member of the 
 sentence of Comparison, the two words 
 stand in the same case. 
 
 62. 'Than' expressed by the Ablative. Comparison 
 may be differently expressed. ' Tallness ' is relative ; a 
 man that is not 'tall' (as compared with average men) 
 may be made to appear 'taller' by tJie presence of 
 
74 ' THAN: [Par. 63. 
 
 Balbus. Hence Balbus may be considered as the instru- 
 ment that makes Tullius ' tall ' ; and the sentence may be 
 expressed, ' Tullius is made taller by Balbus} i Tullius 
 procerior est Balbo.' But the construction is liable to 
 ambiguity, when the first member of the comparison is 
 expressed by a Noun that is not in the Nominative or 
 Accusative, e.g. ' Donum dedit specie xnajus re/ i,e. 
 'greater than a thing,' or, ' greater than in reality? 
 Hence : 
 
 Rule ' Quam ' cannot be replaced by the 
 Ablative of the second member of the com- 
 parison unless the first member of the com- 
 parison is in the Nominative or Accusative. 
 
 63. 'Than/ followed by a new Verb. If the second 
 Noun is connected with a different Verb from the first, 
 the new Verb is generally inserted, and the second Noun 
 put in the necessary case. 
 
 Such conduct would have Talia sapientiori placuis- 
 pleased a wiser man sent homini quam tune 
 
 THAN Balbus was then erat Balbus 
 
 When the first Noun is in the Accusative, the new Verb is sometimes 
 omitted, and the second Noun is attracted into the same case as the first, 
 e.g, ' Ego hominem callidiorem vidi neminem quam !B album.' 
 
 If the instrumental force of the Ablative is kept in mind, 
 the reason for the following caution will be evident : 
 
 N.B. Take care not to use the Ablative instead of 
 'quam' where the Adjective does not qualify either 
 
 member of the comparison, e.g. ' He has a taller horse 
 than I.' Here '/' cannot be regarded as the instrument 
 of comparison ; it is not *// but ' my horse ' that makes 
 his horse appear taller. Hence : 
 
 He has a taller ) I Equum habet altiorem 
 
 horse than \ MINE Ui) quam ego (habeo) 
 ( (2) meo 
 
Par. 64.] SEQUENCE OF TENSES. 75 
 
 ' More than a hundred* might be rendered by * a hun- 
 dred and more? This construction is common in Latin, 
 and in it the comparison does not affect the case of the 
 Numeral Adjective. Plus in piusquam (as well as am- 
 piius) is thus adverbially used. 
 
 MORE THAN two hundred Ducenti (et) amplius capti 
 were captured sunt 
 
 / see the names of MORE Nomina video plus quam 
 THAN five hundred of quingentorum civiuxn 
 
 my countrymen 
 
 64-. Sequence of Tenses. Before entering on the other 
 Subordinate Conjunctions, it will be well to explain the 
 rule that will regulate the Tenses following these Con- 
 junctions. In subordinate sentences the Tense of the 
 subordinate Latin Verb is dependent on the Tense of the 
 principal Verb, e.g. : 
 
 ut illi 
 
 am making 
 make 
 
 Rogo 
 
 
 have made 
 
 
 
 have * been making 
 shall, will be making 
 shall, will make 
 
 Rogavi 
 Rogabo 
 
 f 
 
 shall have made Rogavero 
 
 / 
 
 \ 
 
 
 a request that HE MAY ignoscatur 
 
 BE PARDONED 
 
 
 was making } C Rogabam ) 
 
 utim 
 
 ( had*beenmaking } { Rogaveram } 
 
 that he MIGHT BE PAR- ignosceretur 
 
 DONED 
 
 So far, the Rule in Latin is evident. Like follows Like. 
 The Future and Present Tenses (for rogavi, when mean- 
 ing ' I have asked/ means ' I have something asked/ and 
 is therefore a Complete Present Tense) are followed by 
 
 * See Paragraph n. 
 
76 SEQUENCE OF TENSES. [Par. 64. 
 
 the Present Subjunctive, and the Past Tenses by the 
 Past Subjunctive. Of course, in an English dependent 
 sentence, e.g. in a sentence following ' I ask whether/ we 
 use, according to the sense, ;>, was, or has been. But now 
 note the Latin equivalent : 
 
 am asking 
 
 ask 
 
 have asked 
 
 have been asking 
 
 shall be asking 
 
 shall ask 
 
 shall have asked 
 
 ( is present 
 
 whether /ie < was present \ . . XT -Q 
 
 { has been present ] adftte t N.B. 
 
 ' was asking Rogabam } 
 
 > 
 
 had been asking \ Rogaveram ^ 
 
 ( is present (now) ) desset 
 
 whether he < was present (yesterday) \ 
 
 ( had been present adfuisset 
 
 N.B. Note that above, ' whether he was present* and 
 ' whether he has been present] are both expressed in Latin 
 by ' utrum adfuerit/ This is a necessary and inconvenient 
 consequence of the Latin Law of Sequence, which is 
 so strict that it sometimes produces great ambiguity. 
 Thus : 
 
 / have asked whether he Rogavi utrum veneriv 
 CAME 
 
 Here it is impossible to tell from the Latin, whether he 
 came, or he has come, is the correct translation. But 
 the Latins cannot help this. If they had written veniret 
 above, ' rogavi utrum veniret/ then, since rogavi means 
 both / asked and / have asked, we should naturally render 
 
Par. 66.] SUBORDINATE CONJUNCTIONS. 77 
 
 the sentence, not * I have asked whether he came/ but * / 
 asked whether he came.' This is a serious deficiency arising 
 from the poverty of the Latin language in respect of 7enses : 
 for they have nothing but rogavi to render our two tenses, 
 asked and have asked. 
 
 I will ask why he CAME Interrogabo cur venerit 
 
 Dorft you know the esteem in Nescisne quanto in honore 
 which HE WAS HELD ? fuerit ? 
 
 Apparent exception to Sequence of Tenses. In a conditional 
 sentence ' if I had come, what would you have done ? ' the Pluperfect Sub- 
 junctive is used in both cases ; and, even when the sentence depends upon a 
 Present Tense ' I know/ the Pluperfect in the Protasis 'si venissem' is 
 retained. For the Tense depends upon the nature of the condition, and not 
 on the tense of the Principal Verb. But the Pluperfect in the Apodosis is 
 changed, according to the Rule of Sequence, ' Scio quid facturus fueris 
 si v< nissem/ ' I know what yjou would have done, if I had come,' where the 
 condition is expressed by the Future Participle. 
 
 65. Subordinate Conjunctions. (l) time : after (that), 
 before (that), now that, since, until, when, while ; (2) cir- 
 cumstance : whereas, while; (3) reason: as, in that, 
 because, inasmuch as, seeing that ; (4) condition : if, pro- 
 vided that, supposing, whether, although, how ever, unless; 
 
 (5) result : so as, so that, in such a way, manner, 6r*c. that; 
 
 (6) purpose : in order that, so that, to the intent that, lest. 
 The above list includes only those of the Prepositional 
 
 Conjunctions that are followed by a Subject and a Tense 
 of the Verb, e.g. ' before he came/ But practically many 
 other Prepositions are Conjunctions though only used 
 with Verbals or (in the case of to) with an Infinitive : 
 (i) circumstance : besides, instead of, without; (2) instru- 
 ment : by, of; (3) reason, cause : for, on ; (4) condition . 
 in spite of; (5) purpose : to, from. 
 
 66. Time. It will be seen that the Latins are forced to 
 supply their weakness in Prepositional and other Con- 
 junctions, and also in Verbals, by using their strength in 
 Moods. In this way the same Conjunction, e.g. quum, 
 may be used, (i) to denote time with the Indicative, (2) 
 
78 CONJUNCTIONS OF TIME. [Par. 66 
 
 to denote thought (whether it be (i) cause, ' since/ or (2) suc- 
 cession, with notion of consequence 'upon/ or (3) contrast, 
 ' though/ ' whereas ') with the Subjunctive. 
 
 SINCE this is so, what in Quag quum ita sint, quid- 
 the world will yoti do ? nam facies ? 
 
 WHEN / used to live at Quum Athenis agebam, 
 Athens, I used to attend Balbum audiebam 
 
 Balbus* lectures 
 
 N.B. In narrating the past, when we mention one 
 event as occurring simultaneously with the occurrence or 
 completion of another event, we generally imply some 
 further connection than at the time when, e.g. ' when he 
 heard this, he fled/ Here there is a thought, viz. that 
 the flight was a consequence of hearing. Such a sentence 
 would be rendered in Latin ' Quse (juum audivisset.' 
 
 Rule ' Quum ' with the Imperfect and 
 Pluperfect generally takes the Subjunctive. 
 
 After (that), postquam. In English when we use after 
 for when, we generally desire to express that the first 
 action is completed before the second begins, e.g. * when 
 he heard me/ but ' after he had heard me/ The Latins, 
 on the contrary, generally use, in this sense, the Pluperf. 
 Subj. with quum, and the Perf. Ind. with postquam. 
 
 Rule Postquam ' takes the Perfect, un- 
 less the interval is expressed or emphatically 
 implied. 
 
 AFTER the rebellion HAD Postquam seditio compres- 
 BEEN PUT DOWN he re- sa est Romam rediit 
 
 turned to Rome 
 
 Ten years AFTER the rebel- Decimo anno postquam se- 
 lion HAD BEEN put ditio compressa erat, 
 
 down, he &c. &c. 
 
 As (i) postquam is generally used of time without ex- 
 pressing thought, it is followed by the Indicative. Else, use 
 
Par. 66.] CONJUNCTIONS OF TIME. 79 
 
 (2) quum with Subjunctive, or (3) the Ablative Absolute,* 
 'seditione coxnpressa/ or (4) post governing a Noun 
 qualified by a Participle or by some word used as a 
 Participle, 'post seditionem compressam/ ' post Tullium 
 consulem.' 
 
 Before (that), antequam, priusquam, donee (like post- 
 qaam) take the Perfect where we often use the Pluperfect. 
 But they differ from postquam in that they are often used 
 with the Subjunctive to imply * thought ' as well as se- 
 quence. 
 
 Rule ' Antequam,' priusquam,' ' dum,' 
 ' donee,' and ' quoad,' are followed by the 
 Subjunctive when design is implied, or when 
 an action is referred to that has not actually 
 commenced. 
 
 They retired (on purpose} Ante sese receperunt quam 
 BEFORE the city was urbs caperetur 
 
 (could be) captured 
 
 Note also the logical use of the Future in Latin 
 (see Paragraph n) : 
 
 BEFORE / see you Antequam te videbo or vi- 
 
 dero 
 
 Before is sometimes expressed by an Ablative Absolute 
 with nondum, e.g. ' nondum urbe condita,' or by ante 
 governing a Noun qualified by a Participle, ' ante urbem 
 conditam.' The following sentences illustrate the Latin 
 rendering of English Conjunctions of time : 
 
 Now THAT he had arrived Turn vero adolescens,qtmm 
 at Rome the young man Romam venisset, omnia 
 
 felt sure of success spe praesumebat (Notion 
 
 of cause) 
 
 * The Ablative, Denoting some circumstance, something with which an 
 action takes place, seems naturally used in this way. 
 
8o 
 
 CONJUNCTIONS OF TIME. [Par. 66. 
 
 SINCE we began our jour- 
 ney we have not seen 
 a man 
 
 SINCE we began our jour- 
 ney we have seen two 
 hundred men 
 
 UNTIL 7 (FACT) came to 
 Rome, I thought every 
 Roman a knave 
 
 UNTIL 7 (POSSIBILITY) am 
 deceived, I shall treat 
 him as though he were 
 honest 
 
 I shall NOT believe you 
 UNTIL you Mep your 
 word 
 
 Ex quo tempore profecti 
 sumus ne unum quidem 
 hominem vidimus 
 
 Postquam profecti sumus, 
 homines ducentos vidi- 
 mus 
 
 Donee (pr antequaxn) Ro- 
 
 mam veni, Romanes 
 omnes veteratores esse 
 duxi 
 
 Hominem, donee me dece- 
 perit, tanquam probum 
 habebo 
 
 Quum promissa servabis, 
 turn demum tibi credam 
 
 WHEN, see the beginning of the Paragraph. 
 
 WHILE this was going on, 
 the enemy fled 
 
 WHILE HEADING a charge, 
 he fell 
 
 Dum haec geruntur (not 
 gerebantur) hostes ter- 
 ga dederunt (Par. n) 
 
 Dum pugnam princeps 
 ciet, occidit. (Or ciens 
 rarely ; but never dum 
 ciens. See Par. yo.) 
 
 The sequence of events is sometimes expressed in 
 English by the Present Participle of the Verb have. 
 ' Having finished this, i.e. having this finished, I shall 
 return/ This is rendered in Latin by the Pass. Part. 
 Abl. Absolute, ' his auditis,' or by a Conjunction. 
 
 N.B. With Intransitive Verbs, the Ablative Absolute 
 cannot be used : ' Having* now settled here, I don't in- 
 tend to move.' 'Quoniam hie jam consedi, migrare 
 nolo.' 
 
Par. 68.] CONJUNCTIONS OF REASON. 8l 
 
 None but the Deponent Participles can render the 
 English Participle with having, e.g. * hailing said this he 
 departed/ ' hasc locutus abiit/ 
 
 Examples: Adeptus, amplexus, arbitratus, ausus, exper- 
 tus, functus, hortatus, mortuus, nactus, oblitus, ortus, 
 passus, questus, ratus, solitus, testatus, ultus, usus. 
 
 67. Conjunctions of circumstance. 
 
 We say virtue is the chief Virtu tern nos quidem. vos 
 
 object of life, WHEREAS autem voiuptatcm sum- 
 
 or WHiLE you say plea- mum bonum esse dicitis 
 sure is 
 
 N.B. Distinguish this use of while from the temporal 
 use. Autem is often omitted. 
 
 // is unjust that this should Injustum est hoc vobis con- 
 be granted to you WHILE cedi, negari nobis 
 
 it is refused to us 
 
 68. Conjunctions of reason are followed by the In- 
 dicative, if prominence is given to the truth of the fact 
 on which some statement is based. 
 
 AS you have promised^ you Tu, qnoniam promisisti, 
 
 must keep your word fidem prasstare debes 
 
 \KTSLXXyoudiditkn0w- Quod (or Tu qui) sciens 
 
 ingly, your crime is fecisti, gravius quam 
 
 worse than that of the ceteri, peccavisti 
 rest 
 
 N.B. When we put not before because, the Verb 
 following not because very often expresses something that 
 is not a. fact. Hence : 
 
 / do this, not BECAUSE ifs Hoc facio, non quod ju- 
 pleasant, but BECAUSE cundum sit, sed qnia 
 
 it's right honestum est 
 
 But, even where fact is expressed, the Subjunctive is 
 used, if there is a thought, e.g. of cause : 
 
 G 
 
82 CONJUNCTIONS OF CONDITION. [Par. 69. 
 
 INASMUCH AS (SEEING Tu, quum (or qui) nostri 
 
 THAT, SINCE) you do non miser ear is, non 
 
 not pity us \ you cannot sperare debes fore ut 
 
 expect us to pity you tui misereamur. 
 
 / ought to be grateful INAS- Debeo gratus esse, ut qui 
 
 MUCH AS / have re- multa ab illo beneficia 
 
 edited many benefits acceperim 
 from him 
 
 SINCE this is so, why do we Quae quum ita sint, cur 
 delay ? moramur ? 
 
 69. Conjunctions of condition. 
 
 In a language that, like Latin, has distinct Moods 
 to denote fact and not fact, si, when followed by the 
 Present or Past Tense of the Indicative, loses the exact 
 notion of condition, and must mean either (i) when, as in 
 ' si quando vidit ' or (2) ' assuming, for a moment, as a 
 fact/ e.g. ' Si nihil aliud fecerunt, satis praemii habent.' 
 So ' si Deus mundum creavit,' ' assuming that God created 
 the world.' 
 
 This (2) use of the Indicative leaves it an open question 
 whether, in the writer's opinion, the Verb expresses a. fact 
 or not. The Subjunctive distinctly expresses what is not 
 fact, though it may be hereafter fact : that is to say, the 
 Subjunctive after si expresses what is genuinely, and the 
 Indicative Past and Present after si what is fictitiously, 
 conditional. 
 
 The following are genuine conditional sentences : 
 
 IF* / (shall find that 7) Si quid habebo,dabo. (Note 
 HAVE anything, I will the English weakness, 
 
 give it have being used both 
 
 for Future and Present) 
 
 Should I have (or, if I were Si quid habeam, dem 
 to have, or, if I had, 
 which is possible] any- 
 thing, I would give it 
 
 * #"in ' I don't know if ' means whether. See 53. 
 
Par. 69.] CONDITIONAL SENTENCES. 83 
 
 IF 7 had anything (which Si quid haberem, darem 
 
 / have not, and cannot 
 have] I would give it 
 
 IF / had had anything, I Si quid habuissem, dedis- 
 ivould have given it Bern. (Or, graphically, 
 
 dederam) 
 
 Rule In conditional sentences, ' si ' with 
 the Past Tenses of the Subjunctive is used 
 to denote an impossible, * si ' with the Pre- 
 sent Tenses, to denote a possible, condition. 
 
 Sometimes the thought is changed from sequence to 
 consequence, in which case the Verb is changed in the 
 Apodosis,* from the Future to the Present Subjunctive, 
 e.g. ' Si quid habebo, dem/ * if I have anything, I will, 
 or rather, I would, give it ' But this is not common ex- 
 cept in silver Latin. And : 
 
 Rule The Subjunctives in the Protasis 
 and the Apodosis, must be both Present or 
 both Past.f 
 
 IF NOT : see Paragraph 70. 
 
 You will succeed, PROVI- Rem perficies dummodo (or 
 DED THATyvu do your modo si or modo) pro 
 
 best virili a gas 
 
 SUPPOSING 7-#tf7/ a dagger, Pac me sicam habere; non 
 // does not follow that sum continue sicarius 
 
 Pm an assassin (or Etiam si sicam ha- 
 
 beo, assuming it as a 
 
 fact] 
 
 A condition can also be expressed by a Participle or 
 Ablative Absolute, provided there is no ambiguity. 
 
 * The * ir clause is called the Antecedent or Protasis ; the clause contain- 
 ing the consequence is called the Consequent or Aflodosis. 
 
 t The Impelled may correspond to the Pluperfect), e.g. * tu, si mini 
 paruisses, non mine Romae esses ' : but you could not have ' pareas, 
 esses/ 'pareres, sis.' 
 
 G 2 
 
84 ' THOUGH: [Par. 69. 
 
 IF you take the city in three Quid igitur deinde fades, 
 months, what will you urbe tribus his mensibus 
 
 do then ? capta ? 
 
 But if ' tribus his mensibus ' were removed, the mean- 
 ing might be ' since you have taken the city/ 
 
 Though (O.K. theali) is connected with the, that; and 
 calls, attention to a condition or circumstance ' even in 
 the (case that).' The close connection between the 
 Demonstrative and Relative (the was once the English 
 Relative, as that now is) makes it not surprising that 
 though, i.e. in-the, or al-though, i.e. even in the, should be 
 rendered in Latin by quanquam (quam-quam), or quam- 
 vis, both emphatic forms of quam, in the way in which, or 
 in what way. Quanquam often refers to facts, ' quanquam 
 iratus est/ ' although he is angry ; ' quamvis (in the best 
 prose) means however much, and does not refer to a 
 definite fact. Hence : 
 
 Rule * Quanquam ' generally takes the 
 Indicative, ' quamvis ' never (in good Prose). 
 
 Rule Quamvis ' is often used with Ad- 
 jectives, without a Verb : 
 
 Pray be silent, however Quamvis iratus, cura ut 
 angry you may be taceas 
 
 Though often implies that something does not exist in 
 the way in which it might be expected to. Hence : 
 
 THOUGH he is brave, hes Homo est, ut fortis, ita non 
 not very clever admodum acutus (In 
 
 the way wherein, or 
 whereas, he's brave, 
 
 The same sentence might be expressed thus, 'He is 
 brave, but in such a way that he's not clever/ ' Ita fortis 
 cet ut tamen non acutus sit.' 
 
 THOUGH this is useful, It is Hoc est ita utile ut hones- 
 not right turn non sit 
 
Par. 69.] * UNLESS* ' WHETHER? 85 
 
 Though ) used parenthetically for yet, but, is quanquam. 
 
 THOUGH, why do I waste Quanqnam, cur querendo 
 time in complaining f tempus tero ? 
 
 Unless, if . . . . not, nisi : rarely si non, unless the si 
 and non are separated. Nisi follows the same rule as si. 
 See above. 
 
 * Not .... unless ' is sometimes represented in Latin 
 by ' ita . . . . si/ i.e. * only on this condition ....if.' 
 
 I shall not forgive you UN- Ego, hac lege (^rita)tibi, 
 LESS you forgive him si tu illi, ignoveris 
 
 UNLESS you agree in your Quod si eadem velitis, turn 
 wishes, you cannot be demum amicitiam possi- 
 
 fr tends tis conjungere. (Then 
 
 and not till then) 
 
 Whether (which of two] is often equivalent in English 
 to if on the one hand. ' Whether (i.e. whichever of two 
 things we do) we rejoice or sorrow, we shall always re- 
 member you/ This is ren'dered in Latin by sive, if either, 
 ' Nos, sive gaudebimus, sive (or sen) dolebimus, tui 
 nunquam obliviscemur.' 
 
 N.B. Carefully distinguish Between whether meaning 
 whichever of two things, sive, and whether following a 
 Verb, e.g. r ne asked/ and meaning which of two things, 
 i.e. utrum. (See Paragraph 51.) 
 
 The principal danger of confusing the two meanings of whether is, when 
 whether means sive, but is placed after the principal sentence, e.g. ' I am 
 not much annoyed, whether this be true or false.' 
 
 N.B. Note here that, though in English we sometimes 
 use be after whether, the Latins, as in the last example, 
 use the Indicative. The reason is that nothing is imp lied 
 as to the possible incorrectness of the suppositions : the 
 meaning is ' assuming it to be true, or assuming it to be 
 false, and I'm not just now concerned with the question 
 whether it is true or false/ 
 
86 WHEN A BOY: [Par. 70. 
 
 70. English Ellipsis of Verb after Conjunctions. We 
 have seen that quainvis can be used Adverbially to 
 qualify an Adjective or Participle. In English a great 
 number of Conjunctions are thus used, 'while walking ' for 
 6 while he was walking/ So, ' when young/ ' though 
 hot-tempered/ ' if true/ This ellipsis is rare in Latin. 
 Insert the Verb, e.g. ' when he was young/ or turn the 
 sentence by an appositional Noun, or by a qualifying 
 Participle, or otherwise : 
 
 WHILE WALKING he fell Ambulans, dum ambulat, 
 
 cecidit 
 
 WHEN A BOY Balbus was Baibus puer Athenas mis- 
 sent to Athens sus est 
 
 He is frivolous, IF NOT Homo levis est, nedum (or 
 immoral ne dicam) improbus 
 
 71. Conjunctions of result. Even in English we some- 
 times express result (even though it is z.fact] not as &fact, 
 but as a consequence, in the Infinitive. ' The walls were 
 so battered as to be no longer tenable.' The Latins, 
 having their Subjunctive, express a result by that Mood, 
 preceded by ut, in which way, quut, quo(d), old Abl. of 
 qui. Sometimes ut is preceded by ita, in that way. 
 
 N.B. This construction* is used even after verbs of 
 happening, the notion perhaps being ' things happened in 
 such a way that, &^c. } e.g. ( It happened once that the 
 house was set on fire/ * Forte accidit ut aedes incen- 
 derentur. 3 
 
 72. Conjunctions of purpose. Purpose is expressed in 
 Latin by (i) ut with the Subjunctive, (2) ad with the 
 Gerund or Gerundive, and, more rarely, (3) causa pre- 
 ceded by the Gerund or Gerundive, and (4) the Fut. 
 Part. Active; also, after Verbs of Motion by (5) the 
 Supine, e.g. ' venio visum urbem/ where visum is really 
 a Verbal Noun placed in the Ace. after venio (like 
 rus, domum), and itself governing an Accusative. 
 
 * When using it, observe the Sequence of Tenses, 64. 
 
Par. 73.] CONJUNCTIONS OF PURPOSE. 87 
 
 N.B. In Construction (i), which is by far the most 
 common, be careful to observe the Sequence of Tenses. 
 
 / have come THAT / may Veni (i) ut capiam, (2) ad 
 take the city capiendam, (3) capiendi 
 
 causa, (4) capturus, 
 (5) cap turn, urbem 
 
 We have seen above (Paragraph 45) that the Latins 
 like to give prominence to a Negative, e.g. nisi for if . . . 
 ;/(>/. In the same way: 
 
 Rule ' That . . . not ' denoting purpose is 
 generally represented by ' ne,' or more rarely 
 ' ut . . . ne ' : and so, instead of ' ut nemo,' 
 you should write ' ne quis ' ; instead of ' ut 
 nunquam,' ne quando.' * 
 
 O that / is rendered in Latin by ntinam, * (I desire) 
 that indeed, &c.> e.g. 'utinam veniat/ ' (I desire) that he 
 may indeed come. 7 Wishes about the past are useless. 
 Hence * 
 
 Rule* Utinam ' with the Present Sub- 
 junctive introduces wishes that can be, with 
 the Past Subjunctive, wishes that cannot be, 
 realized. 
 
 73. ' To/ various meanings of. To presents many 
 difficulties to the beginner. Take for example, ' I eat to 
 live/ Here * to live ' is not a Present Infinitive by deri- 
 vation. It used to be ' to livene/ where to meant toward, 
 and livene (living] was a Gerund, e.g. * I eat to live y = 
 * I eat toward living! Hence : 
 
 Rule Whenever ' to ' before a verb de- 
 notes purpose, it is not to be translated by 
 the'Latin Infinitive. 
 
 ' This applies only to that followed by may, ini%ht, anddenoting/wr/os*. 
 
88 TO.' [Par. 73. 
 
 ( virendi causa 
 
 / eat TO LIVE Vescor < ut vivam 
 
 ( ad vivendum 
 
 / come TO SEE Venio < v ^ sum 
 
 ( visurua 
 
 When therefore is to live to be rendered vivere ? Only 
 when * to live is really a Noun and means living, as : 
 
 7 should like TO LIVE Velim vivere 
 
 To LIVE is pleasant Vivere jucundum est 
 
 Now take ' I promise to come? That means ' I promise 
 coming? Yes, but the coming is future ; and though we 
 have no Future Participle, the Latins have, and can say 
 ' I promise myself to be about to come? 
 
 Rule After ' I hope,' ' I promise,' turn 
 * to ' by the Latin Future Participle Active. 
 
 / promise, hope, to come Promitto, spero, me ven- 
 
 turtun 
 
 ( Statuo, in animo mihi est, 
 / determine, propose, to 1 venire 
 
 come j But also, Constituo me 
 
 ( venfrurum 
 
 N.B. * I hope that it is so ' = ' spero rem ita se habere.' 
 
 Sometimes, where to conveys to our ears no distinct 
 notion of purpose, nor of consequence, the Latins seem to 
 find the notion : 
 
 / determine TO (IN SUCH A Constituo ut vemam 
 WAY that I may} come 
 
 * Here the to is redundant, improperly added as the sign of the Inf. To, 
 In Early English, was used like ad in Latin, before the Gerund. The simi- 
 larity of the Inf. liven, to the Gerund livene (which was a Dative form) 
 caused the two to be confused ; and, inflections being lost, the to was impro- 
 perly transferred to the Inf., even when there was no notion of purpose. 
 
Par. 73-] 'TO.' 89 
 
 TJie best kind of worship is Cultus deorum optimus est 
 
 TO worship (such that nt eos pura mente vene- 
 
 we worship) God with remur 
 purity of mind 
 
 It is the way with men TO Mos est hominum tit 
 envy their superiors superioribus invideant. 
 
 (Their custom is such 
 that, frc.) 
 
 ' I happened to see him ' seems to be a confusion be- 
 tween * / happened, happed, or lighted on seeing him/ and 
 ' it happened to me to see him/ The Latins use the latter 
 construction with nt, 'contigit mini ut hominem viderem.' 
 
 Rule Use ' ut ' after ' contingit,' ' accidit,' 
 ' evenit,' ' fit/ &c. 
 
 N.B. After verbs of asking, commanding, advising, 
 and striving, to is rendered by nt with the Subjunc- 
 tive. It is easy to see that, in ' I command you to go/ to 
 go may be regarded as independent of what precedes, and 
 as equivalent to ' in order that you may go/ ' impero tibi 
 nt eas ' ; or else you-to-go may be regarded as an Objec- 
 tive clause, * your going,' after* / command/ 'jubeo te 
 ire. 1 Hence : 
 
 Rule 
 
 With ask, command, advise and strive, 
 By ut translate Infinitive ; 
 But not so after jubeo, nor 
 After the Verb Deponent conor. 
 
 To after an Adjective modified by enough, e.g. not 
 good enough, or after Jit, worthy, conveys a notion of 
 purpose or result, and may therefore be rendered by nt 
 or by qni (i.e. nt is) with the Subjunctive. 
 
 He is not fit for you TO Non dignus est qnocnm 
 converse with (i.e. nt cum CD) collo- 
 
 quaris 
 
90 ' TO.' [Par. 73. 
 
 The Adjective is sometimes implied in the : 
 
 Iamnotthe(SMiTA'BU)man Non is sum qui (ut ego) 
 TO commit such a fault hanc culpam admittam 
 
 To denoting purpose and following the Object * of a 
 Transitive Verb, is often rendered by the Relative fol- 
 lowed by the Subjunctive. 
 
 / sent men TO ask for Misi (homines) qui (i.e. ut 
 peace ii) pacem peterent 
 
 To after too is expressed, in Latin, by a periphrasis. 
 * He is too kind to hate' means 'for the purpose of 
 hating, he is too kind/ But the expression is slovenly 
 and liable to ambiguity. What is the meaning of : 
 
 1 Too fond to rule alone ' ? PoPE.t 
 
 It might mean l too foolishly affectionate to rule alone/ 
 but it is intended to mean 'too fond of ruling.' To 
 avoid the ambiguity that might attend such sentences 
 as ' nimis clemens est ut irascatur or ad irascendum,' the 
 Latins say, ' he is kinder than that he could (or, than a 
 man that could) be angry/ * Clementior est quanx ut or 
 quam qui possit odisse/ 
 
 They came too late TO be of Serius advenere quam qui 
 any use possent prodesse 
 
 To often means ' as regards' ' in (i) ' He was the first 
 to] (2) ( I am glad to} ' I am sorry to} &c. In (i) is, was, 
 &c. is inserted for emphasis in English, but is not required 
 in Latin. In (2) to is rendered by quod, or sometimes, as 
 
 * The Object is sometimes understood in Latin. 
 t Compare 
 
 ' but, for a calm unfit, 
 Would steer too nigh the sands to boast his wit.' 
 
 DRYDKN. 
 
 J ' To sue to live, I find I seek to die, 
 
 And seeking death find life.' 
 
 Measure for Measure, iii. i . 43. 
 
 Here, to sue means in suing % and corresponds to seeking.- Shakespturian 
 Grammar, Paragraph 357. 
 
Par. 74.] PRESENT PARTICIPLE. 91 
 
 in (i), the English Infinitive becomes the Latin principal 
 
 Verb. 
 
 Cato was the first TO speak Cato primus dixit 
 
 / was glad TO find that Gaudebam quod te intcllexi 
 
 you were in good bene valere, or, libenter 
 
 health intellexi 
 
 To also means as regards or in, after shameful, wonder- 
 ful, incredible, easy, pleasant, honourable, and is sometimes 
 rendered by the so-calied Passive Supine, e.g. * mirabile 
 dictu/ ' wonderful ///-the- say ing.' 
 
 Dictu, factu, sustain, auditu, cognitu, visu, inventu, 
 
 and others are thus used. 
 
 74-. The English Present Participle often expresses 
 more than mere simultaneousness, and therefore can- 
 not often be rendered by the Latin Present Participle. 
 It often implies some Conjunction ; but what Conjunction 
 is implied, it is not always easy to determine. The loose 
 and ambiguous use of the Present Participle is a detect in 
 English. 
 
 N.B. The meaning of the Participle must be deter- 
 mined by the context. When the Principal Verb is in 
 the Past or Present Tense, the Participle often means 
 'although' or 'since' ; when the Principal Verb is in the 
 Future Tense, the Participle often means ' if.' This also 
 applies to Verbals preceded by Prepositions : see Par. 75. 
 
 KNOWING (SINCE YOU Quae quum scias cur plura 
 
 KNOW) this, why do you quaeris ? 
 
 ask more questions ? 
 
 KNOWING (ALTHOUGH HE Quamvis sciret id vetitum 
 
 KNEW) that it had been esse, ausus est tamen 
 
 forbidden, he neverthe- venire 
 
 less ventured to come 
 
 FINDING (AS SOON AS, or, Hie simui atque (or si 
 
 IF he finds] that he is mo do) intellexerit se 
 
 unwelcome, he will haud expectatum venire, 
 
 return redibit 
 
92 VERBALS. [Par. 75. 
 
 Sciens would mean simply ' in the state of knowing/ or 
 ' at the time of knowing.' 
 
 The Relative is often to be supplied before a Participle 
 in English, e.g. ' the soldiers, (that were) remaining in the 
 town, as well as those (that were) encamped outside.' This 
 Relative must be expressed in Latin. (See Par. 58.) 
 
 75. The English Verbal gives great flexibility to our 
 language. It is a great advantage to be able, by merely 
 affixing -ing, to construct an abstract Noun out of any 
 Verb. The English Verbals have very few corresponding 
 Latin Verbals, e.g. tactus, touching; auditus, equitatio 
 (Pliny). 
 
 When the English Verbal is the Subject or Object, it 
 is often equivalent to an Infinitive : 
 
 WALKING is healthier; but Quamvis ambulare mihi 
 I prefer RIDING plus prosit, malo tamen 
 
 equitare 
 
 We cannot say (though Shakespeare could), l the taking 
 a city. 7 Why not ? Because the, to our ears, converts the 
 Verbal into a mere Noun, requiring of after it. In the 
 same way the Latins could not say ' venio ad visum urbem,' 
 because the ad made visum too much like a Noun. They 
 therefore omitted ad. For the same reason they did not 
 like to say ' ad videndum urbem.' But in this case, instead 
 of omitting ad to retain the Verbal force of videndum, 
 they retain ad and change videndum into the Adjective 
 videndam. 
 
 When the Gerund is governed, not by a Preposition, 
 but by a Noun, eg. l consilium videndi,' the Genitive 
 (which may be either Possessive or Objective) does not, 
 like a Preposition, Nounify the Gerund so as to prevent 
 it from having its Verbal force. We can therefore write 
 either ' urbem videndi, or urbis videndse consilium.' 
 
 Rule After Prepositions, if the Verb has 
 an Object, use the Gerundive and not the 
 Gerund, e.g. 'in victore (not -em) laudando.' 
 
Par. 75J 
 
 VERBALS. 
 
 93 
 
 The Gerund (or Gerundive, if combined with a Substan- 
 tive) follows ad, for; de, concerning; in, in ; ob, on ac- 
 count of; rarely inter, and other Prepositions. 
 
 Note the different renderings of the same Preposition 
 and Verbal, varying with the difference of Tense in the 
 principal Verb. 
 
 Verbals after Prepositions. 
 
 I have no doubt ABOUT your 
 
 RECOVERING 
 
 Write to him ABOUT PAR- 
 DONING the prisoners 
 
 AS TO FORGIVING him, I 
 shall do no such thing 
 
 I am surprised AT your 
 
 OBJECTING 
 
 He's clever AT FINDING 
 weak points 
 
 BESIDES SINGING she can 
 dance 
 
 What do you mean BY 
 
 THREATENING me / 
 
 BY BREAKING down the 
 
 bridge, he cut off the 
 supplies of the enemy 
 
 BY GETTING up early, I ex- 
 pect to finish my work 
 
 One gains style BY READING 
 speeches and poems 
 
 BY PERSEVERING he won 
 
 DURING the BUILDING of 
 the bridge 
 
 Non dubito quin futurum 
 sit ut convalescas 
 
 Fac scribas homini de venia 
 captivis danda 
 
 Quod me rogas (rogant) ut 
 ignoscam homini, omni- 
 no non faciam 
 
 Miror quod adversaris 
 
 Satis acutus est in investi- 
 gandis erroribus 
 
 Mulier non solum canit sed 
 
 eciam saltare didicit 
 
 Quid vis quod mihi haec 
 minaris ? 
 
 Ponte rescisso hostem a 
 commeatu interclusit 
 
 Si prima luce surrexero, 
 spero me opus perfectu- 
 rum 
 
 Elegantia loquendi legen- 
 dis oratoribus et poetis 
 
 augetur 
 
 Perseverando vicit 
 Inter faciendum pontem 
 
94 
 
 VERBALS. [Par. 75. 
 
 / shall punish you FOR 
 DOING this 
 
 Socrates was condemned 
 FOR CORRUPTING, SO 
 
 people said, the young 
 men 
 
 You have no cause FOR 
 
 COMPLAINING 
 
 The ram was useful FOR 
 BATTERING down the 
 wall 
 
 It's a shame to take money 
 FOR GIVING a verdict 
 
 I was deterred by him FROM 
 COMING 
 
 FROM EQUIVOCATING you 
 will come TO LYING 
 
 HOPING is very different 
 
 FROM BELIEVING 
 
 IN KEEPING your word 'you 
 will be consulting your 
 brother's interests 
 
 You are late IN COMING 
 
 IN DOING this I have no 
 object but the good of 
 the country 
 
 Virtue is manifested IN 
 DESPISING pleasure 
 
 IN BLAMING him you blame 
 me 
 
 I am IN FAVOUR OF RE- 
 TREATING 
 
 Te, qui hoc feceris, pcena 
 
 afftciam 
 
 vSocrates darnnatus est quod 
 juventutem corrumperet 
 (Subjunctive expresses 
 ' so people said ') 
 
 Non habes cur queraris 
 
 Aries utilis erat ad muros 
 c onquassandos 
 
 Turpe est pecuniam ob rem 
 judicandam accipere 
 
 Hie me quominus venirem 
 
 deterruit 
 
 ( Tergiversatus mox men- 
 1 tieris 
 
 y Tergiversatio mendacii 
 f parens 
 
 Sperare aliud, aliud et dis- 
 simillimum est credere 
 
 Si fidem prsestiteris \ fratri 
 Fidem prsestando ) con- 
 sules 
 
 Sero venis 
 
 Quod autem hoc facio nul- 
 lam habeo causam prse- 
 ter rei-publicae commo- 
 dum 
 
 In contemnenda voluptate 
 
 virtus cernitur 
 
 Quum ilium culpas, me 
 
 quoque culpas 
 Equidem recedenduxxi esse 
 
 censeo 
 
Par. 75 1 
 
 VERBALS. 
 
 95 
 
 INSTEAD OF CRYING you 
 laugh 
 
 INSTEAD OF CRYING, work 
 
 This comes OF HELPING 
 you 
 
 I am tired OF HEARING 
 the same thing a thou- 
 sand times 
 
 The idea OF your ever IM- 
 PROVING ! 
 
 / despair OF FINDING it 
 
 ITantum abest at lacrime- 
 ris, ut rideas 
 Rides quum debeas lacri- 
 mari 
 
 Age, omissis lacrymis, ten- 
 ta quid possis 
 
 Quod tibi sub venire volul 
 hunc habeo fructum 
 
 Tsedet me eadem miliiens 
 audire 
 
 Tu ut unquam te corrigas ! 
 (i.e. to suppose that, &*<:.) 
 
 Despero me id reperturum 
 esse 
 
 ON HEARING this he 
 blushed 
 
 What will you do ON) 
 HEARING this f | 
 
 He is bent ON MAKING 
 money 
 
 SINCE HEARING from you 
 I found that I was mis- 
 taken 
 
 His auditis ) eru- 
 
 Quae quum audivisset j buit 
 
 \ dem fa- 
 Simulatquehsec / . ? 
 
 intellexeris ) 
 
 Attentus est ad divitias 
 accuxnulandas 
 
 Postquam tuas literas acce- 
 pi, intellexi me errorem 
 fecisse 
 
 SINCE SETTING OUT from 
 home, I have not received 
 one letter 
 
 He failed THROUGH AT- 
 TEMPTING too much 
 
 No one ever sees him WITH- 
 OUT calling him a trai- 
 tor 
 
 Litteras, ex quo tempore 
 
 domo profectus sum, 
 ne singulas quidem ac- 
 cepi 
 
 Ne modica quidem tenuit, 
 quia ad altiora tendebat 
 
 Nemo ilium unquam adspi- 
 cit quin proditorem 
 compellet 
 
96 VERBALS. [Par. 76. 
 
 He speaks well WITHOUT Bene loquitur, neque tamen 
 PERSUADING anybody cuiquam persuadet 
 
 You will make mischief Quamvis imprudens, certa- 
 WITHOUT meaning it mina seres 
 
 / should not have come here Quod nisi mihi hostis fidem 
 WITHOUT obtaining a dedisset tuto me reditu- 
 
 safe condtt-ct rum, nunquam hue ve- 
 
 nissem 
 
 He was condemned WITH- Inauditus damnatus est 
 OUT BEING heard 
 
 WITHOUT openly accusing Ita hominem non accusas 
 him you insinuate char- ut tamen operte insimu- 
 
 ges against him les 
 
 We returned WITHOUT EF- Re infecta, rediimus 
 FECTING anything 
 
 N.B. The Gerundive, e.g. ferendum, means, in Cicero, 
 ' that which is to be, outfit to be, borne/ In later writers, 
 it sometimes means 'that which may be, can be, borne.' 
 But, when preceded by non or vix, ferendum is used even 
 by Cicero, to mean bearable, tolerable. 
 
 76. The Subject of the principal Verb, in a sentence 
 containing a subordinate sentence, should often come first 
 in Latin, where it does not come first in English : 
 
 When THEMISTOCLES had Themistocies, postquam/ 
 secured the safety of Persarum classe deleta, 
 
 Greece by the destruction Graeciam servavit, epis- 
 
 of the Persian fleet, he tolam ad Xerxen misit 
 
 wrote a letter to Xerxes 
 
 Thus the clumsy repetition of he is avoided. 
 
 77. Parentheses. The introduction of a Pronoun may 
 sometimes be avoided, and the unity of the sentence and 
 prominence of the principal Subject may still be preserved, 
 by the use of a parenthesis. This is very commonly used 
 
Par. 7Sa.] ORAT2O OBL1QUA. 97 
 
 to describe some minute circumstance connected with 
 the principal Subject or Object : 
 
 He accordingly %ave orders Itaque suis imperavit ut 
 
 to the whole army to Nuceriain aberat au- 
 
 march to Nuceria. tern fere decem millia 
 
 IT was about ten miles passuum cum omnibus 
 
 off. copiis contenderent. 
 
 If the clause had not been introduced parenthetically, 
 immediately after Nuceria, so as to avoid the possibility 
 of ambiguity, ilia or oppidum would have been of neces- 
 sity inserted. 
 
 78. in Oratio Recta the words of the speaker are used. 
 
 The usual method of introducing a speech in Oratio 
 Recta is to leave the previous sentence unfinished, sup- 
 plying the verb inquit (not dixit nor respondebat) after 
 the first emphatic word of the speech. 
 
 Then Crassus SAID ' / for Turn Crassus ' Equidem ' 
 my part don't believe inquit ' non credo ' 
 
 #' 
 Why not?' /ANSWERED Cui ego 'Quare' inquam 
 
 1 non credis ? ; 
 
 Sometimes inquit is omitted, the previous sentence 
 being still left incomplete. * Turn Crassus " Equidem non 
 credo."' 
 
 78a. In Oratio Obliqua, that must be placed before the 
 English words of the speaker, which are consequently 
 changed in person and tense. Crassus said that he did 
 not believe it. 
 
 The following changes take place in Latin. The first 
 is so obviously necessary that it requires no reason : 
 
 (a) Rule All principal Verbs (that is, 
 Verbs directly making a statement) are trans- 
 formed from the Indicative to the Infinitive, 
 retaining their original Tenses. 
 
 H 
 
9 ORATIO OBLIQUA. [Par. 780. 
 
 (He said) ' I DON'T BE- (Dixit) ' se neque * credere 
 
 LIEVE it, I never DID neque credidisse neque 
 
 believe it, and I never unquam crediturum ' 
 SHALL believe it 9 
 
 Notice that there is no change in Latin to correspond 
 to the English change from the Present in Oratio Recta 
 to the Past in Oratio Obliqua, ' I do not believe/ ' He 
 said that he did not believe.' In Latin the Verbs, 
 though changed in Mood, retain their original Tenses. 
 The Latin language has not the English power of re- 
 presenting the Simple Past after dixit. ' Negavit se cre- 
 didisse ' would mean ' He said that he had not believed] 
 i.e. in Oratio Recta ' I have not believed.' Remember 
 therefore to translate : ' He said that he DID not believe ' by 
 * Negavit se credere/ 
 
 The Future Infinitive does not exist in all Latin Verbs, 
 e.g. not in most Inceptives, such as xnitesco, crebresco, 
 cresco. We must therefore use a periphrasis 
 
 He saict that (IT WOULD Dixit fore ut urbs cresceret 
 COME TO PASS THAT) 
 the city would increase 
 
 Remember that the Passive Future Infinitive, cap turn 
 Iri, means ' that there is a going to capture,' captum being 
 an indeclinable Supine. Consequently captum cannot 
 agree with urbem in : 
 
 He said that the city WOULD Dixit urbem captum iri 
 
 BE TAKEN 
 
 Conditional Tenses of the Apodosis (page 83, note) that 
 are in the Subjunctive in O. Recta, are rendered by the 
 Fut. Partic. with esse or fuisse in O. Obliqua: 
 
 * These words are supposed to come in the middle of a speech at a dis- 
 tance from dixit : if they were close to dijcit, you would have negavit 
 for dixit neque. 
 
Par. ;8a.] 
 
 OJR.ATIO OBLIQUA. 
 
 99 
 
 Oratio Recta. 
 
 Ad hsec Caesar : ' Si ' in- 
 quit 'intra dccimum diem 
 urbem tradidissctis e- 
 quidem ab oppugnandis 
 muris temperavissem ' 
 
 Si modo' inquit 'frater 
 mihi adesset,gauderem' 
 
 ' Si quid ' inquit ' habeam, 
 dem ' 
 
 Oratio Obliqna. 
 Ad hsec Caesar respondit : 
 ' So, si intra decimum 
 diem urbem tradidis- 
 scnt, ab oppugnandis 
 muris temperaturum 
 fuisse ' 
 
 ' Si frater sibi adesset, se 
 gravisurum fuisse.' (Un- 
 fulfilled condition) 
 
 * Se, si quid haberet datu- 
 rum esse.' (Fulfilment 
 of condition possible) 
 
 (b} In the Oratio Obliqua, the writer does not guarantee 
 any statement of the speaker as a fact, and therefore has 
 no right to use the Indicative. Note therefore the fol- 
 lowing changes : 
 
 Oratio Recta. 
 
 Turn alter ' Misi ' inquit 
 1 servos quos habui fide- 
 lissimos ' 
 
 Cui Balbus 'Veniam' inquit 
 1 si potero, quanquam 
 hodie segroto; sin mi- 
 nus, veniet frater, qui 
 decem tantum millia 
 passuum abest ' 
 
 Ille respondens * Si ' in- 
 quit i Cicero occisus 
 erit, omnes moriemur ' 
 
 Oratio Obliqua. 
 
 ' Se misisse servos quos 
 (in his opinion} fidelissi- 
 mos haberet ' 
 
 * Se venturum, si posset, 
 quanquam illo . die 
 eegrotaret; sin minus, 
 venturum fratrem, qui 
 decem tantum millia 
 passuum abesset' 
 
 ' Si Cicero occisus esset, 
 se omnes morituros 
 esse ' 
 
 Rule Subordinate Indicatives, that is, 
 Indicatives following ' qui/ ' quia,' ' quam,' 
 ' etsi,' ' si,' in Oratio 
 into Subjunctives in 
 
 4 quanquam, ' quum, 
 Recta, are changed 
 Oratio Obliqua. 
 
 H 2 
 
loo OR A TIO OBLIQUA. [Par. 780. 
 
 Where qui=et is, nam is, it is sometimes followed by the Infinitive 
 in Oratio Obliqua : thus ' qui abest' in the last example but one, above, might 
 have been rendered in Oratio Obliqua by ' quem (uaxn eum) abesse.' 
 
 Beginners had better not use this licence. 
 
 (c) Put he said that, before an Imperative, e.g. run, 
 licet curras, fac curras. Run will then have to be 
 changed into he ought to run, currendum esse, or he 
 might, shoitld, run (licere ut) curreret, (faciendum esse 
 ut) curreret. Hence : 
 
 The general cried, ' Press on, do not give ground? 
 
 Oratio Recta. Oratio Obliqua. 
 
 Imperator ' Instate ' inquit, Imperator milites hortatur 
 * nolite pedem referre ' (Hist. Pres.) ' Instarent, 
 
 nollent pedem referre/ 
 i.e. ' let them press on.' 
 
 Rule Imperatives in Oratio Recta are to 
 be turned into Imperfect Subjunctives in 
 Oratio Obliqua. 
 
 (d) A question in the Second Person, e.g. ' What are 
 you doing? 7 may naturally become a Dependent Inter- 
 rogative, when preceded by he said, which implies he 
 asked. Thus : 
 
 6 Why are you advancing f 'Curprogrederentur? Cur 
 Why did you not sound non receptui cecinis- 
 
 the retreat ? ' sent ? ' 
 
 Rule Questions in the Second Person 
 are to be rendered in the Oratio Obliqua by 
 the Imperfect or Pluperfect Subjunctive. 
 
 Questions, being asked about oneself, or about an absent person, are very 
 often not asked for information, but to express emotion. They are then 
 called questions of appeal. If 'Why do I delay?' were rendered in 
 Oratio Obliqua ' (Interrogavit) cur moraretur,' it would seem too formal and 
 frigid, as though it were a question really asked for information. Hence the 
 Latins prefer to render such passionate questions by the Infinitive. ' He said 
 fie u'as delaying there (and) why ?' * Cur se morari ? 
 
Par. 780.] O RATIO OBLIQUA. IO1 
 
 ' Why are we lingering * Cur se ibi moraH ? Cur 
 here ? Why is our abesse imperatorem ? ' 
 
 general absent f ' 
 
 The Future Indicative must be rendered by the Future 
 Infinitive : 
 
 'WILL the enemy DELAY ? ' ' Num hostem moratorum 
 
 esse ? ' 
 
 Rule Questions in the First and Third 
 Person are to be rendered in the Oratio 
 Obliqua by the Accusative of the Person, 
 and the Infinitive of the Verb. 
 
 ((') Pronouns, Personal and Demonstrative, together 
 with their derived Adverbs, will usually be changed. 
 
 Of course ego, tu, nos, and vos cannot possibly find a 
 place in Oratio Obliqua ; me must be changed into se, tu 
 into ille, &c. Further, ' I stand here] said he, ' for justice/ 
 will be changed into ' He said that he stood there for 
 justice.' Thus, hie will be changed into me, nunc into 
 tnm, hie (adv.) into ibi ; and hodie would be regularly 
 changed into iilo die. But, for vividness' sake, the de- 
 monstrative forms may sometimes be retained. 
 
 (/) He, him, Ms, are often ambiguous in an English 
 speech reported (as in newspapers) in Oratio Obliqua. The 
 Latin distinction between se and ilium diminishes but 
 does not remove the ambiguity. 
 
 The general rule is that se refers to the speaker, thus : 
 
 ' Let them not distrust his ' Ne de sua vigilant ia du- 
 watchf ulness ' bi tarent ' 
 
 But, when suus is wanted to refer to the Subject of 
 some subordinate Verb, e.g. of dubitarent above, then 
 ipse is sometimes used antithetically to refer to the 
 speaker, thus : 
 
102 
 
 ORATIO OBLIQUA. 
 
 [Par. 780. 
 
 4 Let them not distrust their ' Ne de sua virtute aut de 
 own valour or his ipsius vigilantia de- 
 
 ivatchfulness ' sperarent ' 
 
 At other times, the ipse emphasizes a subordinate Sub- 
 ject to shew that suus, se refer to that Subject, and not to 
 the principal Subject 
 
 He said ' he (the speaker) ' Se monere ilium ut se 
 advised him to save ipse servaret' 
 
 himself 
 
 (g) The sentence preceding a speech in Oratio Obliqua 
 is often completed, and the speech begun with the Verb of 
 speaking implied and not expressed. * Imperator in hunc 
 modum milites hortabatur. " Instarent ; quid morarentur ? 
 Prassto esse victoriam.'" 
 
 The following is an example of the differences between 
 Oratio Recta and Oratio Obliqua : 
 
 Oratio Recta. 
 
 Imperator, milites hortatus 
 ' Instate ' inquit. ' Cur 
 nunc hie xnoramur ? 
 Num hostis morabitur ? 
 Noiite dubitare de ves- 
 tra virtute aut de mea vi- 
 gilantia. Siignavusfnis- 
 sem, vos deseruissem, 
 urbs enim, ut opinor, 
 non facile capietur, ne- 
 que frigoris vismitescet. 
 Sed nolo ignavia vitam 
 emere. Quod impera- 
 torem decuit id perfeci; 
 quod si pro patria. mo- 
 riar, mortem non invitus 
 oppetam' 
 
 Oratio Obliqua. 
 
 Imperator milites in hunc 
 modum hortabatur. 
 ' Instarent. Cur turn 
 se ibi morari ? Num 
 he stem moraturuxn es- 
 se ? N ollent de sua vir- 
 tute aut de ipsius vigi- 
 lantia dubitare. Si ig- 
 navus fuisset, se mos 
 deserturum fuisse : ur- 
 bem enim, (sic se opi- 
 nari) non facile captum 
 iri, neque fore ut frigoris 
 vis xnitesceret. Sed 
 nolle (se) ignavia vitam 
 emere. Quod impera- 
 torem deceret, id se 
 perfecisse : quod si pro 
 patria moreretur, mor 
 . tern non invitum oppe- 
 titurum ' 
 
Par 79.] 
 
 METAPHORS. 
 
 103 
 
 79. Metaphors. 
 
 An English Metaphor, e.g. this thought struck me, need 
 not, and often * cannot, be rightly translated literally into 
 Latin. To say (as Quintilian says) feriit, would mean for- 
 cibly impressed, whereas we wish to convey little more than 
 suggested itself, occurred to me. The right translation 
 would be ' hoc mihi in mentem venit.' 
 
 Many English words and expressions are metaphorical, 
 though we use them so commonly that we have almost 
 forgotten the latent metaphor, e.g. ' at its height} ' on the 
 point of/ ' on the ground that/ * the scene (i.e. stage) of his 
 disgrace/ ' at this juncture, stage? Many other recog- 
 nl2ed Metaphors can be rendered by other Latin Meta- 
 phors, but not literally. 
 
 The pupil must gain, by observation and practice, the 
 power of rightly rendering English Metaphors into Latin. 
 The following are a few instances selected to shew meta- 
 phorical diversity in the two Languages : 
 
 / am being TORTURED and 
 WORN OUT with sor- 
 row 
 
 A II the rest SPRINGS from 
 what has been men- 
 tioned before 
 
 At all hazards, we must 
 make everything SUB- 
 SERVIENT to seeing this 
 poor girl respectably 
 married 
 
 They VENTED their anger 
 on me 
 
 T maintain that there is an 
 INFLUENCE that may be 
 exerted by God on men 
 
 Sensual pleasure, you see, 
 is TRANSITORY 
 
 Lacerat animum atque 
 exest segritudo 
 
 Ex his quae dicta sunt re- 
 liqua nascuntur omnia 
 
 Quoquo modo se habebit, 
 illius misellae et matri- 
 monio et famae servien- 
 dum erit 
 
 In me iram profudenmt 
 
 Dico esse quod a diis ad 
 hominum vitam perma- 
 nare possit 
 
 Fluit igitur volupta^ cor- 
 poris 
 
ro 4 
 
 METAPHORS. 
 
 [Par. 79 
 
 Greece SWARMS 'with ora- 
 tors 
 
 No one can APPROACH 
 Africanus in military 
 distinction 
 
 If it were expediency that 
 KNITS friends, a com- 
 plete change of expe- 
 diency would ?KW them 
 
 When one's anger has 
 
 COOLED 
 The conspiracy is AT ITS 
 
 HEIGHT 
 
 When matters GO ON as we 
 would have them 
 
 Low though the laws are 
 FALLEN, yet they will 
 one day RISE 
 
 / BURY myself in my books 
 
 I AM KILLING TWO BIRDS 
 WITH ONE STONE 
 
 The teaching of Pythagoras 
 HAS SPREAD even here 
 
 Affection SPRINGING from 
 this origin gradually 
 DIFFUSES itself abroad 
 
 Mark what this kind of 
 argument LEADS TO 
 
 The summer was WASTED 
 
 / have been DEEPLY 
 GRIEVED by your two 
 letters 
 
 Redundat Grsecia ora- 
 toribus 
 
 Nemo ad Africanum in 
 militari laude aspirare 
 potest. (Only with 
 negatives classically 
 used in this sense) 
 
 Si utilitas conglutinaret 
 amicos, eadem commu- 
 tata dissolveret 
 
 Res tine tis jam animorum 
 
 incendiis 
 Ardet acerrime conjuratio 
 
 Rebus ad voluntatem nos- 
 tram fluentibus 
 
 Leges, quamvis sint demer- 
 sse, emergent tamen ali- 
 quando 
 
 Literis me involve 
 
 Duos parietes de eadem 
 fidelia dealbo. Or, 
 
 Una mercede duas res 
 assequor 
 
 Hue etiam permanavit Py- 
 thagoras doctrina 
 
 Caritas, hinc nata, serpit 
 sensim foras 
 
 Attende quo serpat hoc ar- 
 
 gumenti genus 
 
 aestas 
 
 Binae tuae literae valde me 
 momorderunt 
 
Par. 79.1 
 
 METAPHORS 
 
 105 
 
 His character had been 
 TAINTED, or rather 
 BLASTED by that con- 
 demnation 
 
 The musician did not TAKE 
 THE FANCY OF the peo- 
 
 ple 
 
 I fear the ATTRACTION of 
 habit may prove too 
 powerful for us 
 
 What a SEA of evils ! 
 
 These reminiscences have 
 a sort of painful STING 
 
 Ex damnatione ilia semius- 
 
 tus, vel potius ambus- 
 
 tus evaserat 
 
 Tibicen frigebat ad popu- 
 lum (friget often means, 
 loses influence} 
 
 Vereor ne eestus nos con- 
 suetudinis absorbeat 
 
 Quanta miseriarum incen- 
 dia 
 
 Hae recordationes morsn 
 quodam dolorem effi- 
 ciunt 
 
 It will be seen from the preceding examples that the 
 simple Metaphors borrowed from heat, cold, flowing, 
 breathing, breaking, &c. are more common in Latin than 
 in English. 
 
 Latin is also more exuberant than English in the use 
 of Metaphors. Note the use of different Verbs expressive 
 of Metaphors, where in English we should use one Verb, 
 sometimes varying the Metaphor in Nouns. 
 
 I have lived an honourable 
 and prosperous life 
 
 As I hope to prosper, gen- 
 tlemen, I can assure you 
 that I have never allowed 
 myslf to be prevented 
 
 from ministering to the 
 necessities or interests of 
 anyone, either by the at- 
 tractions of leisure, or 
 by the alluring voice of 
 
 pleasure, or even by the 
 necessity of sleep 
 
 Viximus honestissime, flo- 
 ruimus 
 
 Ita vivo, judices, ut a nul- 
 lius unquam me tempore 
 aut commodo, aut otium 
 meum abstraxerit, aut 
 voluptas avocarit, aut 
 denique somnus retar- 
 darit 
 
106 HYPERBOLE. [Par. 80. 
 
 Compare the verbose English and the terse Latin in the 
 following example : 
 
 Give us a man that 'will Si quis nee tabescat moles- 
 not suffer himself to be tiis, nee frangatur ti- 
 
 worn out by petty annoy- more, nee sitienter quid 
 
 ances, or prostrated by expetens ardeat deside- 
 
 terror, a man that, in the rio, nee alacritate futili 
 
 pursuit of any object, gestiens deliquescat, is 
 
 will not give way to sit sapiens quern quaeri- 
 
 feverish desire, nor suf- mus 
 
 fer fas will to waste its 
 strength in eager useless 
 longings and we have 
 here the wise m.an that 
 is the object of our search 
 
 The English is a great deal too verbose ; and it would 
 be more idiomatic though less literal to use one Verb and 
 say, ' that will not give v/ay to the feelings of petty irri- 
 tation, or sudden terror, or feverish desire, or useless 
 longing . . .' 
 
 of ideas as if they were things .... is quite foreign to the simplicity and 
 straightforwardness of Latin Prose." * 
 
 8O. Hyperbole, like Metaphor, must not always be 
 literally rendered. For example, it does not follow, be- 
 cause we use a thousund to denote an indefinitely large 
 number, that the Latins should use xniiie. It would be 
 interesting to ascertain why they use sexcenti in the fol- 
 lowing example : 
 
 I prefer a thousand deaths Malo sexcenties mori 
 
 Bigg's Easy Exercises in Latin Prose. 
 
MISCELLANEOUS IDIOMS. 
 
MISCELLANEOUS IDIOMS. 
 
 I asked him to come to Rome 
 
 I have asked him to stop at 
 Rome 
 
 When will you ask him to 
 set out from Rome f 
 
 She is ten years old 
 
 There are some who have 
 said this was not true 
 
 When a boy, I was charmed 
 
 with this book 
 They sent ambassadors to 
 
 ask for peace 
 You surely don't ask why 
 
 we did this 
 
 A slave of mine 
 
 I wrote, that you might 
 
 hear the sooner 
 I shall soon know what you 
 
 wish 
 
 That wicked Tullius hat 
 caused me to despair 
 
 Rogavi ilium ut Romam re- 
 niret 
 
 Rogavi ilium ut Romae ma. 
 neat 
 
 Quando ilium rogabis ut 
 Roma proficiscatur ? 
 
 Decem annoa nata est 
 
 Sunt qui negaverint hcec 
 vera esse 
 
 Hie liber mihi puero valde 
 placuit. (Omit When} 
 
 Legates miserunt qui pacem 
 peterent 
 
 Num rogas cur hoc feceri- 
 mns? 
 
 Quidam e servis meis 
 
 Scripsi, quo citius intelli- 
 geres 
 
 Mox sciam quid veils 
 
 TulliuS, homo improbissi- 
 inus, effecit ut desperem. 
 (Or, improbus ille Tul- 
 UUB). 
 
no 
 
 MISCELLANEOUS IDIOMS. 
 
 Corioli oppidum captain est 
 (not capti sunt) 
 
 Tantus erat calor ut fere 
 omnes progredi non pos- 
 semus 
 
 Cur non emptis frueris ? 
 
 Tua interest pacem, iiiius 
 bellum esse 
 
 Suo ipsius fratri mortem 
 minatur 
 
 Decimo' die post captas 
 Thebas 
 
 Vereor ut veniat 
 Musicam te docebo 
 Nimis tibi indulge tur 
 
 Noli captivis parcere. (Or, 
 ne peperceris, but not 
 ne parcas in prose) 
 
 Veritus sum ne citius veniret 
 
 Fratri suo* ut fugeret sua- 
 sit 
 
 Liberis suis suasit ut Romee 
 maneant 
 
 Alexander ilie 
 
 Cura ut ad me (not rnlbl) 
 flores mittas, quos ha- 
 beas pulcherrimos 
 
 * Suo may be omitted where the omission leaves no doubt whose brother 
 is meant. 
 
 The town of Corioli was 
 taken 
 
 The heat was so great that 
 almost all of us were un- 
 able to go on 
 
 Why don't you enjoy what 
 you've bought f 
 
 It is your interest that there 
 should be peace; it is his 
 that there should be war 
 
 He threatens his own brother 
 with death 
 
 Ten days after the capture of 
 Thebes 
 
 I fear he will not come 
 I will teach you music 
 
 You are being too much 
 indulged 
 
 Dorft spare the prisoners 
 
 I feared he would come too 
 soon 
 
 He recommendea his brother 
 to escape 
 
 He has recommended his 
 own children to remain 
 at Rome 
 
 The celebrated Alexander 
 
 Send me the most beautiful 
 flowers you have 
 
MISCELLANEOUS IDIOMS. 
 
 in 
 
 He reduced the Gauls to Gallos 
 subjection 
 
 In six- days we came from 
 Athens to Samos 
 
 What have I to do with 
 you? 
 
 I shall go back to my home 
 in Italy 
 
 There are some who hate me 
 
 Having made this answer, 
 he went home 
 
 He came sooner than he was 
 expected 
 
 He has long been desirous 
 of death 
 
 Ccesar was killed by a friend 
 
 The battle took place in * 
 narrow valley 
 
 This was done by an enemy 
 and not by chance 
 
 He will see to the gathering 
 of the flowers 
 
 In front was the sea, in our 
 rear the enemy 
 
 He made a long speech with- 
 out persuading anyone to 
 forgive him 
 
 ditionis fecit 
 
 Sexto die Athenis Samum 
 venimus 
 
 Quid mihi tecuru cst ? 
 Domum in Italian* redibo 
 
 Sunt qui me oderint 
 
 Hoc response, domum abiit 
 
 Opinione celerius vcnit 
 
 Jamdudum mortem optat 
 
 Caesarem interfecit amictw. 
 (Note the emphatic posi- 
 tion of amicus, and the 
 use of Latin Active for 
 English Passive) 
 
 In angusta valle pu&natum 
 est 
 
 Hoc non casu sed ab inimico 
 factum est. (A or ab \\iih 
 living agent) 
 
 Flores carpendos curabit 
 
 Mare a fronte, a tergo hostes 
 imminebant. (Note the 
 similarity of the Extremes 
 and Means in a Latin An- 
 tithesis) 
 
 Orationem longam habuit, 
 neque tamen nlli persua- 
 sit ut sibi ignoaceret 
 
MISCELLANEOUS IDIOMS. 
 
 We shall set out from Car- 
 thage about the *]th of 
 May 
 
 How many are there of you 
 in London ? 
 
 Truth is the parent of what 
 is expedient as well as of 
 iv hat is just 
 
 Philosophy oiight to h*ve 
 been your master 
 
 I hoped you would be con- 
 quered 
 
 It is not like a brave man to 
 lose one } s presence of mind 
 
 I was the first to be asked to 
 give an opinion 
 
 We ought not to have been 
 kepi in ignorance of this 
 
 I was somewhat disturbed by 
 the shouts 
 
 Three hundred of us are 
 prepared to conquer or 
 die 
 
 I am persuaded that what 
 you say is false 
 
 He took and burned the 
 bridge 
 
 It rarely happens that, &*c. 
 
 Carthagine circiter Nonas 
 Maias proficiscemur 
 
 Quot Londiuii habitatis ? 
 
 Veritas non justi solum sed 
 etiam utiiitatis mater est. 
 (Notutilis, on account of 
 the ambiguity) 
 
 Philosophia tibi magistra 
 esse debuit. (Not magis- 
 ter, because Philosophia 
 
 is feminine) 
 
 Speravi te vie tuna iri or fore 
 nt vincereris 
 
 Non est fortium perturbari 
 
 Ego primus rogatus sum 
 sententiam 
 
 Non debuimus hoc (de hac 
 re) celari. (Note, the 
 Noun requires de, the 
 Neuter Pronoun does not) 
 
 Clamor me nescio quid per- 
 turbaverat 
 
 Trecenti parati sumus aut 
 ad vincendum aut ad mo- 
 riendum. (Not paramur) 
 
 Persuasum est mihi te falsa 
 dicere 
 
 Pontem captum incendit 
 
 Raro evenit ut, &c. (Rare = 
 thinly, far apart) 
 
MISCELLANEOUS IDIOMS. 
 
 My sister married his brother, 
 ana my brother his sister 
 
 IVhen he performs a judge's 
 duties rightly, then and 
 not till then will he be 
 worthy of praise 
 
 Has he been persuaded to 
 speak the truth ? 
 
 He imputed my virtue to me 
 as a fault 
 
 With you for our leader, we 
 will not shrink even front 
 famine 
 
 She promises not to say one 
 word 
 
 ft is absolutely necessary for 
 me to go 
 
 No poet ever thought anyone 
 superior to himself 
 
 He is the best jumper in the 
 
 school 
 I cannot help fearing 
 
 I am different from what I 
 
 once was 
 The better you are (one is), 
 
 the happier you are (one 
 
 is] 
 Hardly anyone saw him die 
 
 Soror mea ftratxi ejusnupsit, 
 frater autem sororem ejus 
 
 in matrimonium duxit 
 
 Hie, quum judicis munere 
 recte fungetur, turn de- 
 mum laude dignus erit 
 
 Num ei persuasum est ut 
 vera dicat ? 
 
 Virtutem meam mihi vitio 
 
 dedit 
 Te duce, ne famem quidem 
 
 pertimescemus 
 
 Promittit se ne verbum qui- 
 dem emissuram esse 
 
 Necesse est me Ire, or, 
 
 Necesse est earn 
 
 Nemo poeta ullum* quam se 
 meliorem putavit 
 
 Discipuloram, si quis alins, 
 ille optime saltat 
 
 Facere non possum quin ti- 
 meam 
 
 Alius sum atque olim fui 
 
 Quo quis melior, eo beatiof 
 Ut quisque optimus, ita 
 beatissimus 
 
 Most of us think more of our 
 own virtues than of those 
 of our friends 
 
 * Ullum (Adj.) = 
 MADVIG, Par -x>, 3. 
 
 Nemo fere cum morlentem 
 
 vidit 
 Plerique nostras pluris quam 
 
 amicorum virtutes aesti- 
 
 mamus 
 
 any (poet), qnenquam (Pron ) = any man. See 
 
 J 
 
114 
 
 MISCELLANEOUS IDIOMS. 
 
 He is the best painter in all 
 Italy 
 
 A thousand soldiers 
 Ten thousand soldiers 
 
 Are you equal to bearing this 
 great burden ? 
 
 Anyone can boast that he is 
 more learned than any one 
 of his own pupils 
 
 The hope of taking booty 
 
 There were some that pitied 
 the prisoners 
 
 . r oti ought to have respected 
 him as a father 
 
 I have a hundred horsemen 
 and six hundred infantry 
 
 1 expect the city will be cap- 
 tured 
 
 I fear that something has 
 happened amiss, and that 
 some misfortune is trou- 
 bling you 
 
 The spirit, the purpose, and 
 the feeling of a country 
 are expressed in its laws 
 
 He said that I was not wise, 
 you say that I was not 
 honest 
 
 Pictor est quails in tota Ita- 
 lia nemo 
 
 Mille milites 
 
 Decem millia mill turn 
 
 Num es tanto oneri ferendol 
 (Or, par es) 
 
 Cuilibet promptum est gloriari 
 se doctiorem esse quam 
 quemquam e discipulis 
 suis. (Quemquam by 
 attraction, see Par. 63) 
 
 Spes capiendse prasdse 
 
 Erant qui captivorum mise- 
 rerentur 
 
 Debuisti eum seque ac pa- 
 trem vereri 
 
 Sunt mihi centum equites, 
 pedites autem sexcenti 
 
 Credo urbem captum iri. (Or 
 vereor ne, or spero, but 
 not expecto) 
 
 Vereor ne quid mali accid- 
 erit, ne quod infortunium 
 te perturbet 
 
 Animus et consilium et sen- 
 tentia civitatis in legibus 
 posita est. (Verb, being 
 Singular, agrees with 
 nearest Subject) 
 
 Ille negavit me sapientem 
 esse, tu autem negas me 
 probum fuisse. (Note the 
 Pres. Infin. after a Verb 
 speaking in the Past) 
 
MISCELLANEOUS IDIOMS. 
 
 He pities no one 
 
 I have lost the book you gave 
 me 
 
 The quarrels of lovers should 
 be treated as a renewal of 
 love 
 
 My wife and son are dead 
 I will do it if I can 
 
 The general, in his usual 
 forgetful ness, passed by 
 the tents of the sentries 
 
 I yesterday asked him to come 
 to Rome 
 
 The man that is freed from 
 debt is void of care 
 
 I am sorry to hear this 
 Many great disadvantages 
 
 He will come with speed from 
 Carthage 
 
 For ten years he filled the 
 office of a judge 
 
 I have asked him to come ana 
 see me to-morrow 
 
 Nulling (not neminis) mise- 
 retur 
 
 ( Perdidi librum quern mihi 
 l dedisti, or 
 
 \ Quern mihi dedisti librum 
 ( eum perdidi 
 
 Amantium irae amoris inte- 
 gratio putanda eat. (Or, 
 change order, and write 
 putandse sunt amoris in- 
 tegratio) 
 
 Uxor mea et filius mortal 
 sunt 
 
 Hoc si potero (not possum) 
 faciam 
 
 Imperator, ut erat mente im- 
 memori* (not e) vigil-um 
 (not ium) tentoria prxte- 
 riit 
 
 Rogavi eum heri ut Romam 
 venire t 
 
 Qui sere alieno liberatus est, 
 is est cura vacuus 
 
 Invitus hasc audio 
 
 Multa ct magna incommoda 
 
 Carthagine celerrime (or 
 summa celeritate, but not 
 celeritate) veniet 
 
 Decem annos judicis muncre 
 fungebatur 
 
 Rogavi eum ut eras veniat 
 me visum 
 
 * Par and xnemor always have -i; pauper, princeps, superstes, 
 
 compos, always -e, and dives and ales generally -e. It would seem that 
 those Adjectives that are used as Nouns., prefer the -e. The Noun par makes 
 Abl. pave. So, use sapiente for the Noun, sapient! for the Adjective. 
 
 I 2 
 
MISCELLANEOUS IDIOMS. 
 
 I will help you once and no 
 
 more 
 I am surprised at this 
 
 Sicily is opposite Carthage 
 
 I was once walking in a 
 meadow 
 
 Why do you oppose me to no 
 purpose f 
 
 I shall die and no one will 
 help me 
 
 I shall abiae by my opinion 
 Does anyone deny this f 
 I cannot write for weeping 
 
 Once a king reigned over 
 Corinth 
 
 Pll give all of you a dena- 
 rius apiece 
 
 You are ten miles nearer the 
 city than I am 
 
 Trust as many men as pos- 
 sible 
 
 They will run on their several 
 errands 
 
 Kt came to such a pitch of 
 folly that he did not believe 
 even his own father 
 
 One uses one medicine, an- 
 other another 
 
 He came as soon as possible 
 
 semei, non saepius tibi subve- 
 niam 
 
 Hoc mihi admirationem mo- 
 vet. (Not hoc miror) 
 
 Sicilia e regione est Cartha- 
 
 gini (or Carthaginis) 
 Forte in prato ambulabam 
 
 Cur mihi frustra adversaria ? 
 (Not opponis) 
 
 Moriar nee quisquam mihi 
 succurret. (Not et nemo) 
 
 In sententia manebo 
 Num quis hoc negat ? 
 
 Pree lacrimis scribere non 
 possum 
 
 oiim (or quondam) rex Corin- 
 tho praeerat (regno is 
 Intransitive) 
 
 Singuios denarios vobis om- 
 nibus dabo 
 
 Decexn tu mil-libus propiua 
 quam ego, ab urbe abes 
 
 Quam plurimis Crede 
 Suum quisque iter current 
 
 iio stultitise venit ut ne suo 
 quidem patri crederet 
 
 Alius alia medicina utitur 
 Quam celerrime venit 
 
MISCELLANEOUS IDIOMS. 
 
 Everyone trusts me, but no 
 one will trust him 
 
 He is more dutiful (plus) 
 than his brother 
 
 Everyone trusts me, but 
 without any affection 
 
 I know you will grow cold 
 None of you will pardon me 
 
 The country is ruined 
 There's no doubt, citizens, 
 that he pities you 
 
 The house is finished 
 
 This will be a protection to 
 me 
 
 I have warned you of this, 
 and have left nothing un- 
 done that may be of use 
 to you 
 
 Some run one way, others 
 another 
 
 My name, is Tullius 
 
 He died ten years after the 
 founding of the city 
 
 The town had been sur- 
 rounded by the enemy 
 with a ditch 
 
 Omnes (not quisque nor om- 
 nis) mi hi, nemo autem 
 illi credit 
 
 Ma pis est quam fralcr, plus 
 (not plior) 
 
 Omnes mihi credunt sed sine 
 ullo amore. (Autem adds 
 something different, sed 
 something limiting orcon- 
 tradictory) 
 
 Scio fore ut frigescas 
 
 Nemo ve strum (not vestri) 
 mihi ignoscet 
 
 Actum est de re-publica 
 
 Non es^ dubium, cives, quin 
 vestri (not vestrum) mi- 
 sereatur 
 
 ^Edes perfectse sunt (not 
 perficiuntur : cedes sing, 
 means a temple) 
 
 Hoc erit mihi praesidio 
 
 Hoc te monui, nee quidquam 
 
 praetermisi quod tibi utile 
 esse possit 
 
 Alii alio currunt 
 
 Nomen mihi est Tnllio (or 
 Tullius) 
 
 Decem annis post urbem con- 
 
 ditam obiit 
 
 Hostis oppido fossaxn (or 
 oppidum fossa) circun> 
 dederat 
 
iiS 
 
 MISCELLANEOUS IDIOMS. 
 
 I sold for eightpence what I 
 had bought for two shil- 
 lings 
 
 He was condemned to death 
 
 Will you sell your life for 
 two shillings a day ? 
 
 I do not mind being without 
 riches 
 
 TJiis was the man that de- 
 ceived me 
 
 I have ascertainea that the 
 fellow is wasting his 
 time 
 
 The sun is many times larger 
 than the earth 
 
 He inflicted punishment on 
 his (own) son 
 
 For ten years I have been a 
 pupil of Socrates 
 
 A peck of corn was at that 
 time worth three sesterces 
 
 You ought to have answered 
 before 
 
 Troy was besieged by the 
 Greeks for ten years 
 
 On our journey we were at- 
 tacked by robbers 
 
 I prefer fighting on horseback 
 to fighting on foot 
 
 I think very highly of the ex- 
 cellent Tullius 
 
 He threw himself at the 
 generaVsfeet 
 
 Quod tribus denariis emeram 
 id uno vendidi 
 
 Capitis damnatus est 
 
 Num. trinis in diem denariis 
 sanguinem vendes ? 
 
 Facile careo divitiis 
 
 Hie, We inquam me fefellit 
 
 Compertum habeo hominem 
 tempus terere 
 
 Multis partibus major est sol 
 quam terra 
 
 Filium suum poena affecit 
 
 Decimum jam annum Socra- 
 tem audio 
 
 Tritici modius id temporis 
 ternis sestertiis erat 
 
 Antea te mvhi respondere 
 oportuit (or debuisti xuihi 
 respondere) 
 
 Trojam decem annos Grceci 
 oppugnaverunt 
 
 Latrones nos ex itinere ad- 
 
 orti sunt 
 
 Malo ex equo quam pedes 
 (adj.) (or pedibus) pug- 
 nare 
 
 Tullium, virum optimum, 
 
 plurimi facio 
 Imperatori ad pedes se pro- 
 
 jecit 
 
MISCELLANEOUS IDIOMS. 
 
 119 
 
 / heard him say that was 
 
 not true 
 You ought to have seen him 
 
 jump 
 Why may I not be grave f 
 
 Why did you build this great 
 
 bridge over this small 
 
 river ? 
 It is possible you have made 
 
 a mistake 
 When we say "in Virgil? 
 
 we do not necessarily 
 
 mean " in the JEneid" 
 My dear friend Balbus is 
 
 near the city 
 You and he promised to be 
 
 present 
 
 Trees flourish in the country ', 
 men in town 
 
 Horse, foot and baggage, all 
 were destroyed 
 
 He blamed me without ascer- 
 taining what I had done 
 
 With his usual 'folly, the 
 fellow denied it all, and 
 that loo in my presence 
 
 The enemy at once sounded a 
 retreat. When he heard 
 this t the general bade his 
 men also retire 
 
 With your usual kindness 
 you will pardon his jolly 
 
 Audivi ilium negantem id 
 verum esse 
 
 Oportuit te ilium saltantem 
 spectare 
 
 Cur mihi non licet esse e- 
 vero? 
 
 Cur in tarn parvo flumine 
 pontem tantum fecisti ? 
 
 Fieri potest ut errorem fece- 
 ris 
 
 Si quando " apud Virgilium " 
 dicimus,non continuo "in 
 dicere volumus 
 
 Balbus, vir mihi amicissi- 
 mus, prope ab urbe abest 
 
 Et tu et ille promisistis vos 
 adfuturos esse 
 
 Ruri arbores, in urbe homi- 
 nes vigent 
 
 Equites, pedites, impedimen- 
 ta, omnia periere (where 
 "and" is to be omitted) 
 
 Me culpavit, neque quid fe- 
 cissem intellexit 
 
 Homo, cujus est stultitiae, 
 omnia, idque me coram, 
 infitiabatur 
 
 Hostes confestim receptui 
 canunt. Quod quum au- 
 divisset imperator, suis 
 quoque, ut recedant, inv 
 perat 
 
 Tu, pro tua dementia, ho* 
 mini stulto veniam dabis 
 
MISCELLANEOUS IDIOMS. 
 
 As long as you are detained 
 there you will never be 
 fiee from annoyance 
 
 He <*ied not long afterwards 
 
 You have more than four 
 hundred horsemen with 
 you 
 
 They paid tribute once every 
 ten years 
 
 I propose to set out about ten 
 in the morning 
 
 Anybody is believed by fools 
 
 As to the prisoners they are 
 brought back, and no one 
 has escaped 
 
 But no more of this, now I 
 return to more serious 
 matters 
 
 He was alike treacherous in 
 peace and in war 
 
 He is two inches taller than 
 any of his brothers 
 
 By the advice of Aris tides 
 they rejected the plan 
 
 No one but the consul heard 
 him take the oath 
 
 Boys are persuaded more 
 easily than old men 
 
 He asked which was the 
 younger of you 
 
 The man is good, but by no 
 means wise 
 
 Quoad ibi detineberis, nun- 
 quam molestiis carebis 
 
 Haud ita xnulto post obiit 
 
 Quadrinerentos equites am- 
 piius tecum habes 
 
 Decimo quoque anno tribu- 
 
 tum pendebant 
 
 f Consilium est mihi) . 
 (In animo habeo j c: 
 
 quartam horam proficisci 
 
 Cuilibet (or cuivis) credunt 
 stulti 
 
 Quod attinet ad captives, 
 reducti sunt nee quisquam 
 
 effugit 
 
 Sed haec hactenus : mine ad 
 graviora redeo 
 
 Tarn in pace quam in bello 
 infidus erat 
 
 Duabus unciis procerior est 
 quam quisquam ex fratri- 
 bus 
 
 Consilium, auctore Aristide, 
 
 rejecerunt 
 
 Nemoprseter consulem ilium 
 jurantem audivit 
 
 Pueris facilius quamsenibus 
 persuadetur 
 
 Rogavit uter vestrum minor 
 esset natu 
 
 Vir est ut bonus ita nequa- 
 quam sapiens 
 
MISCELLANEOUS IDIOMS. 
 
 I am on the point of giving 
 battle to the enemy 
 
 The two brothers exhorted 
 one another 
 
 When did you hear that s/te 
 sings ? 
 
 What town do you seeyonder^ 
 pray ? 
 
 f am very intimate with the 
 few friends I have 
 
 Every thing that was of value 
 was burned 
 
 One can scarcely avoid cold 
 in one's house, much less 
 in the open air 
 
 He is a good, nay an excellent 
 man 
 
 Every legion was divided 
 into ten cohorts 
 
 Everyone hates ingratitude 
 You are all but last 
 
 I did not know whether he 
 would not remain 
 
 Take care not to trust him 
 
 Next year he was returned 
 by Cambridge for tJie 
 second time 
 
 Nothing is so narrow-minded 
 and paltry as avarice 
 
 In eo sum nt praelium cum 
 hostibus committam 
 
 Fratres alter alterum hortan- 
 tur 
 
 Quando audivisti illam ca- 
 nere? 
 
 Quod tandem oppidum ibi 
 prospicis ? 
 
 Amicis quos habeo paucos 
 familiarissime utor 
 
 Quidquid erat pretiosi con- 
 crematum est 
 
 Vix in tectis frigus vitatur, 
 nedum sub divo 
 
 Vir est bonus, immo potiua 
 egregius 
 
 Omnes legiones (or legio 
 
 quseque) in denascohortcs 
 divisae sunt. (Not omnis 
 legio) 
 
 Omnes beneficii immemo- 
 
 rem oderunt. (Par. 3 a) 
 
 Minimum abest quin ultimus 
 sis 
 
 Nesciebam an mansurus es- 
 set. (Non to be omitted) 
 
 Cave (ne) credas hoinini 
 
 Proximo anno Cantabrigien- 
 ses ilium iterum dele- 
 gerunt 
 
 Nihil est tam angusti animi 
 tamque parvl quam am are 
 divitias 
 
122 
 
 MISCELLANEOUS IDIOMS. 
 
 I could scarcely keep from 
 venting my anger on him 
 
 I don't know whether you 
 will do as I do 
 
 Do you know when he will 
 come f 
 
 However wise he may be, he 
 needs friends to help him 
 
 Although I am absent, I like 
 to hear what is going on 
 at home 
 
 We were almost perishing 
 
 When I was recovering from 
 my illness I was one day 
 attacked by a bull 
 
 While this was happening 
 the enemy fled 
 
 Whether this is true or false 
 it does not at all trouble 
 me 
 
 When I approached the 
 whelps the lion rushed af 
 me 
 
 He asked me whether this 
 was true or false 
 
 I perceived the kindness with 
 which he received me 
 
 You have done well in 
 coming here 
 
 Vix me continui quin iram in 
 eum evomerem 
 
 Nescio an non eadem atque 
 ego fac turns sis. (Non 
 inserted) 
 
 Scisne quando venturus sit ? 
 
 Quamvis sit sapiens, opus 
 est illi amicis qui illi sub- 
 veniant 
 
 Quano 4 uam absum, libenter 
 tamen quid domi fiat au- 
 dio 
 
 Minimum abfuit quin perire- 
 mus 
 
 Quum ex morbo convalesce- 
 bam forte taurus me pe- 
 tiit. (Quum temporal) 
 
 Dum haec geruntur (pres.) 
 hostes terga verterunt 
 (perf.) 
 
 Haec, sive vera sunt sive fal- 
 sa, nibil (or nullo modo) 
 me movent 
 
 Quum ad catulos accederem 
 leo me petiit. (Quum cau- 
 sal) 
 
 Interrogavit me utrum haec 
 vera an falsa essent 
 
 Intellexi quanta me benevo- 
 lentia exciperet. (Not 
 bene vole attain qua) 
 
 Bene fecisti quod hue venisti 
 
MISCELLANEOUS IDIOMS. 
 
 123 
 
 He answered he had sent the 
 money to Lilybaum a few 
 days ago 
 
 He died four years after he 
 returned home 
 
 / heard that the enemy had 
 marched twenty miles by 
 night and was now close 
 at hand 
 
 We accepted the terms on 
 condition that the guards 
 should be removed 
 
 He is not a fit person for you 
 to converse with 
 
 He is too brave to fear death 
 
 The soldiers were seized with 
 fear that Cicero's wound 
 might be fatal 
 
 You are acting as foolishly 
 as if you were questioning 
 a deaf man 
 
 Ccesar asked his soldiers why 
 they distrusted their own 
 valour or his energy 
 
 We must wait till the elec- 
 tions are held two months 
 hence 
 
 Respondit se Lilybseuxn pan- 
 els abhinc diebus argen- 
 tum misisse 
 
 Anno quarto postquam do- 
 mum redierat mortUUSCSt. 
 (N.B. The pluperfect is 
 allowed after postquam 
 when the length of the 
 interval is expressed) 
 
 Intellexi hostem viginti millia 
 noctu progressum esse et 
 jam adesse. (Not nunc, 
 not adfuisse) 
 
 Ita accepimus conditioncs 
 ut custodes removerentur 
 
 Non est aptus quoctun coiio- 
 quaris 
 
 Fortior est quam qui (or 
 quam ut) mortem timeat 
 
 Favor cepit milites ne Cice- 
 ronis vulnus mortiferum 
 esset 
 
 Idem facis ac 
 terroges 
 
 si surdum in- 
 
 Caesar ex militibus quaesivit 
 cur de sua virtute aut de 
 ipsius diligentia despera- 
 rent. (ipse referring to 
 the principal Subject, is 
 used in contrast to se re- 
 ferred to a minor Subject) 
 
 Expectandum est nobis dum 
 comitia duobus abhinc 
 mensibus habcantur 
 
124 
 
 MISCELLANEOUS IDIOMS. 
 
 Socrates was called to trial 
 on the charge of corrupt- 
 ing the youth, but in real- 
 ity because he had become 
 suspected by those in. 
 power 
 
 Instead of being true it is not 
 even probable 
 
 They grew alarmed that with 
 his changeable and artful 
 nature he might desert 
 them and once more gain 
 the favour of his country- 
 men 
 
 Not till now did the citizens 
 disperse to their homes 
 
 If you help me I shall be re- 
 joiced; if not, I shall not 
 take it ill 
 
 Will you not inform me 
 whether this is true or 
 not? 
 
 Nature prompts an infant to 
 love itself 
 
 Suppose a man is selling a 
 house because of some 
 faults in it 
 
 He said it wasn't like Greek 
 manners for women to 
 dine with men 
 
 Socrates in judicium vocatus 
 est quod corrumperet ju- 
 ventutem, re tamen ipsa 
 quia in suspicionem ma- 
 gistratibus vexxerat 
 
 Tantum abest ut hoc verum 
 sit ut ne verisimile quidem 
 sit 
 
 Pertimescebant ne, homo va- 
 fer et in cons tans, ab ip- 
 
 sis descisceret et cum 
 suis in gratiam rediret 
 
 Tom demnm cives suam quis- 
 que domum digress! sunt 
 
 Si mihi subvenies gaudebo ; 
 sin minus, baud aegre fe- 
 ram 
 
 Nonne me certiorem facies 
 utrum haec vera sint an- 
 non ? (Or necne) 
 
 Natura movet infantem ut se 
 ipse diligat. (ipse, quali- 
 fying the Subject of a 
 clausecontainingse, shews 
 that se refers to the Sub- 
 ject of the clause, not to 
 the principal Subject) 
 
 vendat vir aedes propter ali- 
 qua vitia 
 
 Negavit moris esse Grasco- 
 
 rum ut in convivio viro- 
 rum mulieres accumbe- 
 rent (or, Ace. and Inf.) 
 
MISCELLANEOUS IDIOMS. 
 
 125 
 
 Tkt general encouraged his 
 soldiers saying, " Why do 
 you make useless lamen- 
 tations f Press on. Why 
 are we delaying here? 
 Will not the enemy crush 
 us while we delay f If 
 you had obeyed me before, 
 you would have been in 
 safety by this time, and 
 even now you may yet be 
 safe. Be of good courage. 
 Soon the cold will grow 
 less severe? 
 
 I have often seen my country- 
 men walking in the busy 
 cities of Athens or Rome 
 
 At one time he says this, at 
 another, something else 
 
 The child hoped that the bird 
 would grow tame 
 
 Pancetius praises Africanus, 
 giving as a reason that 
 he was moderate 
 
 [prefer Alexander to Aris- 
 tocles, not because the for- 
 mer is altogether wise, 
 but because the latter is 
 not wise at all 
 
 Wy father blamed me for not 
 writing three letters to 
 him in the whole of a 
 year 
 
 Imperator milites in hunc 
 modum hortatus est, " Cur 
 inutilitcr plorarent ? In- 
 starent ! Cur ibi se mo- 
 rari ? Nonne hostem se 
 morantes oppressurum 
 esse ? Si sibi antea pa- 
 ruissent, illos jam in tuto 
 futures fuisse, salvos 
 etiam turn esse posse. 
 Erigerent animos. Mox 
 fore ut frigus mitesceret " 
 
 Saepe meos cives Athenis vel 
 
 Romse, in urbibus cele- 
 
 berrimis, ambulantes vidi 
 Modo hoc, modo illud, dicit 
 
 Puer (not liber except in pi.) 
 speravit fore ut avis mi- 
 tesceret 
 
 Panaetius Africanum laudat 
 quod fuerit abstinens 
 
 Alexandnim Aristocli ante- 
 pono, non quod ille sit 
 oxnnino sapiens, sed quia 
 hie est oxnnino non sa- 
 piens. N.B. sit, est 
 
 Pater me culpavit quod per 
 totum annum non ad se 
 trinas literas misissem. 
 (Note Distributive with 
 literse, castra, &C.) 
 
126 
 
 MISCELLANEOUS IDIOMS. 
 
 Of males as many as 10,000 
 were captured 
 
 Zeuxis and Polygnotus did 
 not use more than four 
 colours 
 
 Your advice is more honour- 
 able than expedient 
 
 He has perpetrated an almost 
 unheard-of crime 
 
 Not less than thirty horse- 
 men wen killed 
 
 All that survived tlie battle 
 were taken the next day 
 
 They set out for the bridge, 
 which was fourteen miles 
 off 
 
 I am expected to remain 
 
 The general exhorted his men 
 as follows : " Why do you 
 make useless complaints ? 
 Press on * 
 
 Don't despise a joke 
 
 Who was there that did not 
 hate you ? 
 
 We shall not be safe if Ci- 
 cero is killed 
 
 Some law were passed, others 
 remained posted up 
 
 Virile secus, ad decem millia 
 capta. (Used without al- 
 teration in apposition to 
 all cases) 
 
 Zeuxis et Polygnotus non 
 plus quaxn quatuor colo- 
 ribus utebantur 
 
 Consilium das magis hones- 
 turn quam utile (or ho- 
 nestius quam utilius) 
 
 Tantum non inauditum scelus 
 patravit 
 
 Hand minus triginta equites 
 
 interfecti 
 Si qui praelio superfuerant 
 
 capti sunt postridie. 
 
 (Never oxnnes qui) 
 Ad pontem aberat autem 
 
 millia quatuordecirn pro- 
 
 ficiscuntur 
 Omnes confidunt me mansu- 
 
 rum esse (or postulant 
 
 t) 
 Imperator milites hortatus 
 
 " Cur ' inquit ' inutiliter 
 
 ploratis? Instate !" (Note 
 
 the introductory sentence 
 
 left unfinished) 
 Ne JOCOS sis aspernatus (not 
 
 asperneris) 
 Quis erat quin te odisset ? 
 
 Tuti non erimus si Cicero 
 occisus erit 
 
 Leges aliae latae sunt, aliae pro- 
 mulgatae fuerunt. (Madv. 
 344) 
 
MISCELLANEOUS IDIOMS. 
 
 127 
 
 How few there are that are 
 prepared to die for their 
 country ! 
 
 I asked him what o'clock it 
 was, but he made me no 
 reply 
 
 What is the meaning of the 
 word pleasure ? 
 
 I carit hope it will be my 
 good fortune to escape 
 
 He says that we shall not 
 succeed if Cicero is killed 
 
 I am writing this letter on 
 the 7th of March, and I 
 entreat you to answer as 
 soon as possible 
 
 Bid your friends collect with 
 speed 
 
 After one or two days he 
 called a meeting of all the 
 surviving citizens 
 
 What reason is there why 
 your departure should be 
 excused? 
 
 Suppose you were in my 
 position f 
 
 Quotusquisque est qui pa- 
 ratus sit ad moriendum 
 pro patria ! 
 
 Interroganti xnihi quota bora 
 esset nihil rcspondit 
 
 Quid vult vox voluptatis ? 
 
 Sperare non possum fore ut 
 con ting at mihi cvaderc. 
 (Do not use fut. part, of 
 compounds of tango) 
 
 Negat rem nobis bene sue- 
 cessuram esse si Cicero 
 occisus sit. (Fut. changed 
 to Subj. in dependent 
 sentence) 
 
 Has literas Nonis Martiis 
 scribebam atquc oro tc 
 utquamprimum rescribas. 
 (To the reader, the writing 
 is past, the entreaty re- 
 mains present} 
 
 Amicos tuos jube quam celer- 
 rime convenire. (Re- 
 member that colligere is 
 
 Transitive) 
 
 Post unum et alterum diem 
 convocat si qui (or quid- 
 quid) civium supererant. 
 (Or qui cives . . . cmnes, 
 but not omnes cives qui) 
 
 Quid e.st causse cur abeas 
 excusatus ? 
 
 Pac, quseso, qui ego sum 
 esse te? 
 
128 
 
 MISCELLANEOUS IDIOMS. 
 
 I wrote yesterday from Ephe- 
 sus, to-day I write from 
 Tralles 
 
 He is too rich to be in want 
 of money 
 
 See that you sell half-a- 
 dozen houses 
 
 I have no fault to find with 
 
 old age 
 It is said that Agesilaus lived 
 
 to the age of seventy 
 
 You will do well to remem- 
 ber the difference between 
 a friend and a flatterer 
 
 Cuspius,from whom you will 
 receive these two letters, 
 is useful to me in many 
 ways 
 
 After I had spent the month 
 of May there, we were 
 detained from the yd of 
 June to the 12 th Septem- 
 ber 
 
 I shall not believe your pro- 
 mises, unless you fulfil 
 what you have already 
 promised 
 
 It was resolved to send am- 
 bassadors to ask what was 
 the meaning of these re- 
 peated insults 
 
 Yesterday evening he return- 
 ed home to his family 
 
 Dederam Epheso pridie, has 
 dedi Trallibus 
 
 Divitior est quam ut pecuniae 
 egeat. (Ditior rare in 
 prose) 
 
 Fac senas redes vendas. 
 
 (Not sex) 
 
 Nihil habeo quod incusem 
 senectutem 
 
 Dicitur Agesilaus ad septua- 
 gesimum annum vitam 
 
 egisse 
 
 Bene facies si memineris 
 quantum inter amicum et 
 assentatorem intersit 
 
 Cuspius, a quo binas h^s 
 litteras accepisti, multis 
 in rebus mihi utilis est 
 
 Postquam ibi mensem Maium 
 consumpsi, ex ante diem 
 tertium Nonas Junias us- 
 que ad pridie Idus Sep- 
 
 tembres tenebamur 
 
 Ita credam promissis si qua?. 
 jam promisisti solveris 
 
 Placuit legates mitti qul ro- 
 garent quid vellent has 
 tot conturaelire 
 
 Heri, vesperi domum ad ux 
 orem liberosque rediit 
 (not familiain) 
 
MISCELLANEOUS IDIOMS. 
 
 129 
 
 With what decency, pray, 
 can you insult thus so 
 excellent a man as Tul- 
 liusf 
 
 If he had not run away, I 
 should have helped the 
 poor man with pleasure 
 
 f came to see you at once, in- 
 asmuch as I had received 
 many kindnesses at your 
 hands 
 
 This is too good to be true 
 
 You must be ignorant of your 
 position 
 
 If I knew, I would tell 
 
 But I should not have time, 
 if I tried to relate it all 
 
 No one is so keen-sighted as 
 not to be occasionally de- 
 ceived 
 
 Would that you thought asj 
 did, or, since that is im- 
 possible, would that you 
 would think 'that I mean 
 
 well 
 
 Quo tandem ore Tullium, 
 virum egrregrium tanta 
 contumelia attic is ? 
 
 Homini miserrimo, nisi au- 
 fugisset, libenter (not 
 Ijete, nor voluptate) auc- 
 currissem 
 
 Statim veni te visum, ut qui 
 multa beneficia a te acce- 
 pissem 
 
 Meliora hsec sunt qnam quse 
 possint esse vera 
 
 Fieri non potest quin nescias 
 quo in loco sis. (Not po- 
 situm, or positionem) 
 
 Si Kcirem, dicerem (I do 
 not know, and my telling 
 is impossible. Condition 
 regarded as impossible] 
 
 Sed tempus me deficiat, si 
 omnia nunc narrare ve- 
 lim. (I might try, but I 
 do not intend to. The 
 condition is possible, but 
 will not occur) 
 
 Nemo est tarn lynceus qui 
 
 non interdum fallatur 
 
 Utinam tu eadem atque ego 
 sentires, vel, si hoc fieri 
 non potest, utinam cre- 
 das me bene velle. (Note 
 various uses of think] 
 K 
 
130 
 
 MISCELLANEOUS IDIOMS. 
 
 Cicero has been banished, a 
 calamity that is deplored 
 by every respectable person 
 
 I shall leave nothing undone 
 to banish the most turbu- 
 lent citizens 
 
 He promised to come on the 
 \\th of September, but did 
 not come till the iith of 
 October 
 
 What would you take to 
 jump off this bridge? 
 
 It would have been better to 
 have answered Yes or No 
 
 I asked him whether he would 
 have helped me if he had 
 been able 
 
 I praise this, not because it is 
 honourable but because it 
 is useful 
 
 The enemy flock round in the 
 hope of finding some inlet 
 
 Instead of thanking me he 
 abused me 
 
 In the case of a slave, this 
 might have been main- 
 tained, not in the case of 
 a free man 
 
 Alas for the deceitfulness of 
 human hopes! 
 
 I am anxious for your sake 
 
 I do not know what I should 
 have done 
 
 Cicero ex urbe pulsus est, id 
 quod (pr quam calamita- 
 tem) boni plorant omnes 
 
 Nihil praetermittam quin vio- 
 lentissimum quexnque ci- 
 
 vium ex urbe pellam 
 
 Adventum, quern in ante 
 diem tertium Idus Sep- 
 tembres promisit, in ante 
 diem quintum Idus OctO- 
 bres distulit 
 
 Quid velis mereri at de hoc 
 ponte desilias ? 
 
 Satius fuit aut Etiam ant 
 Non respondere 
 
 Interrogavi eum utrum mihi 
 subventurus fuxsset si 
 
 potuisset 
 
 Illud laudo, non quod hones- 
 tum sit sed quia utile est 
 
 Circumfunduntur hostes n\ 
 quern aditum reperire pos- 
 sint 
 
 Quum gratias mihi agere de- 
 beret mihi maledixit 
 
 Hoc in servo dici potuit, in 
 ingenuo non potuit 
 
 O fallacem hominum spem ! 
 
 Tuaxn vicem sollicitus sum 
 Nescio quid facturus faerim 
 
INTRODUCTORY EXERCISES. 
 
 EXERCISE I. 
 
 1. It is said (5) that Cato was (a man) of upright character. 
 
 2. All of us, young and old, rich and poor, must die (5). 
 
 3. Foolish (persons) are easily persuaded (to) any thing (6). 
 
 4. We ought to believe good and honorable men (6). 
 
 5. If one does one's best (8), one ought not to be blamed. 
 
 6. No one of us is free from fault, but the better part of us 
 
 (our nature) is divine (10). 
 
 7* Caesar was oil the point of (n) (in eo esse ut) taking 
 the fort. 
 
 8. The good men were loved, the rich were envied (n). 
 
 9. While these things were going on (n) in France, Caesar 
 
 was waging war upon the Britons. 
 
 10. He did not let the enemy go till he had promised to ob- 
 serve the treaty in future (n). 
 
 EXERCISE II. 
 
 1. They may (possibly) come to us to-morrow (12). 
 
 2. Caius Julius ! you might help me, if you would (12). 
 
 3. The enemy might return at any moment, and slay us all 
 
 (12). 
 
 4. Would that my faithful friend knew the danger I am in ! 
 
 (12). 
 
 5. My friend ! you should not do this (= ought not to). 
 
 6. Should they do this (12), they would deserve great blame. 
 
 7. They must all have perished (12), if the brave sailor had 
 
 not promptly (praesens) helped them. 
 
GRADUATED EXERCISES. 
 
 (Each Exercise is based on the one or more preceding exercise*. 
 For example, "your kind uncle Tullius," in the second Extrcisc, 
 is an instance of the same rule as is exemplified in " the 
 prodigal Balbus " in the first Exercise. The References in the 
 first Exercises are to the Paragraphs in " Rules and Reasons.") 
 
 HINTS FOR TRANSLATING CONTINUOUS PROSE. 
 
 1. Read over your English (not one sentence at a time, but the 
 whole passage} till you have mastered its meaning. 
 
 2. Render abstract Nouns by simpler concrete Nouns, or by Peri- 
 phrases, or by Phrases with Verbs. See Paragraphs 3, $a. 
 
 3. Render English Metaphors by appropriate Latin Metaphors. 
 See Paragraph 79. 
 
 4. In a group of English short coordinate sentences, find out 
 which is the most important and make that the principal, and the 
 rest subordinate. See Appendix, page 164. 
 
 5. Find out the connection between each subordinate part of a 
 sentence and its principal part, whether it be cause, contrariety, 
 sequence, consequence, &c. and use the appropriate links. See 
 Appendix. 
 
 6. If there are any implied statements lurking in epithets, drag 
 them out and express them by clauses with appropriate links. See 
 Appendix. 
 
 7. Find out the connection of the first sentence with what (pro- 
 bably) preceded, and then of each of the other sentences with the 
 sentence immediately preceding^ and use the appropriate links. See 
 Appendix. 
 
INTR ODUC TOR T EXER CISES. 1 33 
 
 8. You must come from England to Boston over the sea (12). 
 
 9. We must obey our parents, love our children, and fight for 
 
 fatherland (12). 
 
 10. You must not (12) fancy that you are believed, (when) 
 speaking falsely (participle). 
 
 EXERCISE III. 
 
 1. The boy is like his father (13) (in appearance), but the ghl 
 
 is like her mother (in disposition). 
 
 2. Caesar ordered (impero) the soldiers to attack the wall, 
 
 but the camp-followers he ordered (jubeo) to remain in 
 the camp. 
 
 3. I am ashamed of my folly, repentant of my sins, and weary 
 
 of life (130). 
 
 4. It is our interest (130) that our country should be pros- 
 
 perous. 
 
 5. He said it was his (own) interest to do-good to all men. 
 
 6. The herds are feeding-on rich pastures (130), but the men 
 
 eat various food. 
 
 7. The master teaches his pupils many (things), but the 
 
 pupils conceal many (things) from the master (14). 
 
 8. He takes-away the life of his enemy, and tears off the arms 
 
 from his body (15). 
 
 9. Terrified, the townsmen cast themselves at the feet of the 
 
 conqueror (15, note). 
 
 10. The travellers set out from Boston for the country : they 
 spent five days in the country, and then returned to the 
 city (16). 
 
 EXERCISE IV. 
 
 1. My sister lives in the splendid house of her father-in-law, 
 
 but I dwell in my own house (16, end). 
 
 2. Good children are (in the place of) a great joy to their 
 
 parents (17). 
 
 3. The bold lion fiercely resists his enemies, but the timid 
 
 deer flees quickly (18). 
 
134 1NTRODUCTORT EXERCISES. 
 
 4. He besought his comrades not to desert him in this so 
 
 great danger (19). 
 
 5. That brave commander, Alexander, and that wise philoso- 
 
 pher, Socrates, were formerly greatly praised (19, note). 
 
 6. He said that Caesar was -not the. man to yield to danger or 
 
 death (21). 
 
 7. Cicero was the first to arise (21) in the Senate and accuse 
 
 Catiline of dreadful crimes. 
 
 8. Tall trees are first struck by lightning (21, 22), and a tall 
 
 tree is-blooming in my meadow (22). 
 
 9. No Christian (22) would-be-guilty-of (admitto in se) so 
 
 foul a crime. 
 
 10. The braver a man is, the more merciful is he towards the 
 weak (=every bravest man, &c., 22). 
 
 EXERCISE V. 
 
 1. Idleness is a very-degrading vice (23). 
 
 2. The horseman slew his embarrassed (impeditus) enemy 
 
 with a sword (24). 
 
 3. Cicero upbraided Catiline with great bitterness (24). 
 
 4. In appearance he was a lover of his country, in reality a 
 
 lover of himself (24). 
 
 5. In the judgment of all good men, he is convicted of base 
 
 deceit (24). 
 
 6. We have been waiting at home for you, dear George, now 
 
 many days (25). 
 
 7. The Gauls are said to have been naturally more impetuous 
 
 than firm (25). 
 
 8. The King gave his faithful body-guard (satelles) a great 
 
 reward for his so great services (27). 
 
 9. The exiled Emperor lived for several years in England, 
 
 near London (27). 
 
 10. For the last twenty years, many wars have been carried on 
 in Europe and America (27). 
 
INTRODUCTORT EXERCISES. 135 
 
 EXERCISE VI. 
 
 1. The city was taken in the fourth year after it had begun 
 
 to be besieged (28). 
 
 2. Trees and flowers bloom in summer, but decay and wither 
 
 in winter (28). 
 
 3. What is the price of wheat in the market to-day ? Seven 
 
 dollars (29). 
 
 4. The good citizen values money and magistracies highly, 
 
 but virtue and integrity more highly (29). 
 
 5. The saucy boy snapped his fingers and said, " I don't care 
 
 a straw for you " (29). 
 
 6. The King of the Cappadocians, (while) rich in slaves, was 
 
 without money (31). 
 
 7. Relying on (32) the valor of his army, Louis (Ludovicus) 
 
 Napoleon waged war on Germany. 
 
 8. The boy was born in high station, and is descended 
 
 from noble ancestors (32). 
 
 9. Desire of glory and wealth are great incitements to under- 
 
 going (gerundive) dangers (33). 
 
 10. A good general has need of valor, of prudence, of great 
 experience in warfare (33). 
 
 EXERCISE VII. 
 
 1. The harbor of Boston (adj.) is capable-of-holding (34) 
 
 many war-ships and merchant-vessels (navis oneraria). 
 
 2. The wise-man is no less firm of purpose than capable-of- 
 
 restraining (=powerful-over) evil desires (34). 
 
 3. Cicero was unjustly-accused of tyranny and cruelty, but 
 
 Catiline was justly condemned for treason and parri- 
 cide (36). 
 
 4. It-is-the-characteristic-of a prudent-man to deliberate care- 
 
 fully about important matters, and of a foolish-man to 
 act rashly (38). 
 
 5. This State is bounded on the east and south by the Atlan- 
 
 tic Ocean (39). 
 
136 INTRODUCTORT EXERCISES. 
 
 6. William Evarts, the illustrious lawyer, departing from his 
 
 home at Boston, fixed his abode at New York (Ebora- 
 cum-novum) (39). 
 
 7. The Germans attacked the army of Caesar in front and 
 
 rear on its march (39). 
 
 8. The rest of the Carthaginian ships were taken in the 6o;th 
 
 year after the foundation of the city (40). 
 
 9. Before the Birth of Christ, many wonderful portents ap- 
 
 peared (40). 
 
 10. The traveller arose by night, and about nightfall arrived 
 at home (41). 
 
 EXERCISE VIII. 
 
 (For this and the fifteen following Exercises, refer to 41, THE 
 PREPOSITIONS). 
 
 1. Do not try to do any thing beyond your strength. 
 
 2. The brave leader and above three hundred soldiers were 
 
 lately slain by the Indians. - 
 
 3. My friend,tstrive to be above deceit. 
 
 4. According to Thucydides, the Athenians managed their 
 
 affairs ill. 
 
 5. The good and the bad will each be rewarded according to 
 
 their deeds. 
 
 6. Immediately after his consulship, Cicero set out for his 
 
 country-house. 
 
 7. After your letter, mine was immediately read. 
 
 8. After the manner of bandits, they plundered all things, 
 
 public and private. 
 
 9. We ought all to live agreeably to nature. 
 
 10. The orator speaks as agreeably as possible to the truth. 
 
 EXERCISE IX. 
 
 1. We justly esteem cowardice among the basest vices. 
 
 2. The battle of Cannae (adj.) was memorable amongst 
 
 Roman defeats. 
 
2NTRODUCTORT EXERCISES. 137 
 
 3. He was the only young man among many who won for 
 
 himself fame. 
 
 4. The victorious general divided all the booty among his- 
 
 men (sui). 
 
 5. The city, taken by storm, was at the mercy of the con- 
 
 querors. 
 
 6. At the beginning of the battle, the enemy were courageous 
 
 and elated ; at the end, they were cast down and dis- 
 pirited. 
 
 7. Is your dear daughter at the point of death ? 
 
 8. The beautiful lady held a looking-glass before hei 
 
 9. Fifty tried warriors were on guard before the Praetorian 
 
 gate. 
 
 10. Through the whole of life, death and disease present them- 
 selves before the eyes of mortals. 
 
 EXERCISE X. 
 
 1. Verres was brought to trial before the jury, at the Instance 
 
 of Cicero (= Cicero being accuser). 
 
 2. The captive Gaul boldly made (habeo) a speech before the 
 
 general. 
 
 3. Sulla died nineteen years before the Consulship of Cicero. 
 
 4. The slanderer is beneath the notice of honorable-men. 
 
 5. What you say, my dear son, is beside the mark. 
 
 6. The heavy rains had caused the river to swell beyond its 
 
 bounds. 
 
 7. That so good a man should utter-falsehoods is beyond 
 
 belief. 
 
 8. The city praetor will, beyond question, be brought to trial 
 
 for extortion. 
 
 9. The Sabines, making an onset, all but took the city. 
 
 10. What else is the history of a nation, but the history of 
 men ? 
 
138 1NTRODUCTORT EXERCISES. 
 
 EXERCISE XI. 
 
 1. Maecenas had a splendid country-seat by the Anio. 
 
 2. When the messengers arrived, my sons and daughters were 
 
 sitting by me. 
 
 3. My son came to Boston by sea, but the journey is now 
 
 generally performed by land. 
 
 4. As often as she was by herself, the widow bitterly mourned 
 
 for her dead husband. 
 
 5. The robber committed the robbery by himself. 
 
 6. Our friend will set out for London on the ist of May, and 
 
 will return home by the I5th of October. 
 
 7. Caesar was informed by spies that the Helvetii had set out 
 
 from home with all their forces. 
 
 8. Some ancient writers said that Ireland was less by a half 
 
 than Britain. 
 
 9. By Heaven ! I implore you, do not commit so great a 
 
 crime ! 
 10. By what you say, the last hope is now lost to us. 
 
 EXERCISE XII. 
 
 1. The Helvetians thought their territories too small, consid- 
 
 ering their numbers. 
 
 2. During four years, he used to call upon me twice or thrice 
 
 a month. 
 
 3. During the night, my uncle saw a terrible dream. 
 
 4. During the reign of Charles I., the great English Rebellion 
 
 occurred. 
 
 5. During the reign of George III., the American Provinces 
 
 gained their liberty. 
 
 6. We are delighted with our house, except that it is not 
 
 large enough. 
 
 7. While I was dwelling in the country for two years, I sent 
 
 no letter except to you. 
 
 8. All bitterly abused me, with the exception of one, or, at 
 
 most, two. 
 
INTRODUCTORY EXERCISES. 139 
 
 9 Exclusive of his personal property, the wealthy merchant 
 
 has left his wife large estates. 
 
 10. Exclusive of many vices, Catiline, according to Sallust, 
 was guilty-of foul crimes. 
 
 EXERCISE XIII. 
 
 i. The barbarians of the Southern (australis) Islands used 
 small shells for money. 
 
 2 The fanciful-man (says Horace) exchanges round-build- 
 ings for square. 
 
 3. Let us fight bravely for our wives, for our children, for out 
 
 fatherland ! 
 
 4. I fear greatly for you, my son, but not at all for myself. 
 
 5. For Heaven's sake (=by the gods I beseech you) come 
 
 quickly and help me ! 
 
 6. The dishonest judge took bribes for deciding a suit con- 
 
 trary to evidence. 
 
 7. He had been chosen for the magistracy, which had been 
 
 appointed for the following year. 
 
 8. It is my intention to set out for Rome on the 2Oth.of 
 
 August. 
 
 9. I will wait for a longer time even than you have asked for. 
 10. Out of many such deeds, this one will perhaps serve for 
 
 an example. 
 
 EXERCISE XIV. 
 
 1. For my part, I intend to go to the country at the begin- 
 
 ning of next summer. 
 
 2. The soldiers in the camp are suffering severely for want of 
 
 provisions. 
 
 3. As for the physician whom you mention in your letter, I 
 
 know nothing about him*. 
 
 4 For success that youth is both too trifling and too idle ! 
 
 5 Take courage, worthy (excellent) friend : there is no cause 
 
 for despair ! 
 6. For all I know, the excellent poet has perished at S<*H. 
 
HO INTR OD UC TOR T EXER CISES. 
 
 7. Be assured you are no match for that strong and active 
 
 wrestler. 
 
 8. So much for that matter ! Now let us turn our thoughts 
 
 to other things. 
 
 9. It were better for many guilty-men to escape (avoid) pun- 
 
 ishment, than for one innocent-man to be condemned to 
 death. 
 
 10. He writes with such care that it is rare for him to make 
 
 even a single blot. 
 
 EXERCISE XV. 
 
 1. From his boyhood, he was eagerly-desirous of learning. 
 
 2. From the time when I returned home from England, I have 
 
 suffered severely with tooth-ache and head-ache. 
 
 3. From (being) poor, our friend has suddenly become rich. 
 
 4. From Romulus's name (says the legend) the city was 
 
 named Rome. 
 
 5. The French nation now is different from what it once was, 
 
 under the great Emperor. 
 
 6. Messengers came from Carthage to Hannibal to warn him 
 
 not to return home. 
 
 7. The German monarch wrested his kingdom from the Em- 
 
 peror of the Franks. 
 
 8. Rest from labor and care comes only to the dead. 
 
 9. He generally comes into the city to buy supplies once in 
 
 seven days. 
 
 10. Both in Herodotus and in Homer we find many incredible 
 tales. 
 
 EXERCISE XVI. 
 
 1. The Great Desert of Sahara extends about nine hundred 
 
 miles in width, and three thousand in length. 
 
 2. The orator exhorted the assembly in this manner for more 
 
 than two hours. 
 
 3. Paul, the famous Apostle, was born at Tarsus, was put in 
 
 prison at Philippi, and suffered death at Rome. 
 
INTRODUCTORY EXERCISES. 141 
 
 4. In my judgment, said Clearchus, the traitor deserves to be 
 
 put to death. 
 
 5. If we wish to live in accordance with Nature, we must live 
 
 in the country. 
 
 6. In addition to this, he had great patience and wonderful 
 
 fortitude. 
 
 7. In case of your father's death, what will you children do? 
 
 8. In comparison with those dwelling in hotter countries, we 
 
 deserve to be considered happy. 
 
 9. In consequence of the defeat at Cannae, great fear came- 
 
 upon the Romans. 
 
 10. Catiline was going in the direction of Gaul, when Q. Metel- 
 lus Celer met him. 
 
 EXERCISE XVII. 
 
 1. His liberality, skill in warfare, and good-fortune were in 
 
 favor of Caius Caesar. 
 
 2. It is said that the Emperor wishes to abdicate in favor of 
 
 his son. 
 
 3. In the midst of the enemy, many of whom he had slain 
 
 with his own hand, lay the leader stabbed with a sword. 
 
 4. The eloquent senator spoke long and vehemently in oppo- 
 
 sition to the proposal. 
 
 5. In point of numbers the Swiss nation is weak, but in point 
 
 of valor it is very strong. 
 
 6. Americans spare no toil in the search-after riches. 
 
 7. Your son is not deficient either in respect of natural-ability 
 
 or in knowledge. 
 
 8. In spite of all the brave citizens could do, the city was 
 
 taken by assault. 
 
 9. In spite of the intercession of many powerful men, the 
 
 murderer was hanged on the gallows. 
 
 10. Pythias was instead of a brother to Damon, and they were 
 mutually willing to die, each for his friend. 
 
H2 INTRODUCTORT EXERCISES. 
 
 EXERCISE XVIII. 
 
 1. Scotland is on the north-east of Ireland. 
 
 2. The enemies' army is within ten miles of the city. 
 
 3. The active father said to his idle son, " This comes of lazi- 
 
 ness." 
 
 4. To come of good parentage ought to be a stimulus t> good 
 
 deeds. 
 
 5. They found in the camp many vessels of gold and silver. 
 
 ( Turn two ways. ) 
 
 6. There are many men of ability, but only few of great 
 
 ability. 
 
 7. Very few of us now survive who remember the famous 
 
 general. 
 
 8. The Battle of Cannae was near (did not want much of) 
 
 bringing destruction to the City of Rome. 
 
 9. Rooks build their nests in the tops of trees. 
 
 10. Before rain, leaves and feathers float on the surface of the 
 water. 
 
 EXERCISE XIX. 
 
 1. He ordered the captain not to stir a finger's breadth from 
 
 that-spot (illinc). 
 
 2. Many persons, shut in by snow in the midst of the moun- 
 
 tains, perished of hunger. 
 
 3. News of the death of the general and his brave sojdiers 
 
 was first brought by an Indian scout. 
 
 4. I greatly desire to ascertain what has become of my class- 
 
 mate, who went many years ago to India 
 
 5. What think you of the measures which have recently been 
 
 brought before the Senate ? 
 
 6. Huntsmen and warriors ought to be swift of foot, ready of 
 
 wit, keen of eye, and bold of hand. 
 
 7. In the year 479 B.C., a great-sea-battle between the Greeks 
 
 and Persians took place off Mycale. 
 
 8. Many tombs of illustrious men are still standing on the 
 
 Appian Road. 
 
INTRODUCTOR Y EXER CISES. 143 
 
 9. Sardanapalus, as he rushed-forth to meet the enemy, had 
 
 a wreath on his head, and a sword in his right-hand. 
 10. Vienna (Vindoboua) is on the Danube, 340 miles from 
 Berlin (Beroliiium). 
 
 EXERCISE XX. 
 
 I Or the north, Spain is bounded by the Pyrenees Moun- 
 tains, on the west by the Atlantic Ocean. 
 
 2. Caesar and Ariovistus held a conference on horseback. 
 
 3. We heard the poet playing skilfully on the lyre. 
 
 4. The Spartan soldier was carried home to his mother on his 
 
 own shield. 
 
 5. When Darius was on the point of death, he wished lX>th 
 
 of his sons to come to him. 
 
 6. The Senators were mostly on Pompey's side, the common- 
 
 people on Caesar's, and many cautious men were on 
 neither side. 
 
 7. On the side of the Helvetii, the mountain gradually slopes 
 
 downj:o the plain. 
 
 8. My friend excuses himself from coming to my house on 
 
 the plea of health. 
 
 9. Bad men obey the laws, not willingly, but out of fear. 
 10. Boys often inflict injury, not on purpose, but out of fun. 
 
 EXERCISE XXI. 
 
 1. The famine in Egypt lasted many years (over many). 
 
 2. Hannibal the Carthaginian, (while) very young, was set 
 
 over the army. 
 
 3. The Isle of Man is over against Britain on the west. 
 
 4. It was owing to the rashness of Lentulus to a great extent 
 
 (magnopere) that Catiline's Conspiracy did not suc- 
 ceed. 
 
 5: Pending the giving of judgment, the defendant had com- 
 mitted suicide. 
 
 6. Themistocles persuaded his countrymen (civia) to build a 
 broad and high wall round Athens. 
 
144 INTRODUCTORT EXERCISES. 
 
 7. The Sabines sent ambassadors round to the neighboring 
 
 States to excite them to war against the treacherous 
 Romans. 
 
 8. Ever since America won her freedom (se in libertatem 
 
 vindicare), she has been increasing in riches, fame, and 
 power. 
 
 9. Never since the creation of the world have arts flourished 
 
 more than in the present day (= these times-). 
 10. It was chiefly through his wealth that Tarquinius Priscus 
 rose to be King of Rome. 
 
 EXERCISE XXII. 
 
 1. My friend will set out from Boston on the ist of August, 
 
 and will go first to Italy, then to Smyrna, and lastly to 
 the Crimaea. 
 
 2. The German Empire extends from the Baltic Sea to the 
 
 shores of the Adriatic. 
 
 3. Our soldiers fought with the Indians to a late hour in the 
 
 day, when they were overwhelmed by superior numbers 
 (multitude) of enemies. 
 
 4. Having slain many of the enemy, the small band of Ameri- 
 
 can soldiers was slain to a man. 
 
 5. To what end do you utter so many-words, which have no 
 
 bearing on (nihil pertinens) the subject. 
 
 6. The orator mounting the rostra, whence he had so often 
 
 before harangued the people, spoke to this effect. 
 
 7. To be dutiful to (one's) parents, loyal to (one's) father- 
 
 land, faithful to friends, firm towards foes-are (the char- 
 acteristics) of a good citizen. 
 8. To the best of his power Hector defended Troy against 
 
 the attacks of the Greeks. 
 
 9. The cavalry, under Philip's command (abl. abs.), charged 
 suddenly towards the hills which look toward the east. 
 
 10. Achilles felt towards Patroclus the love of a brother, and 
 
 therefore exacted heavy vengeance for his death (= him 
 slain). 
 
INTRODUCTORT EXERCISES. 145 
 
 EXERCISE XXIII. 
 
 1. Under the pretence of reconciling the alienated friends, by 
 
 treacherous calumnies he rendered them more hostile to 
 each other. 
 
 2. The Servians under arms have invaded the Turkish (Tur- 
 
 cicus) territories, and have fought some battles with 
 poor success (male gererej. 
 
 3. Under the appearance of a favor, he inflicted on his client 
 
 a severe injury (= affected his client with). 
 
 4. The Jews were continually fighting with one another, 
 
 when they ought to have been fighting against the 
 Romans. 
 
 5. Having the wind with him, the merchant sailed quickly 
 
 from Boston to Dublin (Eblana). 
 
 6. I will do at once what you request, with all my heart. 
 
 7. The decision of the suit rests-entirely with the chief judge 
 
 8. With heaven's aid, we may (licet) hope to overcome all 
 
 enemies, and surmount all dangers. 
 
 9. Cicero, with his usual wisdom, defended both the city and 
 
 himself against the desperate (perditus) conspirators. 
 10. The boy fell into the river and was within a very little of 
 being drowned. 
 
146 INTRODUCTORT EXERCISES. 
 
 EXERCISE XXIV. 
 
 1. Without (75) attempting to conciliate (45) ven his friends, 
 he (2) succeeded in conciliating even his enemies. 
 
 2. There is no doubt that (54) all the magistrates in the (16 
 end) populous city (40) of Antioch (64), (2) conspired to dethrone 
 the (18) just king Tullius. 
 
 3. What reason have you (page 94) for 'saying that the (18) 
 foolish young Balbus will not return (16) to Corinth ? 
 
 4. I am (6) persuaded that you are wrong and (45) nothing 
 shall persuade me (page 89) to believe otherwise. 
 
 5. I will help you if I (par. 1 1, page 8) can, but I fear youi 
 friends will (49) not help you, and, if (70) so, there is no doubt 
 (49) that you (49) will be banished. 
 
 6. (51) Whether this is true or false, it does not persuade me 
 (page 89) to believe that (18) the excellent Balbus is guilty. 
 
 7. I will ask him (51) whether he (64) wished to remain at (16) 
 Carthage, or to set out for (16) Rome. 
 
 8. He says the bird will never (page 98) grow tame (mitesco), 
 as long as it (n) is kept in a cage. 
 
 9. I fear (49) (64) he wished to converse with (page 56) me. 
 
 10. There is no doubt (49) that he (64) promised to come to 
 (16) Athens, (44a) but he did not perform (53) what he promised. 
 
 n. The (18) sagacious husbandman said the weather (dies, 
 pi. ) would (page 98) grow cold (frigesco). 
 
 12. I (2) expect that (51) whether he comes to Rome or re- 
 mains at Naples he will not be (2) secure. Nothing (hint* 7 and 
 appendix) but his (3a) departure from Italy will satisfy me. 
 (Turn by ita . . . si discesserit : see page 49.) 
 
 13. After the (18) thoughtless Tullius (u) had asked me (page 
 89) to dine with (page 56) him, he (page 88) promised to dine 
 with Balbus in the same day. 
 
 The reference is to the hints on page 131. 
 
GRADUATED EXERCISES. i 
 
 14. Did not you read the (19) two (binas) long, inte-iv-tin:,' 
 ktters (literre) (54 end) that my good fiiend Tullius sent im- U-n 
 days (page 35) before his death? 
 
 15. The hot-tempered (u) captain (hint 4 and appendix) 
 perceived (21) the treachery that was intended, (47) and answered 
 ( m & 43) m haste, (Oratio Recta, 78) "Do not (12) send mes- 
 sengers to these (19) blood-thirsty people. (Hint 7 ami appendix.) 
 The citi/.ens have sworn to admit nobody. (I lint 7 and appendix. ) 
 of you (12) will send some one, don't send anyone you have a 
 liking for. Send a bachelor." 
 
 1. I fear the prodigal (18) Kalbus will die within a week. If 
 so, all (54) that he has will be sold, and (45) nothing will be left 
 to support his child. But the man has no cause (75) for finding 
 fault with anyone but himself; for, after (postquam] he had (66) 
 squandered his father's patrimony, instead of (75) working (24) 
 with vigour, he left his family (2) at Rome (16) without (41) 
 money to (73) buy them bread, while (67) he travelled from 
 Rome to (16) Milan, and from Milan to Paris, begging from 
 (7) anyone that he met on (39) the way. I have often entreated 
 him to (73) improve, but all in vain. 
 
 2. What reason had yon for finding fault in this way with 
 your kind and considerate uncle Tullius? He did his best to 
 help you, and would have done more, if you had not refused to 
 obey him. I fear that in ten months' time you will repent, when 
 too late, of your disgraceful ingratitude ; meantime I entreat 
 you to remember your promise to improve. You bave not 
 much time to fulfil your promise for he writes to me that, when 
 he arrives at Naples, he intends to sell his estate there and to 
 return to Rome with speed. (75, 70, 49, page 89, u, 16.) 
 
 3. There is no doubt that if he pities us, he will be a gre.-it 
 protection to us in these sad calamities ; and indeed the town 
 
I4 GRADUATED EXERCISES. 
 
 has now been surrounded by the enemy with a ditch, so that 
 I fully expect that it will be captured in ten days from this 
 time. If our spies had warned us of this before the enemy came 
 to Naples, we should have been able to resist them with some 
 chance of success ; but, as it is, I fear that we shall be captured 
 or put to death to a man. One thing I wish to know before 
 you go, viz. on what day the general promised to send a messenger 
 to the town of Nola. (u, 12, 2, 64, 16.) 
 
 4. The excellent Balbus, when in his old age, while studying 
 Greek at Corinth, used to say that " he was afraid he should not 
 succeed, like Cato, in learning a new language, for his memory 
 failed him and his old energy had gone." And indeed, although 
 some one in Cicero says that he has no fault to find with old age, 
 we certainly must not expect to retain all the vigour of youth. 
 So do not promise to perform when old, what you have neglected 
 when young. I have often asked how old Balbus was when he 
 began Greek ; but I could never ascertain his exact age. But 
 I beKeve he was over seventy. (18, 70, 2, page 98, 12, 54, 64.) 
 
 5. Although my kind friend Tullius promised to help me, he 
 forgot his promise. The consequence was that (ut ) I was left, 
 while a boy, at Rome, without money to take me home ; and 
 there was no one to help me in my sore distress. Indeed, if the 
 worthy Balbus had not seen and pitied me, I do not know 
 what I should have done. His enemies used to say that he loved 
 no one, and that no one loved him ; but he asked me to come 
 home with him, and treated me all the time I was in his house, 
 like a man of humanity, as he was, with kindness and con- 
 sideration. (76, 18, 70, 73, 45, page 77, 60, 24.) 
 
 6. I don't know whether there is anything more agreeable 
 than to hear one's praises uttered by some one who is free from 
 flattery. The following remark of Cicero illustrates this better 
 than a thousand treatises on flattery: "The most subtle 
 flattery," says that author, "is^to tell your friend that he is 
 above flattery, and to say that you do not know how to flatter 
 him. " It happened once that a Roman senator, named Lentulus, 
 had a needy obsequious Greek fellow dining with him, who 
 tried in vain to flatter his host. Lentulus laughed at his 
 awkward attempts, and said, (Orat. Rect.} "I flatter myself, 
 sir, that I am indifferent to flattery." (Orat. Rect.) "Had I 
 known that," replied the Greek, " I should have known how 
 
GRADUATED EXERCISES. 149 
 
 to flatter you, but you have taught me a good lesson, and I will 
 not forget it." (8, 25, 12, 46.) 
 
 7. Almost all the men in the ship, when they saw nothing but 
 rocks and waves before them, thinking that the boat was not fit 
 for use, flung themselves into the sea and swam towards different 
 parts of the beach. But all to a man perished. Only the sailors 
 in the boat managed to escape to the shore. When they had 
 reached it, they asked the natives to grant them food, clothing, 
 and shelter : for they had nothing, not even a morsel of bread, 
 to satisfy their hunger. But, instead of friends, they f mnd 
 robbers drawn up to meet them on the besdi: they were then 
 deprived even of the little clothing they had, some of hem 
 were beaten, some of them threatened with death, one was 
 killed. In this extreme misery they were met by a band of three 
 thousand soldiers coining from the capital, which was ten miles 
 off. The commander of this force received them with kindness, 
 asked them whether the-' wished to go on to the capital or to 
 return at once to their country ; and, upon their deciding on 
 the former alternative, ordered that each should receive ten 
 pounds (Orat. Rect. and Orat. Obi.}. " Wh*t more," he 
 added, " can I do for you ? Only say and it shall be done." 
 
 8. In these great calamities, the brave and intrepid general, 
 instead of manifesting fear, turned to his dejected soldiers and 
 said, (Orat. Obl\ "Courage! all will be well! We shall 
 succeed past expectation, if we do our best to teach the enemy 
 that they can be resisted by brave men. Why do we delay 
 here in idle conversation when we ought to be up and doing ? 
 I am informed that 20,000 infantry, 4,000 cavalry, and fifteen 
 ships of war have been despatched against us ; but do not 
 fear them, for, while they are mercenaries, we are free men. 
 The enemy will certainly not pity you, and there is no hope but 
 in arms." 
 
 9. On the receipt of this sad news, the two generals, with 
 joyful looks intended to disguise* their feelings, began to ask their 
 guide how much stronger the enemy was than their own army. 
 On hearing that the Athenians had 3,000 more infantry than 
 they had, one of them turned to the other and said (Orat. Rect. 
 and Orat. Obi.}, "It is all over with these exultant soldiers oi 
 ours, if, instead of retiring, we march forward to Athens. You 
 see, by these two letters in my hand, that our largest army 
 
150 GRADUATED EXERCISES. 
 
 was yesterday defeated, almost all that survived were captured, 
 and no one but the consul returned to tell the tale. Though 
 the Athenians are treacherous enemies, they have no lack of 
 bravery, and I fear that, if we do not retreat, we shall repent." 
 After hearing these words, the other general asked for time to 
 deliberate before making up his mind what ought to be done. 
 
 10. The celebrated Caius was once asked whether the man 
 that believed nobody, or the man that believed everybody, was 
 the wiser. He answered, that every virtue was a mean between 
 two vices : that it was possible for us to believe too much, as 
 well as to believe too little (Orat. Obi.). " Cannot anyone see 
 that it is the duty of a wise man to distinguish between those 
 that are worthy, and those that are unworthy of credit ? for it is, 
 and always will be, a part of virtue not merely to desire to do 
 right, but also to determine what is right." While the wise 
 Caius was saying this, his pupils listened with attention. After 
 he had finished, some of them remained behind to ask him the 
 meaning of what, he said; others said that there was no truth 
 in il ; others left without saying a single word themselves, or 
 thinking in the slightest degree about what had been said by 
 their teacher. 
 
 11. In the war with the Germans, this cruel and arbitrary king 
 being desirous of making, in the night-time, some alterations in 
 his camp, ordered that, ander pain of death, neither fire noi 
 candle should be burning in the tents after a certain hour. He 
 went round the camp himself, to see that his orders were obeyed : 
 and as he passed by Captain Tullius' tent, he perceived a light. 
 He entered, and saw the captain seal a letter, which he had just 
 finished writing to his wife, whom he tenderly loved. ( Orat. Obi. ) 
 "What are you doingthere?" said the king. "Do not you know 
 the orders ? " Tullius threw himself at his feet, and begged for 
 mercy, but lie had no power, and made no attempt, to deny his 
 fault. (Orat. Feet.} "Sit down," said the king to him, "and 
 add a few words that I shall dictate. " The officer obeyed, and 
 the king dictated, (Orat. Obi.} "To-morrow I shall perish on the 
 scaffold." Tullius wrote it, and he was executed the next day. 
 
 12. Amid the shouting of the soldiers the voice of the general 
 was distinctly heard as he encouraged those who were advancing 
 to the charge, and rebuked the fugitives (Orat. Obi ). " Why, 
 he cried, "are you retreating? Do you hope to find safety in 
 
GRADUATED EX EXCISES. 151 
 
 flight? Do you not know that even the timid deer does not 
 always flee ? On the one side lies the sea ; and on the other the 
 enemy. Death is on both sides of you choose between a death 
 of honour and a death of shame. If even now you do not li^ht 
 for your country, it is all oveg with the glory of Rome." On 
 hearing these words, all the best of the soldiers recovered their 
 spirits, closed their ranks, and charged the enemy with fierce- 
 ness. The latter, unprepared for this sudden attack, fled some 
 in one direction, some in another ; none were spared, and not 
 a man out of that vast multitude was left to carry back home the 
 news of the sad result. 
 
 13. To this the general answered that he could not help recol- 
 lecting the great cruelty with which his soldiers had been treated 
 by the enemy at the taking of Nola, seven years ago (Graf. Obi.). 
 "Now," he said, "nothing but compassion prevents me from 
 destroying all of you to a man. You have not enough food to 
 satisfy you, not enough even to keep off famine. Whether you 
 are assisted by the Romans or not, it matters little ; all of you 
 must perish." Upon this, the ambassadors, bursting into tears, 
 promised that their countrymen should give all they had to the 
 soldiers if only their lives were spared. They did not say that 
 they had not deserved death ; for if they had said so, it would 
 have been of little use : but they flung themselves at the general's 
 feet, and again and again begged for pardon. He heard them in 
 silence, without raising them, or appearing in any way to be 
 touched by their calamities. 
 
 14. (Orat. Obi.) "If," said tne wise shepherd, "you had 
 observed the weather, as you premised to do, and had not forgotten 
 the instructions I gave, you would not have come into this painful 
 position. When, about a couple of weeks ago, an inundation took 
 place, all the shepherds that were in the neighbourhood collected 
 in haste and came to me for advice. On receiving my advice, 
 they thanked me for the pains I had taken, and assured me they 
 would carry out all that I had recommended. Consequently, 
 although another storm visited us in the following week, scarcely 
 anyone was injured, and I do not believe that you will lose a single 
 sheep for the future, if you will adopt the same course as they did. 
 Instead of weeping, give up your folly. Why did you come here 
 but to get advice? and why are we sent into the world but 
 to battle with troubles like these ? " 
 
1 52 GRADUATED LXERCISRS. 
 
 15. When the renowned Balbus, who had conquered Persia, 
 Tartary, and Syria, was defeated by Tullius, and taken prisoner, 
 he sat on the ground, and a soldier prepared a coarse meal to 
 appease his hunger. As this was boiling in one of the pots used 
 for the food of the horses, a dog put his head into it, but, from 
 the mouth of the vessel being too small, he could not draw it out 
 again, and ran away with both the pot and the meat. The 
 captive monarch burst into a fit of laughter : and, on one of his 
 guards demanding what cause upon earth could induce a person 
 in his situation to laugh, he replied (Orat. Obl.\ " It was but 
 this morning the steward of my household complained, that three 
 hundred camels were not enough to carry my kitchen furniture ; 
 now it is carried with ease by that dog, who hath carried away 
 both my cooking instruments and dinner." 
 
 1 6. On hearing this, the passionate queen replied in a fury 
 (Orat. Rect.} t "I am surprised that I have not persuaded you that 
 the course I recommended is the best under the circumstances, and 
 I regret that you seem to have forgotten the great kindnesses you 
 have received from me and from my predecessors on the throne." 
 Then, growing more and more angry as she proceeded (Orat. Obi. ) 
 ** For what purpose," cried she, "have we marched here but to 
 fight the enemy ? Do you wish to give up your rights and liberties 
 to the detestable Balbus ? Although I cannot dictate to you the 
 course you should follow, I entreat you to listen to me when I 
 appeal to you, in the name of the national honour, not to desert me 
 in this degrading position. Why did you promise to obey me, if 
 you did not intend to keep your word ? What have you asked 
 of me that you have not obtained ? Prepare, I beseech you, to 
 conquer or to die. If I had known that you wished to surrender 
 the city, I would never have come on this disgraceful journey." 
 
 17. (Orat. Obi.} " Can I ever fail," said the grateful Tullius, 
 "to recollect the favours I have received at your hands ? Depend 
 upon it, I will do my best to deserve success, even though I can 
 not attain it ; and you shall have no cause to regret the kindness 
 you showed me in my many severe troubles. But why do I 
 delay when I am called elsewhere by duty. Farewell ! " The 
 wise old j udge replied as follows : ( Orat. Red. ) "lam indeed glad 
 to hear what you say, and nothing will make me believe that you 
 are ungrateful. I advise you and your friends, instead of trying 
 any longer to conciliate Balbus, to collect together at once and 
 oppose him. I am sure he will never be persuaded by mere 
 
GRADUATED EXERCISES. 153 
 
 argument, and if he is not put down in a few months, you will 
 be seriously injured by him." 
 
 
 
 1 8. As the agents of the infamous queen were conducting her 
 unfortunate husband to the strong castle, ten miles off, at Cumae, 
 the scene of his tragic and sorrowful end, it came into their minds 
 that to prevent his being recognized by the people on the road, 
 it would be well to have his head and beard shaved. They ac- 
 cordingly commanded the prince to alight from his horse, 
 obliging him to sit down on a mound by the wayside ; meanwhile 
 one of the escort, who officiated as barber, brought a basin of 
 cold water taken out of the next ditch, observing to the king that 
 " for that time any water must do. " The prince, deeply affected, 
 burst into a Hood of warm tears, and seeing them fall into the 
 basin, he pathetically observed (Graf. Obi.), "Behold, monsters, 
 nature supplies what you would deny." 
 
 19. On hearing this the impetuous soldier, with his sword 
 drawn, rushed into the midst of his rebellious comrades, and cried 
 at the top of his voice (Orat. Obl.) t " Why do we stay here in 
 this narrow camp, waiting for the enemy to crush us ? Why do 
 we continue to obey an incapable general ? Did not you thank me 
 for the bravery I showed in representing your claims to the 
 general ? And did you not promise to join me ? Collect then at 
 once, and in haste. Seize the officers. Instead of delaying, adopt 
 the same course as our comrades in France ten days ago adopted, 
 and you will have no cause to regret the result. Success is 
 certain if you but do your best. Are you not ashamed of the 
 disgraceful position in which you have been placed for more than 
 a fortnight ? " Here he paused for a moment, and then added, 
 with bitterness (Orat. Rect.), "Perhaps some one will say we 
 must not forget the oath of fidelity we have sworn to our generals. 
 We will not forget it, on condition they remember the duty of 
 kindness towards us." 
 
 20.. In the rnidst of all these terrible disasters the brave 
 general was the only man that retained his presence of mind. 
 Collecting a few of the most resolute men in the army, he 
 reported them to act with energy, and not to forget the great glory 
 that awaited them if they could only force their way through the 
 enemy and reach a place of security (Orat. Obi.). "Why," 
 said he, " do you despair, wfcen I am your leader ? Has the 
 enemy any reason to boast of having ever defeated me ? It is not 
 
1 54 GRADUA TED EXERCISES. 
 
 the enemy that I fear, it is your timidity and irresolution. Before 
 you came to Naples you acted with the courage of soldiers j 
 now, you are in some strange way altered, and I do not know 
 what is the matter with you ; if you had marched with speed, 
 3 r ou would now be in Rome, and not a man there wouM dare 
 to oppose you. " 
 
 21. Remembering the cruelty with which their countrymen had 
 been treated by the enemy, the ambassadors came most unwill- 
 ingly on their humiliating errand, and, after they had arrived at 
 the capital and obtained an audience in the town-hall, no one 
 liked to be the first to speak. At last the excellent Tullius broke 
 silence with these words (Orat. Obi.)'. "Although we cannot 
 expect indulgence, and do not ask you to pity us, yet we think it 
 worth while to appeal to your sense of your own interest, and to 
 ask you to give us time to consult our government as to whether 
 we may surrender the city. Remember that it is sometimes pro- 
 fitable to spare the vanquished, and that mercy is sometimes the 
 mark of a politic as well as of a merciful man. The oldest of 
 your nobles cannot have entirely forgotten the great calamities 
 that befel you in the late war. What you have suffered once it 
 is possible, if not probable, that you may suffer again. How- 
 ever, if we cannot persuade you that our advice is the best, we 
 are prepared to resist you to the last." 
 
 22. (Orat. Obi.) "I was not so much injured by the wound," 
 cried the intrepid soldier ; " it was the man's treachery in attempt- 
 ing to stab me when off my guard that provoked and angered me. 
 I thank you with all my heart for the great kindness you have 
 shown me while ill, and now farewell. Believe me, I shall not 
 find it easy to forget the many benefits you have bestowed on me 
 in my severe trial. Why do not all men remember, as you do, 
 the claims of hospitality and mercy ? Can I ever repay you for 
 your trouble ? Never, except by imitating your conduct. Before 
 I knew you, I was persuaded that every Roman was a knave ; 
 now I know that wherever I go I shall find in all nations some 
 goodness, kindness, and compassion : and nothing shall make 
 me believe the contrary." 
 
 23. At the unfortunate battle of Damietta against the Saracens, 
 Louis IX. was taken prisoner. He bore this reverse of fortune 
 so nobly and so magnanimously that his enemies said to him in 
 admiration ( Orat. Jtect.), "We look upon you as our captive and 
 
GRADUATED EXERCISES. 155 
 
 our slave ; but though, in chains, you behave to us as if we were 
 your prisoners." The sultan having sent one of his gem-rals to 
 the king, to demand a very considerable sum of money for his 
 ransom, his majesty replied, (Orat. Obi.) "Return, and Ml 
 your master, that a King of France is not to be redeemed with 
 money : I will give him the sum he asks for my subjects that are 
 taken prisoners; and I will deliver up to him the city of Damictta 
 * for my own person." And such were the terms on which the 
 liberation of the King of France and his subjects was afterwards 
 effected. 
 
 24. A thousand promises cannot restore the reputation forfeited 
 by one dishonourable act, and it ought never to be forgotten that a 
 readiness to make professions and promises often implies a readi- 
 ness to break them. But, while we cannot help distrusting a 
 man that seems to promise much and feel little, we ought to be 
 on our guard against suspecting a man unduly. We ought to be 
 wise, without being cruel or suspicious. A man of good feeling 
 will do well to remember that he, as well as others, is liable to 
 go wrong, and the precept that enjoins upon us not to judge lest 
 we be judged will be always in his mind. If we remember this 
 solemn precept, we shall be more likely to act not only with 
 mercy but also with wisdom in our relations to our inferiors, and 
 there can be no doubt that, in spite of apparent failure, gentle- 
 ness will in the end succeed where cruelty will fail. 
 
 25. (Orat. Rect.) "Do you dare to say," cried the infuri- 
 ated mutineers, " that the soldiers in the camp did not again and 
 again entreat you to lead them against the enemy ? Have you 
 anything to reply to this accusation ? If so, speak : if not, con- 
 fess that you deserve death. " To these words the general replied 
 (Orat. Obi.), " I see that you are determined to murder me 
 Yet my oldest lieutenant will bear me witness that I shewed 
 my prudence in giving orders for a retreat. I had only 
 2,ooo men at that time with me. I did not know which of 
 the two roads through the wood led to Rome. Upon my pro- 
 posing a retreat to my officers, they all kept silence except two, 
 who expressed their approval of it ; and, in the end, it was unani- 
 mously determined on. As for the prisoners, it is true that none 
 were spared ; but the reason was that several tried to escape 
 after they had promised not to depart from the camp. What 
 more could anyone have done in that great calamity ? I for rny 
 part do not know, and I wish my accusers would each produce 
 his own plan." 
 
156 GRADUATED EXERCISES, 
 
 26. After inquiring why the principal men of wealth and 
 importance in the town did not interfere to prevent these great 
 tumults, Tullius unfortunately turned to the general Fabius and 
 said (Orat. Rect.), "I am surprised that your country has not 
 obtained more wisdom from its misfortunes. You asked me 
 just now wfiat we should have done if we had been conquered. 
 I reply, we should at least have learned moderation." On 
 hearing this, the general was filled with anger and replied (Oral. 
 Obl.}> " Why do you make such absurd remarks? Can I or 
 anyone avoid destiny ? What is the use of talking about what 
 might have happened ? It serves no purpose but that of irritating 
 the people. Cease to waste time in this way and depart from 
 Rome with speed, taking your goods with you. If you do not, I 
 promise to accuse you of treachery in three days, and you and 
 thousands of spies like you shall be put to death." Tullius 
 was persuaded that he meant what he said, and he therefore 
 collected his goods, bade farewell to his family, and, after asking 
 them to write to him as soon as possible, set out in haste for 
 Egeria, a town about twenty-five miles distant. 
 
 27. The wise and pious philosopher, turning to the rash and 
 foolish youth, replied with calmness (Orat. Rect.), "If, while 
 young, you do not pay attention to your work, you will find, when 
 old, that you will have cause to repent your folly. There are many 
 that are admired, while young, for their quickness, ingenuity, 
 and taste, and, if they had determined to work with steadiness, 
 they would have succeeded ; but, instead of doing so, they often 
 waste their time in an idle and frivolous manner, and thus they 
 are left far behind in the race of life by others of inferior ability 
 but greater application." To this the young man replied in 
 haste ( Orat. Obi.), " I have a great dislike to receive such lectures 
 from you ; and there is no reason why you should select me in- 
 stead of others, since others are as bad. Pray cease, if you don't 
 wish me to leave the room. I shall go home to my friends in 
 Italy at once. Can anything be more absurd than that a youth 
 of ability like mine should continue to remain at school ? " 
 
 28. It was customary with General Caius, when any of his 
 soldiers were brought before him for heinous offences, to say to 
 them, " Brother, you or I will certainly be hanged ; " which was 
 a sufficient denunciation of their fate. Once a spy, who was dis- 
 covered in his camp, was addressed in this language. Next day, as 
 the poor wretch was about to be led to the gallows, he pressed 
 
GRADUATED EXERCISES. 157 
 
 earnestly to speak with the general, alleging that he had some- 
 what of importance to communicate. The general, being made 
 acquainted with his request, said with roughness (Oral. ()&/.), 
 "It is always the way With these rascals; they pretend some frivo- 
 lous story, merely to reprieve themselves lor a few moments : 
 however, bring the clog hither." When he was introduced, the 
 general asked him what he had to say. (Orat. Rcct.) *' Why, my 
 lord," said the culprit, "when I first had the honour of your con- 
 versation, you were pleased to say that either you or I should be 
 hanged ; now I am come to know whether it is your pleasure to 
 be so, because, if you won't, I must; that's all." The general 
 was so pleased with the fellow's Lumour that he ordered him to 
 be released. 
 
 29. In this great perplexity I had recourse to the active, ener- 
 
 ?etic Tullius, one of my most intimate and affectionate friends, 
 took him by the hand, informed him of the difficulty in which I 
 was placed, and asked him to advise me what to do, and, if 
 possible, to assist me with money. He answered, with his usual 
 kindness, " If you had asked me to help you on the 23rd of March 
 I would have done so with pleasure, but now, instead of being 
 able to help you, I want help myself. It is true that a few days 
 ago I possessed friends, money, and arms ; but now I have not 
 even food enough to last me and my children for seven days. 
 Can you hope for help from me after hearing this ? " While he 
 said this, the tears ran down his face. I felt the sorrow with 
 which he was moved, and there was not a man present that 
 did not feel it as much as I did. For my part, I turned away 
 my face so as not to shew my feelings, and I told Tullius that I 
 would only consent to tak^ the command of the army on con- 
 dition that he had his property restored to him. 
 
 30. I once heard a Frenchman and a German arguing to- 
 gether as to which was the better country ; the former spoke of 
 the successes in war that had been obtained by his nation, and 
 enumerated the distinguished generals that had gained conquests 
 innumerable. The German reminded the Frenchman of the 
 discoveries in art and science that had been effected by his 
 countrymen ; the beauty of their literature, the world-wide 
 renown of their poets, their historians, and their philosophers. 
 While they were thus arguing together, it happened that an 
 Englishman came up, who put in a claim for his own country 
 in the following words (Orat. Obi.) : "Although we admit that 
 
158 GRADUATED EXERCISES. 
 
 the French have more taste, and the Germans have more depth 
 than our own countrymen, yet still in practical ability we think 
 that we are not inferior to any nation : for answer this question 
 What nation has succeeded like ours in administering its 
 affairs at once in peace and prosperity ? " 
 
 31. {Orat. Rect.) "If," said the philosopher, in answer to the 
 question of his brave young son, "if, in our great calamities, we 
 had been spared by the conquering Romans, perhaps we should 
 have pitied them in turn. But^ instead of pitying us, they treated 
 us with cruelty on all occasions ; I am therefore much surprised at 
 your regretting the rapidity with which the army of Carthage, 
 under the leadership of Hannibal, conquered the armies of Rome." 
 
 k Seeing that his son kept silence, the old man went on as follows 
 (Orat. Obi.}: " For my part, I am as happy to see the defeat of 
 Rome, as the Romans were to see that of Spain fifteen years ago ; 
 and I am sure, if you remember the past history of our nation, 
 that you will feel it to be your duty to do everything you can to 
 procure the defeat of the Romans and the success of the Cartha- 
 ginians. If you agree with me, I am satisfied ; if not, I will 
 endeavour to prove, by narrating the history of the past war, that 
 ambition, pride, avarice, and cruelty, must inevitably be the 
 ruin of any nation, and that Rome can form no exception to 
 this rule." 
 
 32. The angry and passionate queen, resenting the insult she 
 had received from all the wealthiest inhabitants of the city, 
 replied with bitterness {Orat. Obl.\ "The most exalted genius is 
 frequently overborne by envy. I am determined to do every- 
 thing that I can to effect the ruin of this rebellious people, for I 
 am certain that their wants will never be satisfied, and that 
 until their wants are satisfied they will never cease rebelling. 
 They would persuade me, forsooth, that the sovereign is made 
 for the nation, instead of the nation being made for the 
 sovereign ; they complain that I neglect public merit, and 
 lavish the revenue of the state upon unworthy favourites, and that 
 all the most important offices are bestowed by favour. Far my 
 part, instead of being moved to pity by such complaints as these, 
 I shall collect my most faithful troops in haste ; I will then 
 surround the city, arrest the ringleaders, banish some, fine others, 
 kill others, and thus establish peace." 
 
 33. It is said that even this hard and cruel tyrant was touched 
 with gratitude at the haste with which the poor lame cobbler had 
 
GRADUATED EXERCISES. 159 
 
 come (o his assistance. After he had remarked that the favourites 
 of kings were often the most deserving men in a country, he 
 proceeded to describe the rebellion and the measures that 
 had been taken to put it down (Orat. Rect.}. "If," he said, 
 " my generals, instead of sparing the people, had destroyed all the 
 forests in the country, broken down the bridges and burned the 
 villages, we should in all probability have succeeded, and we 
 should not now be obliged to ask for peace. We should 
 not have before us the spectacle of a city so vast and beautiful 
 as this, besieged on all sides by enemies whom it is impossible 
 to resist, and equally impossible to persuade to peace." Then, 
 turning to the bystanders, who displayed much emotion at his 
 words, he said (Orat. Obi.}, " Leave me; why do you delay? 
 Make the best of your way to the nearest refuge, for there is 
 nothing to prevent the enemy from at any time taking the city ; 
 and, while I value your sympathy, I do not feel justified in en- 
 dangering your safety." 
 
 34. I cannot be persuaded that you have done wisely in 
 not visiting the castle. It is a place worthy of being seen for 
 its own sake, and 1 hardly think that any is more strongly 
 fortified both by nature and art ; and to those who have read 
 the chronicles of England it is rendered more memorable by a 
 beautiful instance of filial piety. Two hundred years ago, the 
 town was besieged and greatly straitened for want of provisions. 
 No one could be found bold enough to undertake the dangerous 
 task of conveying supplies thither, until a youth, whose father 
 was in the garrison, came forward and accepted the duty. For 
 several nights he crossed the lake, climbed the wall, and placed 
 provisions at a spot where his father would find them. At 
 length he was taken prisoner and sentenced to death, to strike 
 terror into anyone who might be disposed to render similar help 
 to the besieged. It was the good fortune of one of my own 
 ancestors to obtain pardon for him. "With considerable danger to 
 himself, he procured an interview with the general, and addressed 
 him pretty nearly as follows: "Affection to a father is the 
 source of patriotism. You cannot put the youth to death without 
 also causing pain to every good son." Not to make a long 
 tale, he succeeded in his prayer, and the youth was spared. For 
 my part, ever since I heard this story, I have always felt proud of 
 my ancestor's conduct, and never think of the old castle but with 
 feelings of interest and pleasure. 
 
160 GRADUATED EXERCISES. 
 
 35. During the wars in Flanders, in the reign of Queen Anne, 
 when the Duke of Marlborough and Prince Eugene commanded 
 the allied army, a soldier, in the division of the latter, was con- 
 demned to be hanged for marauding. The man happened to be 
 a favourite with his officers ; they therefore applied to the 
 Duke of Marlborough, begging his grace to interfere. With his 
 usual good nature, he accordingly went to Prince Eugene, who 
 said (Orat. Obi.} he never did, and never would, consent to the 
 pardon of a marauder. (Orat. Rect.} "Why," said the duke, "at 
 this rate, we shall hang half the army ; I pardon a great many." 
 (Orat. Obi.) " That," replied the prince, "is the reason that so 
 much mischief is done by your people, and that so many suffer 
 for it ; I never pardon any, and therefore there are very few to be 
 punished in my army." The duke still urged his request ; on 
 which the prince said (Orat. Obi.), " Grant me this favour. 
 Make inquiry which of us has executed most men, and if your 
 grace has not executed more than I have done, I will consent to 
 the pardon of this fellow." The proper inquiries were accord- 
 ingly made, and it appeared that the duke had executed far more 
 than Prince Eugene, on which he said to the duke ( Orat. Rect. ), 
 " There, my lord, you see what example can do. You pardon 
 many, and therefore you are forced to execute many ; I never 
 pardon one, therefore few dare to offend, and of course but few 
 suffer." 
 
 36. After Tullius had heard that the brave young soldier Balbus 
 had returned to the town of Tarentia, forty miles distant, he 
 went and visited him to see whether he was contented with his 
 position in the army, and to ascertain how matters were going on 
 in the camp. He was delayed for a day or two by the illness of 
 an intimate friend, but three days after Balbus' return, Tullius 
 arrived at Naples and called on Balbus. On seeing him, he 
 addressed the young soldier thus (Orat. Obi.): "However 
 much, my dear Balbus, I am gratified by the report of your 
 many illustrious achievements, yet I feel that as long as you 
 are in the army, your conduct can never entirely meet with 
 my approval. For what, after all, is a soldier ? He is a man 
 that will cut anyone's throat for a shilling a day." Hereupon 
 the impetuous Balbus replied in haste (Orat* Obl.\ "Why do 
 you talk like this ? Pray cease. Do you not know that a soldier 
 may sometimes be one of the most de-serving men in the country? 
 Besides, whether your observations are true or false, they are sure 
 to be useless, as long as human nature remains as it is." 
 
GRADUATED EXERCISES. i i 
 
 37. " We should not have taken these harsh measures," said 
 the ferocious old general, " against all the most respectable citizens 
 in Rome, if we had not known for certain that the people in 
 Rome will never be quiet, and will never submit to our dominion 
 in peace." He then continued to speak as follows : " Even all 
 the brilliant successes of our army have been unable to convince 
 the Italians that resistance is impossible, and that it is absolutely 
 necessary for them to come to terms. There will always be 
 found cruel generals and undisciplined and disobedient soldiers, 
 and I confess that, although we have done our best to avoid 
 injuring private individuals, yet the life of the agriculturists in 
 Italy during the past four months has been by no means an 
 enviable one. But did you not know when you went to war 
 the risk you were incurring ? And did not we take up arms to 
 improve our condition if possible ? Cease, then, from unavailing 
 complaints." 
 
 38. (Orat. Rect.} " Look at my withered body," said the camel 
 to Jupiter. " Why have you not given me the plumpness of the 
 horse, the ox, and the elephant ? Why have you given me so few 
 muscles, and made me so ugly? And why have you compelled 
 me to dwell in a dry, barren, and flat country like Arabia ? ' To 
 these complaints Jupiter answered with a smile {Orat. Obl\ 
 " My excellent friend, you will find that I have a reason for all 
 I have done. If I have made you lean and -deprived you of all 
 superfluous muscles and flesh, it is because in the dry barren 
 deserts of Arabia it is not possible to obtain much food. Why 
 else did I give you this powerful jaw-bone except that you might 
 chew the hardest nutriment ? For the same reason I gave you a 
 small stomach to prevent your eating too much. And as for my 
 obliging you to live in Arabia, how, with your fat, fleshy feet, 
 could you ascend the heights of mountains, or walk without 
 slipping in the mud of marshy districts ? Instead of talking any 
 more nonsense, be kind enough to return to your work." 
 
 39. (Orat. Obi.} " If the matter is neglected longer," said the 
 wise Tullius, "the country will not be safe. We ought not to 
 hesitate in this great calamity to choose a general to meet the 
 enemy before t>ey arrive at Rome ; and nobody, I think, will 
 deny that we ought not to have hesitated when the Cartha- 
 ginians were first collecting their forces. For when they were at 
 the river, not more than ten miles off, would it not have been 
 easy for us, even with a small number of men, to repel a reguiai 
 
 M 
 
1 62 GRADUATED EXERCISES. 
 
 army? We have lost an opportunity ; but now, without delaying 
 longer, let us collect with speed our bravest citizens, and before 
 the enemy advances further I hope to crush him with ease." 
 When they heard this, the soldiers shouted for joy ; declared 
 to a man that they would have Scipio for their general ; crossed 
 the bridge with speed 5 marched for three days through a waste 
 district called Gergovia ; met the enemy suddenly near the Anio, 
 and completely defeated them. 
 
 40. When Field Marshal Balbus was taken prisoner at the battle 
 of Corioli, a Numidian hussar, who seized him, perceiving that he 
 had a valuable ring, said, "Give me your ring." The marshal 
 instantly complied with the demand of the captor. A short time 
 alter, when he was liberated by General Tullius, and the 
 Numidian hussar had become a prisoner in his turn, he with great 
 unconcern drew the marshal's ring from his finger, and presenting 
 it to him said (Or at. Obi.}, " Since fate has turned against me, 
 take back this ring ; it belonged to you, and it would not be so 
 well to let others strip me of it." Pleased with the honesty of 
 the hussar, the marshal bade him keep the ring in remembrance 
 of his having once had its owner for his prisoner. 
 
 41. Without attending to the arguments of the merciful officer, 
 the ferocious and passionate general replied (Orat. Rect.}, 
 " Whether you are speaking the truth or not, what you say has no 
 effect upon me, and I never asked you whether it was ymir desire 
 to spare the lives of the citizens of Corioli, a city that has done us 
 as much harm as it possibly could. What I asked was, how soon 
 it could be taken, for there is no doubt it will be taken sooner 
 than people think. Now, instead of giving me advice, I order 
 you, as I ordered you ten days ago, to collect all your bravest 
 soldiers and to prepare for immediate action." On hearing this, 
 the young man replied (Orat. Obi.}, " If I have spoken freely, 
 it is because I am persuaded that unless you do your best to 
 conciliate the men of Corioli, and unless you promise to send 
 them back all the hostages they have given us, not merely will 
 you lose the hope of success, but the very safety of the army 
 will be in danger. You may blame yourself for your present 
 misfortunes, for you might have managed matters very differently. 
 If you had taken the advice I gave you, yoii would not now be 
 in this great difficulty. Every town in Italy would favour you, 
 and not a man would wish to oppose your progress. 1 know 
 of my own knowledge, that 300 of the bravest men of Naples 
 determined to help you on condition you did not storm Corioli." 
 
GRADUATED EXERCISES. 163 
 
 42. (Orat. Obi.} "I may well complain of the neglect with 
 which I have been treated by my best friends," cried the proud 
 and passionate queen. " I have no one to help me, no one to 
 advise me \vliat to do in this great calamity. Instead of coming 
 to this dangerous place I might have travelled with ease to the 
 city of Athens, which is not more than thirty-two miles off, and 
 if I had done so I should have escaped my cruel enemies, and now 
 I should be in safety." On hearing this, the aged Tullius, the 
 wisest of her nobility, said (Orat. Obi.}, " Why does your majesty 
 complain? For these last two years you have -been desiring 
 nothing so much as an opportunity for engaging with the enemy 
 a desire that is now on the point of being gratified. Now, 
 therefore, that the opportunity has arrived, why do you delay 
 to avail yourself of it ? Why does the army remain here inactive ? 
 I ask your pardon for speaking with freedom, but if your majesty 
 does not communicate to the officers the exact time at which >ou 
 will fight to-morrow, and the army is not prepared for an 
 immediate conflict, the mercenaries, with their usual fickleness, 
 will desert your standard, and you cannot possibly hope to 
 succeed." 
 
 43. (Orat. Rect.} "I wish you would tell me, "said the wise 
 philosopher to the young man, "what is a worthy object to 
 pursue through life." (Orat. Qbl} " Tne first thing," said the 
 young man, " that I should like to do, would be to succeed in 
 business; then, after amassing a considerable fortune, I should 
 like to rise till I had become one of the principal persons in my 
 neighbourhood ; then there are all sorts of prospects that would 
 be open for me. With a little tact, and the judicious expen- 
 diture of a little money, I could get into parliament ; and when 
 a man is once in parliament, there is no limit to the career 
 before him." (Orat. Rect.} "But what do you expect to do in 
 parliament?" said the philosopher. (Orat. Rect} "I should 
 endeavour to create a sensation," replied the young man. (Orat. 
 Obi.} *' But do not you think," said the philosopher, " that such 
 an object as this is unworthy of a really noble man ? Instead of 
 endeavouring to make a sensation, had you not better find cut 
 what work you are best fitted to do, and do that as well as you 
 can ? Believe me, the highest object of a human being is to 
 make the world a little better for his having lived, and not 
 to make a sensation." 
 
 44. When the Samnites under their brave king Tullius defeated 
 the Etrurians in the battle of Cumse, the King of Etruria, seeing 
 
164 GRADUATED EXERCISES. 
 
 his troops flee, asked what was the number of the Samnites who 
 were making all this slaughter ? He was told that it was only 
 King Tullius and his men, and' that they were all on foot. (Orat. 
 Rect.} "Then," said the crafty Etrurian, "God forbid that such 
 a noble fellow as King Tullius should march on foot," and sent 
 him a noble charger. The messenger took it and said, (Orat. Obi.} 
 " Sire, the King of Etruria sends you this charger, that you may 
 not be on foot. Be pleased to accept it as a token of his respect.- 
 The brave Tullius was as cunning as his enemy, and ordered one 
 of his squires to mount the horse in order to try him. The squire 
 obeyed : but the horse proved a fiery one, and the squire being 
 unable to hold him in, he set off at full speed to the pavilion of 
 the King of Etruria. The king expected he had caught King 
 Tullius, and was not a little mortified to discover his mistake. 
 
 45 . After he had with patience heard the rash young soldier 
 make his defence, the general addressed him in severe tones as 
 follows (Orat. Obi.} : " I feared some time ago that I had made a 
 mistake in sending you to take the command of the forces in 
 Rome, and now I know for certain that you are not yet fit for the 
 command of a large army ; I shall therefore order you to return 
 to your home ten days hence. You have pleaded that your 
 intentions were good ; but that is not the question. There is 
 no one but believes in the rectitude of your intentions, and thinks 
 you honest and well-meaning ; but however well-meaning one 
 may be, a man is not fit (to) for command without self-control, 
 tact, judgment, and energy ; and these qualities you do not 
 possess." The young man in sorrow replied (Orat. Rect. ), " I have 
 nothing more to say in self-defence ; I feel that I no longer deserve 
 your confidence ; and though I am conscious that I meant well, 
 yet I must admit that I ought not to have left the city against 
 orders. If I had known my defects sooner, I should not have 
 asked you to appoint me a general. " 
 
 46. (Orat. Rect.} "Away with these compliments," said the 
 grateful Balbus ; " the attachment between us is too great for it to 
 be right, either that you should offer me thanks for any attention, 
 or I you. I have not paid you an attention, I have repaid it. I 
 think that I have received acknowledgment enough indeed, if 
 what I have taken real pains to do be acceptable to you. There 
 is no reason why you should thank me, if for your numerous 
 uncommon kindnesses towards myself I have repaid you with 
 this trifling service. So far from deserving praise, I should 
 
GRADUATED EXERCISES. 165 
 
 have deserved to be considered most ungrateful if I had failed 
 my friend. Whatever 1 possess, whatever can be done by my 
 pains, reckon as much your own as your own property. I think 
 that 1 have received a benefit in the kind construction you 
 have put upon my services. If you heartily approve my 
 services, mind you make a more frequent use of them. I shall 
 not believe that you are pleased with what I have done, unless, 
 whenever you want anything of mine, you take whatever you 
 like, instead of asking for it." 
 
 
 
 47. Amid a profound silence, the renowned and eloquent Tullius 
 arose and spoke as follows (Oral. Obi.) : "Why do we delay? 
 Is the crafty and cruel Balbus delaying? Do we not know for 
 certain that he is making it his object to betray his country? 
 Beware of regarding your private interests and disregarding the 
 interests of the public. If you delay, it is all over with the state ; 
 either Rome or Balbus must fall : choose which shall perish." 
 The senate heard the orator with admiration, adopted his 
 opinion, and decreed that the consuls should provide for the safety 
 of the country. On receiving this intelligence, the conspirators, 
 in fear and trembling, betook themselves with all diligence to 
 their respective homes, and none dared to utter so much as a 
 word in opposition. They fled in different directions, some to 
 Sicily, some to Athens ; poor old Cathegus, now an old man of 
 seventy-three, was the only one left at Rome. 
 
 48. (Orat. Rect.) "There is no doubt," said the ferocious 
 general, " that all that have been taken wfth arms in their hands 
 will be banished ; for indeed it will be the height of folly, if 
 onen, who without any prospect of success rebel against their 
 king, are spared, and allowed to go unpunished." To this the 
 wise and merciful king replied with gentleness, but at the same 
 time with firmness (Orat. Obl.}> " There is certainly a great deal 
 in what you say, and I recognize the zeal with which you have 
 espoused my cause ; but remember that because a man pities the 
 innocent, it does not necessarily follow that he is weak-minded. 
 Indeed, oppression is as impolitic as it is cruel. Why, then, do 
 we delay to throw open the prisons, and to allow all the 
 best of the prisoners to return with speed to Rome, especially 
 as they have not bread enough for ;he people there ? I, for my 
 part, will *ake care of the destruction of the bridge that spans 
 the Tiber, and I hope that in a few days, by surrounding the city 
 with a wall, we shall make the rebels see ihac their position 
 is untenable, and we shall induce them to lay down their arms.' 
 
166 GRADUATED EXERCISES. 
 
 49. Tullius, turning with a look of contempt to Balbus, 
 addressed him in these words \Orat. Rect.} : "I do not know 
 what reason there is why you should think you may keep your 
 own property, and use that of other persons. There never was 
 any reason why you should think so. What would you have 
 thought, if a man had violently entered your house, beaten 
 your servants, insulted your family, taken your money and all 
 your valuables, and refused to make satisfaction? But this is 
 just what you have done. I ask you then with what decency 
 you can attempt to excuse such conduct. Actions like these have 
 made you so hated that there is not a man in your neighbourhood 
 but would be delighted to hear of your death. Indeed, you have 
 so alienated all, that even your friends without exception desert 
 you. A man must be a villain indeed to be deserted by his 
 friends, and not to have a single person to take his part. Where 
 is your old reputation for spirit and courage which you had when 
 a youth ? If you had a spark of courage, you would not bear 
 such ignominy with tameness." On hearing this, the wretched 
 Balbus, spite of his ordinary impudence, was touched with remorse. 
 He went home, told his servant he was ill, shut himself up in his 
 bedroom, made his will, took out of a chest a good stout rope, 
 fixed a nail in the wall, fastened the rope to the nail, and hung 
 himself thus endeavouring to heal a life of error by one last 
 fatal error. 
 
 50. When the Gauls unde*r the command of Brennus had got 
 possession of Placentia, they carried their cruelty to their Italian 
 prisoners* to the severest extremities, making them work like 
 horses at their mills, and in drawing water. The acute and 
 learned Balbus, in his travels, relates that he met some of these 
 unfortunate wretches on his first entrance into the city, who had 
 been liberated that morning from their dungeon, and who were 
 endeavouring literally to crawl to the village of Alma, which was 
 but ten miles off. (Omt. Obi.} "The legs of these poor creatures 
 were swollen to a size that was truly horrible, and their eyes 
 wereterrible from inflammation. Some, too weak to support them- 
 selves, had fallen on the sand, where they were exposed to the 
 scorching beams of the sun. Immediately on seeing Balbus and 
 his companions, they uttered such moans as might have pierced 
 the hearts of their cruel oppressors, They begged for water, but 
 the travellers had none to give them : and all they could do was 
 to prevail on one or two of the men of Alma to promise to take 
 core of them until relief could be obtained. Of these unfortunate 
 
GRADUATED EXERCISES 167 
 
 captives, upwards of forty perished every day from the miseries 
 to which their conquerors exposed them." 
 
 51. The industrious and acute philosopher turned with calmness 
 to the rash young man and said (Oral. Obi.), " I am surprised at 
 your acting with such thoughtlessness and want of good feeling ; 
 you have occupied now for ten years an honourable position in 
 the estimation of all Rome, and you would now give up this 
 position. Instead of paying attention to the duties of your 
 office, you propose to bury yourself in a life of contemplation, 
 and to desert your family. If ten days ago your best friends had 
 known of your intention, and the haste with which you intended 
 to leave them, they would all to a man have expressed to you the 
 sorrow with which they received your determination. Give up 
 then this hasty, thoughtless plan ; your friends will be delighted 
 to receive you hgme. Did you not hear yesterday that your 
 most faithful servants were seeking you everywhere ? " 
 
 52. This great and illustrious general would soon have obtained 
 all the help he wanted from his countrymen, and would *have 
 driven the enemy out of the country in disgrace, had he not been 
 prevented by the arrival of his great adversary Tullius. As soon 
 as the latter reached the camp he began to sow discontent among 
 all the bravest soldiers. He went first to one, then to another, 
 and endeavoured to persuade them to mutiny by such words as 
 these (Orat. Obi.) : " Do you know that your general means to 
 betray you into the hands of the enemy upon the first opportunity ? 
 If not, why is the camp placed in this disadvantageous position? 
 Why are we wasting our time instead of marching upon the un- 
 defended city of Nuceria, barely ten miles away ? Rouse up your 
 courage, and depend upon it that, if you are prepared to resist 
 the commands of your general, I shall be ready to put myself at 
 your head and to take upon myself the responsibility of leading 
 
 ou in this terrible crisis. .Once this would have been difficult, 
 ow nothing prevents you obtaining your rights once for all." 
 
 yc 
 
 N 
 
 53. The general made answer as follows (Orat. Obi.): "The 
 enemy that you have been so long seeking is now only two miles 
 distant : prepare then to conquer 01 to die. I will send spies to 
 bring me word of their numbers and the position of their camp ; 
 this done, I must entrust the rest to you. Remember that your 
 country depends upon you. If you conquer, you will enjoy 
 case, plenty, freedom, and glory ; if you are defeated, you wilJ 
 
I6S GRADUATED EXERCISES. 
 
 experience the only treatment you will deserve, that of slaves: up 
 then and quit yourselves like men. Ten days ago you were 
 eagerly longing for a battle : do you now shrink back ? Ask 
 yourselves whether you prefer a glorious death or an in- 
 glorious flight." At these words the soldiers were filled with 
 fury ; they cast aside fear, they forgot their complaints, and pro- 
 mised one another to conquer or to die : and there was not one 
 who thought victory for a moment doubtful. Soon afterwards 
 all retired to their several tents, and there, by the command of the 
 general, rested themselves till night brought darkness and the 
 conflict. The general then ordered all the bravest centurions to 
 appear before him, for the purpose of receiving their several 
 instructions. 
 
 54. After the general had cast round his eyes, and had examined 
 each rank in turn, he turned to the place whe.re all the bravest 
 officers were assembled, and said (Orat. Rect.}\ "Send some 
 one at once to tell the king that I have examined the soldiers, 
 and that no one here is guilty." After these words he turned 
 towards the soldiers. He was ashamed of them, he said (Orat. 
 Obi. ) ; he could scarcely believe them capable of such gross in- 
 gratitude and cowardice. Why had they arms in their hands 
 but to fight against the enemies of their country ? " Why," he 
 added, "do we delay here, as though we did not purpose battle. 
 Away with such shameful cowardice ! (Orat. ObL still.) If you 
 fight bravely, I promise you i6/. a-piece ; if not, you shall be 
 decimated, and no Englishman will assert that I have acted with 
 harshness towards you. Ten days ago you were all clamouring 
 for battle ; why do you now decline it ? When in the city you 
 cried for war ; now that you are in the camp do you cry for 
 peace?" Although the general had not been at the head of his 
 army more than three months, the soldiers had learned to respect 
 him. He was only thirty-two years old, but in this great peril 
 he displayed the sagacity of age with the courage of youth. 
 Though therefore he addressed them with bitterness and with 
 reproaches, they listened to him in silence, instead of threatening 
 him as they had threatened their former commander. 
 
 55. The inhabitants of this island were so bold that they 
 would have preferred a thousand deaths to disgrace if the choice 
 had been necessary. One brave farmer was asked why he would 
 sooner die nobly on the field of battle than live ignobly at home. 
 lie answered ( Orat. Rect. ), " Because I am more afraid of shame 
 
GRADUATED EXERCISES. 169 
 
 than of death." It happened once that thev were invaded by 
 the powerful nation of the Ventidii, who landed on their shores, 
 marched up to their capital, devastated the country all round, and 
 then laid siege to the city. The citizens determined to resist 
 with boldness. Instead of throwing themselves at their enemies' 
 feet, they sent away their families, their old men, and their 
 treasures, and prepared to resist with desperation. Though they 
 were prevented by scruples from committing suicide, they pro- 
 mised one another to fight so desperately thit the enemy should 
 not take them alive. When they were all assembled in arms, 
 their general addressed them thus (Orat. Rect. and Obi.} : " Re- 
 member, citizens, that victory or death awaits you. I will say 
 no more ; the enemy is at the gates : what reason is there for 
 delaying ? " 
 
 56. The despairing husbandmen, looking at the rising flood, 
 exhorted one another to patience, and the eldest of them all, turning 
 to his fearful companion? said (Orat. Rect.}> " Be of good cheer ! 
 There are not less than 300 of us. Yesterday I sent a messenger 
 to ask for help ; to-day I have sent another to report our penrous 
 condition. I am persuaded that our houses, if destroyed, will 
 easily be repaired, and we shall recover all the cattle that survive 
 the deluge." Then, hearing a few of them murmur, he con- 
 tinued thus (Orat. Obi.} : " We must do our best not to disgrace 
 our reputation, for indeed we are in such a terrible position that 
 we need all our faculties. What help is there except in industry 
 and courage ? Nothing but God and our right hands can rescue 
 us from destruction. I am now old, and very different from 
 what I was when a boy ; but I will use all the strength I have 
 in the task of assisting the wretched, and I am persuaded that 
 there is not one of you that will not do the same. I hoped, indeed, 
 that the waters would have diminished five days ago ; but, 
 though you are disappointed, remember that you are English- 
 men, and, whether the waters rise or fall, behave as English- 
 men should. To work ! why do we wait longer ?" 
 
 57. The citizens at first stood by in silence, and all the most 
 respectable of them manifested, by the expression of their coun- 
 tenance, the sorrow they felt. At last the eldest of their number, 
 on hearing of the taking of the city, after asking her majesty to 
 allow him to speak, stepped forward and addressed the queen 
 a? follows (Orat. Obi.}: "Your majesty has asked us what 
 cause we have to complain, and has declared that as long as 
 
i jo GRADUA TED EXER CISES. 
 
 discontent prevails in our country prosperity will not increase. 
 Suffer us, however, to remind you that your generals, without even 
 hearing what we have to say in our defence, have razed four of 
 our best towns, and are even now butchering 300 men a day. The 
 meekest and mildest will turn upon an enemy that threatens 
 their race with extinction; already there are rumours of re- 
 bellion; these rumours will soon increase, and rebellion will 
 commence. We should have resisted this cruelty before now, 
 if we had been able, and we are sure that if your majesty does not 
 as soon as possible command these cruel generals fo desist, you 
 will soon not have One faithful subject in the country. Pardon 
 our freedom. Is it not much better that we should say what we 
 feel than that your Majesty's empire should be endangered ? " 
 
 58. On hearing this, the brave but rash general replied in anger 
 (Orat. Obi.) : " Soldiers ! I am surprised at your cowardice ; 
 and I did not think that the men whom I have been commanding 
 for twenty years would have deserted me in this emergency. Is 
 there any hope of success except in bravery? Did you not 
 promise when you swore fidelity to me nine years ago, soon 
 after the capture of the two camps near Naples, that you would 
 always obey the slightest intimation of my wishes? Away ! 
 You are no longer worthy to be my soldiers, nor am I coward 
 enough to be a fit general for you and the like of you." At 
 these words, the most respectable of the soldiers were much 
 grieved. After a short deliberation they sent the brave captain 
 Tullius to the general, and he spoke briefly to this effect (Orat. 
 Rect. ) : that the whole army were determined to obey the general, 
 with the exception of one or two mutineers, whom they would 
 select and hand over to the general for execution. 
 
 59. The brave soldier continued his narrative amid the attention 
 of all present (Orat. Rect.) : "On leaving Naples the enemy 
 proceeded with 600 of their bravest horsemen, and 10,000 
 infantry, to Nola, a town that is at no very great distance from 
 Naples, and is a convenient station for troops. Here they com- 
 mitted all sorts of atrocities ; they slew some two and tortured 
 others, arrested all the most wealthy citizens, burnt down the 
 principal buildings, and destroyed the bridge ; finally they 
 marched out, leaving the place a ruin. And if our forces had 
 not arrived in time to save Prseneste, that town also would have 
 suffered the same fate." (Orat. Obi.) "Indeed," continued the 
 soldier with earnestness, "this is the most cruel war that \ ever 
 
GRADUATED EXERCISES. 171 
 
 heard of; the conquered are not spared on either side, and the 
 bravest soldiers are hardened by war till they take pleasure in 
 cruelty. You, my friends, are happy in never having expe- 
 rienced the horrors of war ; do your best, then, to keep them at a 
 distance from your shores, and do not grudge a few thousand 
 pounds for this purpose." 
 
 60. (Orat. Rfct.) "With all his faults," said the kind-hearted 
 soldier, weeping, " our general was brave, just, and merciful, and 
 there was no one that did not trust him." Then, turning to his 
 fellow-soldiers, who were assembled in great numbers to ask for 
 their pay, he said (Orat. Obl.) y "Cease from thus execrating 
 the memory of the dead ; have you forgotten the many occasions 
 on which our general led us to victory ? Can you not remember 
 the many brilliant distinctions we gained under his command ? 
 Did we ever prefer a reasonable request to him that he would not 
 grant ? But this is just what you always do you curse to-day the 
 man whom you will bless to-morrow." This was what the brave 
 captain Tullius said, and if the othe* soldiers had been like him, 
 the rebellion would have been quelled, and the city of Naples, 
 with all its fortifications and supplies, would not have been 
 surrendered to the enemy in such haste. But, instead, of listening 
 to him, the infuriated soldiers selected the most turbulent of their 
 number they could find, and, under their leadership, marched in 
 haste to Rome. 
 
 61. (Orat. Rect.) "You will have no chance of attaining the 
 truth," said the wise philosopher to the young and thoughtless 
 Tullius, " unless you bestow more patience upon the investigation 
 of truth ; " then, seeing the young man preparing to interrupt him 
 without allowing him to finish his sentence, he said (Orat. Obl\ 
 " Suffer me to finish what I am saying. Have you persuaded 
 yourself that you are seriously studying, while you are merely 
 taking up from time to time any subject that attracts your atten- 
 tion and learning a smattering of it ? Did I not endeavour to 
 persuade you to study some one science with thoroughness and 
 steadiness ? And did I not propose to give you all the assistance 
 I could, if you liked to study the history of your nation and your 
 national literature ? Without knowing something of the history 
 of one's nation, it is impossible for a man to be a gentleman, 
 much less a successful politician. And I will further beg 
 you to consider the extent to which a desultory course of study 
 and the acquisition of a smattering of many subjects tends to 
 
172 GRADUATED EXERCISES. 
 
 make a man conceited, frivolous, and idle, if not positively 
 
 immoral. " 
 
 62. The angry and sorrowful queen scarcely knew in this great 
 calamity which alternative to prefer, whether it was better to 
 give up her empire, or to run the risk of being killed. How- 
 ever, with her usual firmness, she soon decided on the fit course 
 to pursue. Sending for the sergeant of her body-guard, she 
 informed him of all that had occurred, and requested him to send 
 the ten strongest men that he had, armed and prepared for a 
 journey to Rome (Orat. Obl.\ "Meanwhile," she said, "I 
 shall remain here ; and though I am now an object of pity, the 
 time will come when I shall be admired by my friends and 
 dreaded by my foes, and there will be no one who will maintain 
 that the queen of Rome did not behave with courage and with 
 wisdom. " After she had spoken thus, she left the palace with 
 the intention of quitting the city. But so great was the fury of 
 the crowd, consequent on the queen's refusal to appoint her suc- 
 cessor, that from sunrise to sunset they beset the city gates, 
 demanding a change of ministers and the execution of the unfor- 
 tunate courtier whom the queen had chosen last for her principal 
 adviser a request which they well knew the queen would never 
 grant, even though her refusal might cost her her own blood 
 and that of all her most faithful soldiers. 
 
 63. On finding that his friends were in this great misfortune, 
 the wise and prudent philosopher turned to the rash young Tullius 
 and advised him as follows (Orat. Obi.): "If you had only 
 listened to the advice I gave you ten years ago, you would not 
 have been brought into this great peril, and you would not have 
 been forced to seek safety by such disgraceful means. What has 
 been done, however, cannot be undone. Why, therefore, do you 
 delay longer here ? Did not your wise mother, when she sent 
 money to you at Rome not very long ago, send a friend at the 
 same time to inform you of the pleasure with which she had heard 
 that your life was spared, and of her willingness to receive you 
 home whenever you thought fit to return ? Cease complaining 
 then, and prepare to quit this place for Rome at a moment's 
 notice." On hearing this, young Tullius, with his usual rashness, 
 replied in haste ( Orat. Rect. ), " I have no more to say; but I should 
 like to inform you that your warnings, whether they are wise or 
 unwise, have not the slightest effect upon me : and I shall judge 
 for myself, without the interference of others, whether it is better 
 
GRADUATED EXERCISES. 173 
 
 to go to Rome or to remain at Carthage. I never asked anyone 
 to spare me or to pity me, and I ask no one now." 
 
 64. When the general had heard this, he turned with fury to his 
 brave officers, Tullius and Balbus, and said (Orat. 6W.), " Why 
 did you not tell me of this before I came here ? Now that it is 
 too late to help our countrymen, you come with the sad news 
 that almost the whole of our army is destroyed, that 1,400 of 
 the infantry have been slain, that the cavalry have fled to their 
 respective homes, and there is no hope left. What was there to 
 prevent you from bridging over the river and marching upon 
 Rome. If even a single regiment out of your vast army had 
 done this, you would have penetrated without resistance into 
 the heart of the enemy's country." Hearing this, the officers 
 threw themselves at their general's feet with tears and supplica- 
 tions, and said that they would never desert him, that nothing 
 should induce them to break their faith with him, and that 
 they would spare no one, and pity no one, who dared to accuse 
 him of the slightest faulL All they wanted was, that he would 
 give them a chance of redeeming their character and proving 
 their penitence. 
 
 65. After the occupation of the bridge over the river, near 
 the village of Alino, some seventeen miles from their camp, 
 the little band of heroes did not enjoy a long respite from the 
 attacks of the superior force by which they were now completely 
 surrounded. Admirable was the spirit in which they prepared 
 to resist the assault. Although they knew not where to look for 
 succour, and could scarcely hope to succeed if unassisted, they 
 felt that they could do their country good service, even if they 
 only checked the invaders' progress for a few hours; and for such 
 an object as this it seemed to these brave men worth while to 
 risk their lives. In this dangerous position the general made his 
 arrangements with coolness and sagacity. He sent out a few of 
 the swiftest of his cavalry with orders to scour the country for ten 
 miles round, and to bring back word the same day of the position 
 and numbers of the enemy, and whether the attacking force con- 
 sisted mostly of cavalry or infantry ; they were also, if possible, 
 to take a prisoner or two, so as to enable them to gain informa- 
 tion of the enemy's plans. The rest of the army was employed, 
 without excepting even the officers, in fortifying all the weakest 
 points of the position. After (postquam) all preparations 
 had been completed, the aged general collected his men (and) 
 
174 GRADUATED EXERCISES. 
 
 addressed them in his usual cheerful way (Orat. Obl.)i " I have 
 done," he said, " what I could : the rest depends on you ; and I 
 am sure you will not, as the enemy have repeatedly done, promise 
 without performing. I now dismiss you to your several posts, in 
 perfect confidence that you will not live to be pitied, and that 
 none of you will prefer disgrace to death. " 
 
 66. " The flower that blooms to -day to- morrow dies," says the 
 melodious poet Shelley in one of his sweetest poems ; and in truth, 
 poets, moralists, novelists, and philosophers repeat, almost 
 without ceasing, meditations on the transitory nature of every 
 thing in the world, and are never tired of asserting that life is 
 nothing but a dream. It is cutious, however, to note the little 
 success that these remarks, in their usual exaggerated form, have 
 had in influencing the actions of practical men. The instinct of 
 the majority of mankind refuses to believe those who would 
 maintain that life is a dream, heroism a delusion, and that there is 
 nothing worth living for. On the contrary, men have felt that 
 there is no position in life but can be made real and noble by 
 acts of self-sacrifice, whether for the benefit of one's country or 
 for that of individuals. I am therefore inclined to prefer to the 
 usual exaggerations of philosophers, the following simple advice 
 which I once heard a father give to his son ( Orat. Obi. ) : " Do 
 not forget the importance that attaches to every action of life. It 
 matters not whether it be great or small ; for whether great or 
 small, it can be rightly or wrongly done. That was what the 
 Stoics meant when they said that, even if a bad man merely ex- 
 tended his finger, he sinned ; by which they meant that the most 
 trifling action of a bad man must be bad." 
 
 67. Ten years after the reduction of this vast kingdom, the 
 Casmathians, led by the intrepid Balbus, made a daring inroad 
 beyond the river Eborius and advanced to Tuiium, a town some 
 thirty miles off, with no more than 500 horse. By order of 
 Tullius, the king of Turium, the bridge had been broken down 
 to cut off the retreat of Balbus, and the person or head of the 
 rebel was every moment expected. The king's legate, from a 
 motive of fear or pity, having sent a messenger to apprise 
 Balbus of his danger, recommended him to escape with speed. 
 "Although," replied the intrepid Casmathian to the messenger, 
 " your master is at the head of 30,000 men, yet, since he wishes 
 to -know what sort of men crossed the Eborius with me, I will 
 shew him that he has not, in all that host, three such men as 
 
GRADUATED EXERCISES. 175 
 
 these." Then turning to three of his followers, he ordered the 
 hrst to plunge a dagger into his heart, the second to leap into 
 the Eborius, and the third to cast himself down a precipice. 
 All of them obeyed without uttering a word of remonstrance. 
 "Relate what you have seen," continued Balbus. "Before 
 evening it will be your general, not I, that will need pity. Why 
 do you loiter"? Depart, unless you wish to perish ; and tell him 
 that twelve hours hence he will be chained among my dogs." 
 Before the evening the camp was surprised, and the threat 
 executed. 
 
 68. The haughty Solyman, Emperor of Turkey, in his attack 
 on Hungary, took the city of Belgrade, which was considered 
 with justice the bulwark of Christendom. After this important 
 conquest, a woman of low rank approached him and complained 
 wtih bitterness that some of his soldiers had carried off her cattle 
 one night while she was asleep, and had thus deprived her of her 
 only means of subsistence. "Tell me," said Solyman, with a 
 smile, "how you contrived to sleep so soundly that the robbers 
 did not wake you. I could not have slept so soundly." "True, 
 my sovereign," replied the woman, "I did sleep soundly, but it 
 was in the fullest confidence that your highness watched for tht 
 safety of your, poorest subjects." 
 
 The magnanimous emperor, instead of resenting this freedom, 
 praised the courage with which she had spoken, and made th< 
 poor woman ample amends for the loss she had sustained. 
 
LATIN GE NDERS, 
 
 FIRST DECLENSION. 
 
 Feminine. 
 SECOND DECLENSION. 
 
 Meaculine Endings, er, ir, and us. Neuter^Ending, UM.. 
 (alvns, coins (m), domns, humus, vannus : 
 exceptions Greek nouns in odus, as exodus, &c., with dialectns, diphthonsrus, &C- 
 
 (.PELAGUS, VIRUS, wmysnc/ml 
 
 THIRD DECLENSION. 
 
 Masculine Endings. 
 
 Feminine Endings. Neuter Ending*. 
 
 er, or, os 
 es, imparisyllabic 
 o, when not do, go, io 
 
 do, go, io, as, is, ans, z 
 
 es, parisyllabic ; s, impure 
 US, long, in hypermonosyllables 
 
 C, A, T, E, L, N, 
 
 AR, UR, us short, 
 US long, in mono- 
 
 
 Principal Exceptions. 
 
 syllables 
 
 Principal Exceptions. 
 
 do cardo ordo udo 
 
 Principal Exceptns* 
 
 r CADAVER ITER 
 PAPAVER TUBER 
 
 go harpago ligo margo 
 io nouns not abstract^ as papilio, &C. ; 
 
 I sal sol 
 
 UBER VER 
 
 alsoternio, &c. 
 
 n lien pecten 
 
 VERBER linter 
 
 as as elephas vas (padis} 
 
 ren splen 
 
 
 VAS (pasts) FAS NEFAS 
 
 
 or arbor ^QUOR 
 
 is amnis anguis (f) axis cassis (is) 
 
 wrfur furfur 
 
 COR MARMOR 
 
 cinis collis crinis ensis 
 
 turtur vultur 
 
 
 fascis finis (f) follis funis 
 
 
 os COS dOS 
 
 ignis lapis mensis orbis 
 
 us short, lepus 
 
 CHAOS EPOS 
 
 os (pris) os (pssis) 
 
 panis piscis postis pulvis 
 sangiiis t orris unguis vectis 
 
 pecUS (udis) 
 
 
 vermis 
 
 us lffftg- t jgniB (m) 
 
 es coinpes merces 
 merges quies 
 
 x calix codex cortex frutex 
 grex pollex silex thorax 
 
 SnS (m) mus 
 
 requies seges 
 
 vertex 
 
 
 teges -*s 
 
 es acinaces 
 
 
 
 s bidens(f) dens fons hydrops 
 
 
 o caro echo 
 
 mons pons rudens (f) 
 
 
 FOURTH DECLENSION. 
 Masculine, except acns, idns (pi)., manus, portions, tribns. 
 
 FIFTH DECLENSION. 
 Feminine, except dies (f. Poets.), meridies. 
 
 A. Masculine by meaning. Names of Male persons, the Occupations of men, anc 
 
 Winds, Rivers, and Months. 
 
 B. Feminine ,, of Females, Countries, Islands, Towns. 
 
 Plants, and Trees. 
 
 Masculine 
 
 TOWNS. Some in o, as, Croto, Hippo, &c. 
 Plurals in i, as Veii, Delphi, &c. 
 
 AllPh , ,, - 
 
 PLANTS. Those in er (and many tn us) of 
 the second. 
 
 .EXCEPTIONS TO B NEUTER. 
 
 TOWNS. A II in UM, or plural A. 
 
 Those in E or UR of the third. 
 PLANTS. Those in EH o* UR */ the third 
 
SCHEME OF LATIN PRONUNCIATION.* 
 Based on the nearest English Approximations. 
 
 Latin a 
 * 
 I 
 
 ae 
 oe 
 e 
 I 
 \ 
 6 
 6 
 u 
 u 
 au 
 
 eu 
 ei 
 
 VOWELS AND DIPHTHONGS. 
 
 English a in father. 
 
 ,, first a in away, or a invilLj. 
 ai in pam. 
 ai in pam. 
 <z; in pain. 
 
 * in m^n. 
 
 i in mach/ne. 
 
 i in p;ty. 
 
 in h<?me. 
 
 in top. 
 
 w in rule. 
 
 in foil. 
 <rw in power. 
 
 {Latin 6 followed quickly by Latin 
 ti (differs little from present 
 pronunciation). 
 
 r Latin e followed quickly by Latin 
 X i (differs little from ai in pain). 
 
 CONSONANTS. 
 
 English k. 
 
 s in jin. 
 /in ca/, not 
 in na/ion. 
 
 Lathi c, ch 
 S 
 
 s 
 
 t (ratio) 
 
 J 
 
 v 
 
 > ^1 pfr th ,, _, ^.-, "-. 
 
 bs, bt should be sounded and generally written ps, pt. 
 Latin 8 between two vowels = (sometimes) English s in rose, e.g. ' 
 
 * Taken from the Syllabus of Latin Pronunciation, issued by the Pro- 
 fessors of Latin at the Universities of Cambridge and Oxford, at the request 
 of the Head Masters of Schools. Some modifications have been made by 
 the suppression of all Italian standards, and of all the English standards of 
 pronunciation that contain a vowel followed by r. Consequently the Latin 
 O is represented by the English o. The Professors give the option of pro- 
 nouncing v as v or as w. 
 
 rosa. 
 
178 APPENDIX. 
 
 APPENDIX 
 
 ON THE CONNECTION OF SENTENCES. 
 
 You may know the Latin equivalents of every word and idiom in the 
 English language, and yet may be unable to write Latin Prose. For to 
 write Prose you must also know how to connect together the different parts 
 of a Latin sentence, and the different sentences of a Latin passage. For this 
 purpose the following rules may be useful. They rise naturally out of the 
 colloquial nature of English as contrasted with the logical nature of Latin : 
 
 I. English prefers co-ordinate, Latin subordinate clauses, 
 II. English prefers multiplicity of subjects, Latin one subject. 
 III. English omits connecting particles, Latin inserts them. 
 IV. English uses epithets, Latin uses subordinate clauses. 
 
 I. He took and burned the bridge Pontem cap tum incendit 
 
 II. They asked hint his opinion, Rogatus (or interroganti 
 and he replied, &c* bus) sententiam respondit 
 
 III. When you have a group of abrupt English sentences connected perhaps 
 by no Conjunctions at all, or by and (which may mean anything) e.g. 
 (i) * The king refused the petition ; (2) The queen was delighted* you must 
 ask, first, which is the most important sentence in the group ? secondly, what 
 is the relation between this, the most important sentence, and others that are 
 less important ? The most important sentence must be as it were the spine, 
 of the sentence, and the less important must be the vertebrae, and must be 
 carefully connected with the spine. A Latin period is vertebrate. 
 
 But how are we to connect each of the vertebrae with the spine? What is 
 to be our connecting particle in each case? The English will not help us 
 much here : for the connecting particles in English are like the vowel points 
 in Hebrew they are not written, but must be deduced from the context, and 
 must be expressed by the voice. For example, above, the relation of sen- 
 tence (2) to sentence (i) is that of (a) consequence to cause, and this may be ex- 
 pressed in two ways, either by a forward link : ' Quod quum rex nega- 
 visset se facturum, regina prae gaudio exultabat,' or by a backward link, 
 
 ^ ^ ^ 1 
 
 ' Quod or quse res reginam summo gaudio affecit ' or, ' Regina i gitur ,' or, 
 
 ' Itaque regina.' But alter (2) above, and you must alter your connecting 
 
 particle. 
 
APPENDIX. 179 
 
 Thus, for ' the queen teas delighted* write 
 
 ((b) was still patient' (contrariety). 
 (c) had not .shown her usual tact* (cause of the king's re- 
 fusal). 
 (({) left the room in anger' (immediate sequence), 
 (e) insulted the petitioners ' \sitttultaneousness, or addition). 
 (/) saw that all was lost (consequence late but inevitable^ 
 turn yero, or, turn dexnum) 
 (g) had anticipated this' (precedence, jam ante a). 
 
 All these different sentences will require different forward or backivard 
 lixks : some of these are : 
 
 FORWARD LINKS: quum, quia, quoniam, qnamvis, ut 
 [although), quanquam, ita (ut), tain-- quam, aiitequani, prlus- 
 quam, donee, simul ac, dum, partim, non solum, quunx 
 (...turn), simul (...sixnul), aut (either), et (both), si, nisi. ec. 
 
 The Participle is also used as a forward link, rogatus. rvhen he was 
 asked; and so are ut and qui in the phrases cujus erat stultitioe, 
 ut erat semper stultus. 
 
 BACKWARD LINKS: Nam, enim, quippe, itaque, Igiturj 
 idcirco, quocirca, quamobrem, quare, autem. vero, 
 verum, sea, at, quanquam (and yet), jam. interim, interea, 
 confestim, mox, deinde, postremo, denique, turn demum > 
 porro, prseterea, hue accedebat ut. Above all. the Relative Pro- 
 noun is thus used, e.g. ' quse quum ita sint,' ' quibus auditis,' 'quod 
 quum intellexisset,' and ' quod si,' which last is almost equivalent to our 
 ' and if.' It will be a useful exercise to classify these links or conjunctions 
 according to their meaning. 
 
 Sometimes a backward link is rendered unnecessary by an emphatic word 
 at the beginning, of the sentence, referring to the previoa sentence, e.g. 
 * Nee vero ulla vis imperii tanta est ut premente metu posslt esse diuturna. 
 Testis est Phalaris, &c.' So especially idem for ' he also/ See Par. 46. 
 
 IV. Under the head of Omission of Connecting Particles comes the English 
 use of implied statement or innuendo : e.g. ' The haughty monarch refused to 
 listen to the remonstrances of his ministers.' Here the epithet ' haughty 
 implies the reason why the monarch did not listen. The conversational 
 English, disliking subordinate sentences, prefers to imply the reason in ao 
 epithet : the logical Latin prefers to express it : ' cujus erat semper super- 
 bue,' 'Ut erat natura super bus.' 
 
ALPHABETICAL INDEX. 
 
 The references (unless the page is specially mentioned) are to the 
 PARAGRAPHS. 
 
 Par. 
 
 Ablative, meaning of . . . 28* 
 
 in i and e. Page 115* 
 
 when used . . 28-32 
 
 after Deponents . 13 
 
 Abstract Nouns not frequent in 
 
 Latin 3 
 
 Accusative, before and after 
 
 Infinitive, ambiguous ... 48 
 Adjectives, not doubled . . 12 
 Adverbs, Adverbial Phrases 24, 25 
 
 After, Conjunction n 
 
 Alms 7 
 
 All, 'all that, &.C. 9 .... 54 
 A Isfl, in ' he also ' = idem . . 46 
 
 Alter 7 
 
 And he tyoO. 46 
 
 And omitted 47 
 
 A nd * and no one, nothing, &c.' 45 
 Another ........ 7 
 
 Antequam, when followed 
 
 by Subjunctive 66 
 
 Any 7 
 
 Apodosis, meaning of . . . .69* 
 
 As . . . as 59 
 
 As long as . . * n 
 
 AsJ>>' I askto* .... Page 89 
 
 At, ' at enim ' 440. 
 
 Attribute, the 18 
 
 Autem, different from sed . 44^ 
 
 Auxiliary Verbs 12 
 
 Because, ' not because . . . but 
 
 because' 68 
 
 Before, Conjunction . . . . n 
 
 But omitted 47 
 
 But, when sed, when autem. 444 
 But, ' there's no one but ' . . 55 
 CelO, construction of .... 14 
 Come, ' I come to see ' .... 72 
 Command ', ' I command him 
 
 to' ..... Page 89 
 
 Command in oratio obliqua . . 78^ 
 Comparative of Adjectives 
 
 in -eus, -ius, -uus Page 2tt 
 Comparison,expressed by quaxn 61 
 Comparison, expressed by the 
 
 Ablative 62 
 
 Conditional Sentences .... 69 
 
 Conjunctions . . . . . . 43-72 
 
 .., Coordinate ... 44 
 
 Par. 
 Conjunctions, Coordinate and 
 
 Subordinate 
 
 Conjunctions, of Condition 
 of Puipose . 
 
 of Reason . 
 
 Negative . . 45 
 
 Enclitic . . 44/1 
 
 Subordinate . 48 
 
 Connection of Sentences . Page 164 
 
 Could Page 10 
 
 Cum, me cum, <5^c. . Page 56 
 Dative after Verbs and Ad- 
 jectives 6, 13 
 
 Dative after Verbs of Motion 15 
 Dative of Design (Double Da- 
 tive) 17 
 
 Debui 13 
 
 Dependent Interrogative ... 53 
 Dignus followed by Abl. . . 32 
 
 Domum 16 
 
 Dum followed by Pres. Tense, n 
 
 Each 7 
 
 Ellipse of Prepositions ... 42 
 ,, of Verb after Conjunc- 
 tions 70 
 
 Emptiness, expressed by Abl. . 31 
 
 Enclitics 44* 
 
 Epithet, implying cause . . Page 6 
 Et omitted . . .... 44 
 
 Et non, to be avoided ... 45 
 
 Ex, * ex itinere ' 39 
 
 Extension, expressed by Ace. . 27 
 
 Every 22 
 
 Fear, I (construction) .... 49 
 
 Fertur 49 
 
 First, ' he was \hzfirst to ' Page 91 
 Fit, ' he is not fit to &c.' 90 
 For, 'for ten minutes ' ... 27 
 Fulness, expressed by Abl. . . 30 
 Future Participle, how ex- 
 pressed in Inceptives. . Page 98 
 Genitive after accuse, ab- 
 
 solvo 36 
 
 Genitive after Impers. Verbs 13* 
 Participial Adj. 34 
 
 other Adj. . . 35 
 
 ,, of Quality ... 37 
 Objective .... 33 
 after Adjectives and 
 
 Participles . . 34 s 
 
INDEX. 
 
 IS i 
 
 Par. 
 
 Genitive after Verbs of Ac- 
 cusing, &c. . . 36 
 Gerund, after what Preposi- 
 tions 75 
 
 Gerundive . . 75 
 
 used impersonally 5 
 
 Great, ' this great calamity * 19 
 
 Having, ' having fA\A . (end) 66 
 
 Him = to him '3 
 
 flint = SC ..... ifrt, ?8/ 
 Hope, * I hope to, that* . Page 88 
 
 Idem, = he also 4 
 
 //, //becomes* 
 
 'he asked if' 5* 
 
 f tf so,' '//not* 7 
 
 I pritur, where placed . . . 44 
 Impersonal Verbs . . . iyt 
 
 In. ' in anger ' 24 
 
 Indignus, followed by Abl. . 32 
 
 Infinitive Future . Page 98 
 
 and ACC ambig. . 48 
 
 Instead of Page 95 
 
 Interest 130 
 
 Interrogative, Dependent . . 53 
 in t )rat. Obliqua fid 
 
 Islands, case of, after verbs 
 
 of motion 16 
 
 //, it was John that &c.' . . 4 
 
 redundant 5 
 
 * it is said that ' 5 
 
 Ita followed by Si . . Page 85 
 
 meaning of 71 
 
 Jam, different from nunc . . 25 
 Jubeo, Construction of Page 89 
 Like, * a man /i&rCato* ... 60 
 
 Locative Case i 
 
 Magis, different from plus . 25 
 
 Magni 29 
 
 Mea interest 130 
 
 Measure of excess . .... 42 
 
 Metaphors 79 
 
 Minoris ....... 29 
 
 Modo = only 23 
 
 More t ' more than a hundred ' . 63 
 
 ,, when magis, when plus 25 
 
 Motion, Verbs implying ... 15 
 
 Verbs of .".... x6 
 
 MultO with Comparative . . 43 
 
 Must . . 
 
 Ne in Prohibition 
 
 Neforut. . .non ... 7 
 
 Nemine, avoid i 
 
 Neminis, avoid - 
 
 Nemo = no 
 
 Neque, not etnon ... 45 
 Neuter, used Adverbially . 14 
 
 Par. 
 
 No, ' no poet* . . . . . 2J 
 
 Nostri, Genitive, when used. 10 
 Nostrum, Genitive, when 
 
 used 10 
 
 Not, * not because* 68 
 
 Now, jam, nunc 25 
 
 ,, Conj. turned by Rel. . . 46 
 
 Nullius, not neminis . . 10 
 
 Nullo, not nemine . . . 10 
 
 Nunc, different from jam . 25 
 
 Object, Indirect 14 
 
 Objective Genitive ... 33 
 
 V"after Participles 34 
 
 Of = made of 37 
 
 ,, redundant 40 
 
 One 8, 9 
 
 Once, when scmel. when 
 
 forte, when quondam . 25 
 
 Only . . . . ' 25 
 
 Oratio Obliqua . ... 78* 
 
 Recta 78 
 
 Other, 'the other' 7 
 
 Ought Page 10 
 
 Parentheses 77 
 
 Parttciple Present (English) 23, 74 
 
 Paryi 29 
 
 Passive English rendered im- 
 personally 6 
 
 Passive English ambiguous . 1 1 
 
 PaullO with Comparatives . . 42 
 Personifications, not so frequent 
 in Latin as in English . . . 
 Persuaded, I am ..... 
 Pluris 
 
 Plus, different from xnagis 
 Point of time 
 
 7 ! 
 
 29 
 
 25 
 28 
 11,66 
 
 Postquam 
 Potui 
 
 Prepositions, Alphabetical Dic- 
 tionary of 41 
 
 Prepositions^ between two 
 
 Nouns 3.H 
 
 Prepositions, Ellipse of ... 42 
 ., local meanings of 26 
 
 Prepositions implying Rest or 
 
 Motion 39 
 
 Prepositions, Verbs com- 
 pounded with 15 
 
 Prepositional phrases .... 20 
 
 Price 29 
 
 Prius-quam, when followed 
 
 by Subjunctive 66 
 
 Prohibition 12 
 
 Premise, f I promise to ' . Page 88 
 
 Pronouns 7-10 
 
 f , how avoided .... 76 
 
182 
 
 INDEX. 
 
 Protasis, meaning of 
 Provided that . . 
 
 Quaxn 
 
 Quamvis . . . 
 Qaanquam 
 
 Par. 
 . .69* 
 Page 83 
 
 . . 61 
 Page 84 
 84 
 
 Quanti 29 
 
 Question, Dependent .... 53 
 ,, in Oratio Obliqua . 78^ 
 
 Qui 52 
 
 Qiiidaxn = a 22 
 
 Quidem to be separated from 
 
 ne 45 
 
 Quidquid hominum . . 20 
 
 Quilibet, qui vis, when used 7 
 Quin followed by futurum 
 
 sit 
 
 49 
 
 Quisquam, necquisquam 45 
 ,, when used 7, Page 1 13! 
 
 Quisque 
 
 used after a Super- 
 lative Adjective 22 
 
 Quivis 7 
 
 Q uum . . ; 66 
 
 Refert 13* 
 
 Reflexive Verbs .... 13^ 
 Relative Pronoun .... 52-59 
 omitted . . 58 
 
 Relative precedes Antecedent 54 
 Relatival Conjunctions . . . 59 
 
 Rus 16 
 
 Se, distinguished from ilium. ioa 
 Sed ,, autem 44^ 
 
 Sequence of Tenses . . 64 
 
 Should 12 
 
 Si 69 
 
 Sive and Utrum . . . Page 85 
 
 Solum 'only' 25 
 
 Subjunctive, after Relative 
 
 Pronoun 52 
 
 Subjunctive, when used 
 
 after Conjunctions of Time . 66 
 Sum, with Double Dative . . 17 
 Supine, ' venio visum ' . . 75 
 
 Supposing Page 83 
 
 Suus, ipsius . . . Page 102 
 
 Tanti 29 
 
 Tan turn 'only' .... 25 
 
 Tenses n 
 
 Tenses, sequence of ... 64 
 
 Than 61-63 
 
 That, Conjunction ... 48, 49 
 'that . . . not 1 ne . 72 
 ' there's no doubt that ' . 49 
 ' I fear that ' .... 49 
 ,, ' it is said that' ... 49 
 'it seems that' ... 49 
 That, Pronoun 5 
 
 Par. 
 
 That, distinguished from who . 52 
 * the most beautiful that* 54 
 after repeatedAntecedent 56 
 
 for iu hen 57 
 
 ,, ' that . . . 0/'=quin 55 
 
 The, uses of 21 
 
 The, ' the battle of Cannes ' . 20 
 
 ,, ' the men in the ship . . 20 
 
 ' the river Tiber ' . . . 18 
 
 ,. ' the timid dove '. . . . 18 
 
 This, * this great calamity ' . . 19 
 
 Though Page 84 
 
 Till, Conjunction n 
 
 Time, extension of 27 
 
 Time, point of 28 
 
 To, different meanings of . . 73 
 
 Too, 'too to* Page 90 
 
 Towns, after Verbs of Motion 16 
 Tumcemum. . . . Page 85 
 
 UIIus 7 
 
 Unless .... Par. n, Page 85 
 
 Uterque 7 
 
 Utinam 72 
 
 Utrum, used in Dependent 
 
 Interrcgatives . . . . 51 
 
 Verbal, after Prepositions . . 75 
 
 , , English use of ... 75 
 
 Verbs, Auxiliary xa 
 
 followed by to . . . . 73 
 that ... 49 
 
 Verbs, compounded with Pre- 
 positions . . . . 15 
 followed by the Abl. . 13 
 two Ace. 14 
 
 Dat. 6. 13, 15 
 
 Genitive 13 
 
 ,, Ut Page 89 
 
 ,, Impersonal. . . . 13* 
 Vereor (construction) ... 49 
 Vero different from verum . 44 
 Verum different from vero . 44 
 Vestri, Genitive, when used . 10 
 Ve Strum, Genitive, when used 7 
 
 Videtur 49 
 
 W'hat, double use of .... 53 
 When, ' "when he comes ' . . . xi 
 Whether, when utrum, when 
 
 sive 51 
 
 While, followed by Eng. Past, 
 
 Lat. Pres n 
 
 While, (logical) omitted . 
 
 >t not temporal . . 
 
 ' while walking ' . . 70 
 
 Who, different from that . . 52 
 
 With, ' "with anger ' . . 24 
 
 Without, With Verbal . Page 96 
 
 Would la 
 
ONE MONTH USE 
 
 PLEASE RETURN TO DESK 
 FROM WHICH BORROWED 
 
 EDUCATION-PSYCHOLOGY 
 LIBRARY 
 
 This book is due on the last date stamped below, or 
 
 on the date to which renewed. 
 
 1-month loans may be renewed by calling 642-4209 
 Renewals and recharges may be made 4 days prior 
 
 IU UUC UtttC. 
 
 ALL BOOKS ARE SUBJECT TO RECALL 7 DAYS 
 AFTER DATE CHECKED OUT. 
 
 MAY ft 1373 
 
 
 fn+r-i u 
 
 
 . .,* , < ** 
 
 
 
 
 NIIKC JUN 2 2 1990 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 General Library 
 
 T T\ 01 A QA K. "Jr. i Tnl>Aei-v r\f r^Q I ifrtrni a 
 
 (S5877L) 
 
 Berkeley 
 
U.C. BERKELEY LIBRARIES